Generator Manual 1

B1

SECTION:

Project Emergency Diesel Generator SetsItem 59-G9101, 59-G9102, 59-G9103, 59-G9104

Vendor Document No: QCSE1D5003-B-8005Document Description: Alternator - O & M ManualInternal Reference : #1789/10/15

B1 11.03.2007 FOR APPROVAL VN VN NQ

IDENT NO. QCSE1D5003-B-8005

REQ NO. QCS/50/00/EL/RQ/NA/009-B

PURCHASER'S PERMISSION TO PROCEED OR REVIEW TAKEN ON VENDOR

PRINTS SHALL NOT RELIEVE VENDOR FROM ITS RESPONSIBILITIES OR

LIABILITIES UNDER PURCHASE ORDER.

COMMENTS AS NOTED

DATE:INFORMATION

C-DO NOT PROCEED

WITH FABRICATION

D-RECEIVED AS

A-REVIEWED WITH

NO COMMENT

QATARGAS 3 & 4 ONSHORE PROJECT

PO NO. QCSE1D5003

B-REVIEWED WITH

lgalliou

May 04, '07

lgalliou

lgalliou

Al Bahar 03/2007

Your order: PZ06Q002 THRU

Your project: 1789 Qatar Gas/on-shore

AvK Order no. 8428196A003

Contents

1 General Notes and Instructions Safety precautions Check list Maintenance schedule Customer contact list & Complaint report

2 Drawings Dimension drawing alternator AZ 20657 Rotor drawing 87664

3 Circuit Diagram Circuit diagram K850.3.123 Legend to circuit diagram K850.3.123

4 Operating Instructions Three-phase synchronous electrical machines series DIG 110...191 Enclosure to operating instructions

5 Cooler Description User manual KLIMA air-air cooler

6 Regulator Descriptions Voltage regulator Basler DECS 200 Mounting plate 251 Drawings to mounting plate 251

7 Technical Data Technical Data Test reports 8428196A003

General Notes

General NotesSafety Precautions

General NotesAH/e-04-2003/A page 2

Read this advice as well asthe operating instructionssupplied prior tocommissioning or storage of

the generator.Any works on the generator have to beperformed by qualified and trainedpersonnel only.Any person, working on the generatorhas to read and understand theseoperating instructions.

1. General Notes

1.1 Important notes for users

In the following instructions you will findimportant information and safety advice fortransportation, installation and operationfor AvK generators of the series DSG andDIG.

AvK generators are designed for differentapplications for the use on land as well asoffshore. Series DIG is dimensioned for anominal voltage bigger than 1 kV, DSG fora nominal voltage up to 1 kV. Please referto the rating plate mounted on thegenerator for design data and as well as inthe data of the respective order.

Any works on the generator has to beperformed by qualified and trainedpersonnel only. The necessaryqualification can be obtained by training orcourses through the manufacturer.Technicians can obtain a specialgenerator training at AvK Germany.

The installation should preferably beperformed by an AvK service technician orby a specially trained qualified technician.

The operating instructions are to be keptclose to the generator and have to beavailable for the personnel at any time.

Please take notice of the safetyprecautions in chapter 2. Further safetyprecautions are mentioned in therespective chapters.

The order related data of the generator aswell as the operating instructions for

additional parts can be found in thedocumentation.

The documentation, including theoperating instructions, are part of themachine and have to be passed on to thenext user in case the generator is sold ormoved.

1.2 Liability and guarantee

All statements and advice in the operatinginstructions are made under considerationof our present knowledge and experience.

The technical informationand data, described in thismanual, is the correct stateof information at time of

printing. We reserve the right tochanges due to technical progresswithout changing this operatinginstruction. Accordingly, no claims canbe made from statements anddescriptions in this manual.

We will not be liable for any damages orbreakdowns due to operating mistakes indisregard of these instruction or improperrepairs.

We particularly point out, that spare partsand additional parts not supplied by AvK,have to be accepted by AvK. AvK willexclude any liability for damages thatresult from the use of spare and additionalparts that have not been accepted by AvK.The installation or use of foreign productsmay possibly change the constructivelygiven design of the electric machine in anegative way, and may restrict the safetyof persons, machine or other values.

Any unauthorized modifications andchanges on the generator are not allowedfor reasons of safety and will exclude anyliability of AvK for resulting damages. Iftransformers supplied by the customershall be installed in the terminal box, AvKhas to be consulted first.

The preceding notes do not extend theterms of liability and guarantee of thegeneral delivery terms of AvK.


Manufacturer's Address

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KGBunsenstraße 17D-85053 Ingolstadt

Phone (+49) (0)841 / 792-0FAX (+49) (0)841 / 792-250

All rights reserved. Reprintsor copies - even extracts -need the permission of AvK.

2. Safety Precautions

During transportation, installation,commissioning and maintenance, certainworks might have to be performed on thegenerator, e.g. on feet support, shaft end,bearings, terminal box, etc. The workingarea and area of danger includes thesurroundings of the generator and theprime mover.During normal operation, the working areashould be limited to the operating andmonitoring devices of the switchboard.

Despite taking into consideration all safetyprecautions, the generator may be asource of danger, electrically andmechanically. To avoid damages topersons and values, all safety precautionshave strictly to be followed.

Beside all safety notes in the operatinginstruction the local safety precautions andrules for the prevention of accidents haveto be followed.

2.1 Description of symbols and advice

The following symbols are used in theinstructions to highlight particular pointsand actions:

Warning! Life in danger!

Danger!

Besides these safety notes all local validinstructions for safety and accidentprevention have to be followed.

Follow all warnings andadvice and act very carefullyin these cases. Inform allpersons working on the

generator about all work-safetyregulations.

2.2 Signs on the generator

At particular dangerous points on thegenerator you will find safety notes. Toavoid damages to persons or values thesesafety notes have to be followed verystrictly.

Achtung!BetriebsanleitungIm Klemmenkasten!Vor Inbetriebnahme unbedingt lesen.

Caution!Operating instructions are inside theterminal box. These must be read prior tocommissioning.

The documents for the generator are inthe terminal box

Transportsicherungen.Vor Inbetriebnahme entfernen

Transport Safety DevicesRemove prior to commissioning.During transportation the rotor is securedagainst shifting. The transport safetydevices have to be removed beforecommissioning.

Maschine nicht betriebsfähig!

Machine out of order

This sign is mounted when the installationof transformers in the terminal box isnecessary. The transformers have to beinstalled prior to commissioning. In this


case the installation manual for thetransformers is in the terminal box and inthe enclosed documents.

E-Teile im Klemmenkasten

Spare Parts are inside

Spare parts that are delivered with thegenerator are in the terminal box. Thespare parts have to be removed.

ABSTANDSMAß-PROTOKOLLAM GLEICHRICHTERTÄGER

Mounting-distance test-report is inside

For the alignment of single bearingmachines it is important to keep themounting distance between rotor andstator on the NDE of the generator.The respective report can be found on therectifier carrier at the NDE of thegenerator.

ACHTUNG!Vor Inbetriebnahme Öl einfüllen.Menge und Qualität laut Beschreibung

Caution!Fill in oil prior to commissioning!Please refer to operating instructions ofthe sleeve bearing manufacturer foramount and quality.

Generators with sleeve bearings need oilto be re-filled before commissioning. Theinstructions from the sleeve bearingmanufacturer are enclosed.

2.2 Safety Devices

Special covers are mounted to protectagainst mechanical danger (e.g. rotatingparts). Protection against electrical dangeris provided by covers and devices againstover-voltage and over-current. It is notallowed to change or dismount any safetydevices or to put them out of order.

Unprotected machine partsmay cause severe injuries.

All safety devices like covers, barriers andprotections have to be in place and mustbe functioning perfectly at all times.

It is not permitted to operatethe generator with damagedsafety devices!

2.3 Safety at site

For operating the electrical machine theresponsibilities have to be determinedclearly and kept, so that no unclearsituation regarding safety may occur.The generator must only be operatedwhen it is in an excellent state andaccording to the design data. Any changethat reduces the safety has to be reportedto the responsible person immediately.

Modifications on themachine are only allowed inagreement with AvK andthese are to be performed

under supervision of qualifiedpersonnel.

The way to the operating and monitoringdevices has to be free and must not beobstructed by any objects.

Prior to commissioning andduring maintenance works, allpersons in the danger areahave to be warned. They must

be ordered to leave the area.

After completion of work, the generatormust be checked by qualified personnel toensure it is in a safe working state.

2.4 Safety precautions for maintenance

Maintenance should normallyonly be performed when thegenerator is out of operation(except for the re-lubrication

of anti-friction bearings). The primemover has to be disconnected.


After completion of the maintenance work,it must be ensured that all protection andsafety devices are back in place properly.

2.5 Special Dangers

The operator of the machinehas to take care, that therules for fire protection arekept and the equivalent

agents for fire extinction are availablenear the machine and ready for use.

3. Shipping, Handling, Storage

3.1 Safety precautions for transport

Please comply with the localvalid regulations forshipments.

Warning!Never move loads overpersons!

• The shipment and the unloading of thegenerator must only be performed bypersonnel, who are familiar with thelifting cranes and correspondingdevices.

• The lifting devices have to be designedfor the weight of the generator(Chapter 3.4).

• Follow the shipping instructions(pictographs) on the cover of thegenerator.

• The generator must only be supportedon its feet. The support on any otherpart is not permitted. That is why thegenerator is delivered with atransportation construction.

• For the lifting of the generator, ringbolts are mounted on the generatorhousing.

Ring bolts, that are mountedon add-on pieces like e.g. thecooler top, must not be usedto lift the whole machine!

They are only used as mounting devicefor these add-ons.

• The ring bolts can only be used for thetransport of the separate machine,they are not designed to lift thecomplete unit (generator and primemover)

• For transporting the machine, thefollowing devices are permitted:

- Cable and chains,

that comply with the local regulations, that have a sufficient carrying capacity, that are in an excellent working condition

It is not permitted to usecables that are torn or worn.Cables and chains may not beknotted. Cables and chains

must not touch any sharp edges.

- Lifting devices: cranesoverhead cranes

• Moving the machine over roughground e.g. rails, by using a haulagecar is not permitted. This may causedamage to the bearings and thewindings. This is especially importantfor the moving of the machine withinthe factory.

3.2 Packaging

The material used for the packing of thegenerator is made of ozone-friendlymaterial – like wood. The packagingdepends on the mode of transport used –surface, water or air freight.When the transport time is for a longerperiod, then the generator will be packedin a protective covering against dust orhumidity.

3.3 Checking for Shipping Damage

We recommend checking thegenerator for shippingdamages and completedelivery by the time ofdelivery.


If there are damages on the goods (opendamages) report these to the haulagecontractor at take-over. In this case, thereceipt should only be given underreservation with a written statementregarding the estimated amount of thedamage.

If damages that were not noticeable by thetime of delivery (covered damages), aredetected later, they have to be reportedpromptly to AvK, latest 6 days after receiptof the delivery.

3.4 Unloading the generator

The unloading has to be performed incompliance with the safety precautions fortransport (see chapter 3.1) and the localsafety precautions and rules for theprevention of accidents.

Please refer to the freightpapers and the data of therespective order (Ratingplate) for the weight of the

generator.The weight of the generator is alsowritten on the rating plate.

3.5 Storage of the generator

After unloading, thegenerator and possibleboxes with loose parts haveto be stored until installation,

following the shipping instructions.

Wrapped parts and assessories must notbe unwrapped if the generator is stored fora longer period of time.

The machine and packages have to bestored in a safe place, dust-free and dry(humidity < 75%). Avoid mechanicalvibrations and damages.

If it is planned to store thegenerator for a longer periodof time, please contact AvKfor further information.

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG Bunsenstraße 17 85053 Ingolstadt, GermanyPhone: +49(0)841-792-0Fax: +49(0)841-792-250e-mail: [email protected]

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG Dreieich branchBenzstraße 47-4963303 Dreieich, GermanyPhone: +49(0)6103-5039-0Fax: +49(0)6103-5039-40e-mail: [email protected]

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG / Service Date: 22.07.2002

AvK Checklist to Order No. Page 2


Customer: .............................................................

Order No.: .............................................................

Generator Type: .............................................................

Operation Hours: .............................................................

Bearing design: Roller bearing

Sleeve bearing

YES NOReplacement of oil:

YES NOBearing inspection performed:

I. Electrical Inspection

Pos. 1.1 - 1.19

II. Mechanical Inspection

Pos. 2.1 - 2.20

III. Test Run

Pos. 3.1 - 3.14

IV. Maintenance Result



Environmental Conditions:

a) Location: building marine

b) Atmosperic conditions: dry high humiditydust salt

c) Ventilation: unrestricted adequaterestricted inadequate

Operating Conditions:

a) Site duty: single parallel idle

b) Duty cycle: 24 hours daily occasionally standby

c) Load condition: inductive non linear

d) Operation: manned unmanned

Generator Conditions:

a) Dirt content: slight dust light layer dirtthick dust thick compact dirt

b) Corrosion: none, very little steel/ironcopper severe (....................)

c) Engine: Type: ....................Serial No.: ....................Fuel: ....................



I. Electrical Inspection

performed Complaintssee page 11

1.1 Examination of cable entry and cable shoesto main terminal box

1.2 Examination of strain relief of connecting power cables

1.3 Check of fixation of transformers installed

1.4 Examination of cable entry and cable shoesto auxiliary terminal box

1.5 Check of strain relief of connection cables

1.6 Insulation test of stator windings

a) Stator winding phase U against groundResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

b) Stator winding phase V against groundResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

c) Stator winding phase W against groundResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

1.7 Insulation test of stator windings

a) Stator winding phase U against phase VResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

b) Stator winding phase U against phase WResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

c) Stator winding phase W against phase VResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

1.8 Resistance measurement of stator




1.9 Check and re-tightening of all screws and nutsin main terminal box by dynamometric key

1.10 Cleaning and examination of insulators for cracks

1.11 Re-tightening of contact screws and nuts on auxiliary terminal strip

1.12 Resistance measurement of auxiliary windings

1.13 Insulation test of auxiliary windings

1.14 Examination of anti-condensation heater

............. V ............. A

1.15 Insulation resistance measurement of rotor winding

a) Insulation measurement main rotorResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

b) Insulation measurement exciter rotorResistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V

1.16 Resistance measurement of rotor

1.17 Inspection of rotating rectifiers

1.18 Inspection of stator end winding with endoscope

Inspection of stator end winding without endoscope

1.19 Inspection of rotor winding with endoscope

Inspection of rotor winding without endoscope



II. Mechanical Inspection


Sleeve Bearing Design

YES NOOil lubrication system installed:

2.1 Check of oil level in sleeve bearing

2.2 Check for leakage of sleeve bearings

2.3 Inspection of sleeve bearing with endoscope

Inspection of sleeve bearing without endoscope

2.4 Check of oil quantity of oil lubrication system

2.5 Check of oil pressure of oil lubrication system:

.................... mbar

2.6 Check of oil temperature of oil lubrication system

2.7 Check of oil pressure inside the bearing housing

.................... mbar

2.8 Check of lubrication ring

2.9 Check for any corrosion on drive side and non-drive side bearing

2.10 Oil viscosity used: according to ISO VG .................




Roller/Ball Bearing Design

2.11 Relubrication of roller/ball bearing according to operating instructions

2.12 Removal of surplus grease

2.13 Removal of old grease from bearing covers

Additional Mechanical Checks

2.14 Inspection of abrasion of earthing brush

2.15 Inspection of base frame for mechanical deviations

Mounting of alternator / Check of feet fixation

2.16 Visual inspection of the drive coupling

2.17 Check of inlet and outlet airducts for dust and dirt

2.18 Check of inlet and outlet airducts for corrosion

2.19 Cooler / leakage monitoring

2.20 Check of drainage stoppers / drainage for condensationwater



III. Test Run


3.1 Check whether earthing switch is disconnected

3.2 Check of bearing noise

3.3 SPM bearing analysis: DE: LR .......... HR ..........

NDE: LR .......... HR ..........

3.4 Check of oil amount in sleeve bearings during operation

3.5 Effectivity of lubrication ring

3.6 Tripping of temperature protector for check of alarm and shut down

3.7 Vibration test / Vibration values (mm/s)

DE: .......... Hor. .......... Ver. .......... Axi.

NDE: .......... Hor. .......... Ver. .......... Axi.

Frame: ............. Airduct inlet: ............. Airduct outlet: .............

Output: ............. kW




3.8 Check of regulator functions at no-load operation

a) Exciter current at rated voltage and rated speed:

I1-I1': ............. A

b) Exciter current at rated load:

I1-I1': ............. A

c) Supply voltage: UH1-UH2: ............. V

UH1-WH2: ............. V

WH1-WH2: ............. V

d) Under speed protection: H1 LED off ............. Hz

3.9 Check of parallel operation

Check of distribution of load

Statics adjustment .......... %

3.10 Check of overcurrent and short circuit protection trip

3.11 Check of differential protective trip

3.12 Check of exciter monitoring system

XE2TO 109/110.1

3.13 Check of generator voltage in parallel operation

grid voltage min.: ............. kVgrid voltage max.: ............. kV




3.14 Bearing and winding temperature after continuous operation

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________

__________________________________________



IV. Maintenance Result

Complaints:

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

The operation of the alternator can be continued without immediateelimination of the complaints.

Electrical and mechanical checks were performed without anycomplaints.

The alternator must be stopped immediately due to the complaints.

Date: ________________ ________________________(Signature Customer)

________________________(AvK-Service-Technician)

AvK

Deu

tsch

land

Gm

bH u

nd C

o. K

GP

age

1 of

2

Sugg

este

d M

aint

enan

ce S

ched

ule

for A

vK O

rder

No.

:C

usto

mer

:D

ate:

Pos

. AC

ompo

nent

sFr

eque

ncy

Mai

nten

ance

Car

ried

out b

y1

Gen

eral

alte

rnat

or c

heck

12 m

onth

Acc

ordi

ng to

AvK

Che

cklis

t.A

vK

Pos

. BA

dditi

onal

com

pone

nts

Freq

uenc

yM

aint

enan

ceC

arrie

d ou

t by

1R

otor

win

ding

s12

mon

th *

)Th

e in

sula

tion

resi

stan

ce m

ust b

e ch

ecke

d w

ith a

meg

ger

AvK

whe

n th

e al

tern

ator

has

reac

hed

ambi

ent t

empe

ratu

re.

2E

xcite

rap

prox

. 25,

000

h *)

Rem

ove

any

accu

mul

ated

dus

t fro

m th

e ro

tatin

g re

ctifi

erA

vKan

d th

e ex

cite

r sta

tor.

Che

ck if

the

elec

trica

l con

nect

ions

are

secu

re.

3R

ectif

ier a

ssem

bly

appr

ox. 2

5,00

0 h

*)R

emov

e di

rt ad

herin

g to

the

rect

ifier

uni

t par

ts.

AvK

4St

ator

end

win

ding

appr

ox. 2

5,00

0 h

*)In

spec

t and

rem

ove

depo

sits

of d

ust,

dirt

and

grea

se. D

o A

vKno

t use

any

abr

assi

ve m

ater

ials

or f

luid

s. U

se o

nly

elec

trocl

eane

r.

Cau

tion:

In c

ase

of h

eavy

win

ding

con

tam

inat

ion

plea

seca

ll th

e A

vK S

ervi

ce D

epar

tmen

t.5

Pro

tect

ion

equi

pmen

t12

mon

th *

)C

heck

mec

hani

cal a

nd e

lect

rical

con

nect

ions

acc

ordi

ngA

vKto

the

supp

lier´

s sp

ecifi

catio

n / m

anua

l.6

Spac

e he

ater

6 m

onth

Ens

ure

that

the

elec

trica

l hea

ter i

s op

erat

ing

to p

reve

ntC

usto

mer

cond

ensa

tion.

Che

ck th

e po

wer

sup

ply

as w

ell a

s th

e in

sula

tion

resi

stan

ce.

*) M

aint

enan

ce fr

eque

ncy

depe

nds

on th

e op

erat

ing

cond

ition

s at

site

.

Mai

nten

ance

-e.x

lsSe

rvic

e / S

telle

rD

ate:

18.

04.2

000

AvK

Deu

tsch

land

Gm

bH u

nd C

o. K

GP

age

2 of

2

Sugg

este

d M

aint

enan

ce S

ched

ule

for A

vK O

rder

No.

:C

usto

mer

:D

ate:

Pos

. BA

dditi

onal

com

pone

nts

Freq

uenc

yM

aint

enan

ceC

arrie

d ou

t by

7Ba

ll an

d ro

ller b

earin

gsG

reas

e re

lubr

icat

ion

acc.

Che

ck o

il or

gre

ase

for a

ny c

onta

min

atio

n pa

rticl

es.

AvK

/ C

usto

mer

to s

uppl

ier´

s m

anua

l an

d/or

nam

e pl

ate.

6 m

onth

SPM

bea

ring

anal

ysis

.Av

K8

Slee

ve b

earin

g: O

il rin

g6

mon

thE

nsur

e th

at th

e oi

l rin

g is

rota

ting

freel

y an

d pi

ckin

g up

Cus

tom

eren

ough

oil

whe

n th

e sh

aft i

s tu

rnin

g.9

Slee

ve b

earin

g: O

il se

als

6 m

onth

Che

ck fo

r oil

leak

s.C

usto

mer

25,0

00 h

*)

The

oil s

eals

mus

t be

chan

ged.

AvK

10S

leev

e be

arin

g: C

ompl

ete

chec

k50

,000

hTh

e be

arin

g ch

eck

mus

t be

done

(acc

ordi

ng to

sup

plie

r´s

AvK

man

ual)

and

the

oil s

eals

mus

t be

chan

ged.

11O

il pi

pes

and

flang

es6

mon

thC

heck

for o

il le

aks.

Cus

tom

erA

fter t

he fi

rst 5

00 ru

nnin

g ho

urs

it is

reco

mm

ende

d to

tight

en th

e sc

rew

s of

the

flang

es a

gain

.12

Sle

eve

bear

ing:

Oil

leve

lm

onth

lyTh

e oi

l lev

el m

ust b

e vi

sibl

e in

the

view

ing

glas

s.C

usto

mer

(App

rox.

one

third

of t

he d

iam

eter

.)13

Bea

ring

earth

ing

brus

h3

mon

thC

heck

the

earth

ing

brus

h fo

r abr

asio

n.C

usto

mer

14D

ust f

ilter

3 m

onth

*)

At t

he a

ppro

pria

te in

terv

als,

the

filte

rs m

ust b

e ch

ecke

dC

usto

mer

to e

stab

lish

thei

r deg

ree

of c

onta

min

atio

n w

ith d

ust a

nddi

rt.15

Coo

ler

6 m

onth

Che

ck th

e co

oler

ele

men

ts a

nd le

akag

e de

tect

or.

Cus

tom

er16

Com

plet

e al

tern

ator

100,

000

hR

evie

w w

ith m

anuf

actu

rer f

or re

com

men

datio

ns fo

r ful

lA

vKin

spec

tion

/ ove

rhau

l.

*) M

aint

enan

ce fr

eque

ncy

depe

nds

on th

e op

erat

ing

cond

ition

s at

site

.

Mai

nten

ance

-e.x

lsSe

rvic

e / S

telle

rD

ate:

18.

04.2

000

Customer Complaint Report

Kunden- Beanstandungsbericht

FM 7.5-14

Page 1 of 1

Dokumentenname:7_5f14a.doc AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG

Revisionsstand:A vom 09.10.03

1.0 General Complaint informationAllgemeine Daten der Beanstandung:

CustomerKunde

Place of ComplainedAlternator Einsatzort

Contact Person CustomerAnsprechpartner Kunde

Customer Fax No.:Kunden Fax Nr.

Customer Phone No.:Kunden Tel. Nr.

Customer Complain No.:Kunden Beanstandungs- Nr.

Customer emailKunden Email

Type of alternator:Generator Typ

AvK Order.- Nr.: AvK Serial No.:AvK Masch. - Nr.:

2.0 Failure description / Fehlerbeschreibung

Defect PartDefektes Bauteil

3.0 Immediate measure by customer/ Sofortmaßnahme durch den Kunden

Initiated (date) / eingeleitet am:

Successfully completed (date):erfolgreich abgeschlossen am

4.0 Enclosures / Anlagen

Photos / Fotos others:sonstiges

Distribution List: Customer => AvK Contact person, according to Customer Contact List DA 7.5-1 or AvK Hompage www.newage-avkseg.com

Cus

tom

er C

onta

ct L

ist

Ser

vice

an

d W

arra

nty

Cla

im H

and

ling

fo

r A

vK A

lter

nat

ors

D

A 7

.5-1

1 vo

n 2

Dok

umen

tenn

ame:

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct.d

oc

Sta

nd: B

vom

07.

04.0

5

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H &

Co

. KG

R

evis

ions

stan

d:

B v

om 3

0.03

.05

Tec

hn

ical

Ser

vice

on

-sit

e (a

fter

war

ran

ty):

Pro

du

cts

Co

un

trie

s C

on

tact

E

-mai

lP

ho

ne

Fax

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sU

K

Sar

ah N

icho

lls

Sar

ah.n

icho

lls@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

+44-

(0)1

780-

484

~767

~104

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sS

pain

P

ortu

gal

John

Joh

nson

Jo

hn.jo

hnso

n@ne

wag

e-av

kseg

.com

M

obile

: +34

-(0)

6291

8392

9

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sF

ranc

e fr

ench

spe

akin

g N

orth

Afr

ica

Ren

e M

oulin

R

ene.

mou

lin@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

+33-

(0)1

6074

~98

43

~984

4

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sIta

ly

Gui

sepp

e C

inni

rella

Jo

seph

.cin

nire

lla@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

+39

-(0)

2-38

000

~714

~6

64

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

s

Nor

way

S

wed

en

Den

mar

k F

inla

nd

Bal

tic S

tate

s R

ussi

a

Jan

Jako

bsen

J.

Jako

bsen

@ne

wag

e.no

+4

7-(0

)22-

9744

~37

~45

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

s

Nor

th A

mer

ica

Sou

th A

mer

ica

Mex

ico

Cen

tral

Am

eric

a C

anad

a

Gar

y O

`Mal

ley

Gar

y.b.

omal

ley@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

001-

763-

528-

7301

-6

Dire

ct: 0

01-7

63-5

74 ~

5000

TO

LL F

RE

E: (

1) 8

00 ~

367-

2764

~508

2

~863

-924

3

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

s

Aus

tral

iaN

ew Z

eala

nd

Sou

th P

acifi

c T

heo

Dra

gona

s T

heo.

drag

onas

@ne

wag

e-av

kseg

.com

+6

1-(0

)2-9

680

~229

9

Mob

ile: +

61-(

0)41

2-88

6643

~154

5

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sS

witz

erla

nd

Mar

tin L

äder

ach

laed

erac

h_in

terp

lan@

blue

win

.ch

+41

317

408

282

Mob

ile: +

41 7

920

1756

1 +4

1 31

7 40

8 28

0

Cus

tom

er C

onta

ct L

ist

Ser

vice

an

d W

arra

nty

Cla

im H

and

ling

fo

r A

vK A

lter

nat

ors

D

A 7

.5-1

2 vo

n 2

Dok

umen

tenn

ame:

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct.d

oc

Sta

nd: B

vom

07.

04.0

5

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H &

Co

. KG

R

evis

ions

stan

d:

B v

om 3

0.03

.05

Pro

du

cts

Co

un

trie

s C

on

tact

E

-mai

lP

ho

ne

Fax

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

s

Sin

gapo

re

Mal

aysi

a P

hilip

pine

s In

done

sia

Tha

iland

T

aiw

an

Vie

tnam

Ric

hard

Lee

,

Ant

hony

Tan

Tris

no S

umar

lin

(Ind

ones

ia)

Ric

hard

.lee@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

Ant

hony

.tan@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

Tris

no13

@cb

n.ne

t.id

+65-

(0)6

794-

3737

/5

Mob

ile: +

65-(

0)97

9-19

2-57

+62-

2146

0168

5

+65-

(0)6

898-

9065

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sC

hina

Ja

son

Xu

Jaso

n.xu

@ne

wag

e-av

kseg

.com

+8

6-(0

)510

-521

~62

12

Mob

ile: +

86-(

0)13

9-51

57-0

763

~767

3

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sJa

pan,

Kor

ea

Dar

ryl H

anna

D

arry

l.han

na@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

+81-

(0)3

54-4

15 ~

588

Mob

ile: +

81-(

0)90

6-38

6-57

4 ~5

90

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sIn

dia,

Nep

al

R.K

. Kap

ur

Avk

pow

er@

del3

.vsn

l.net

.in

+91-

(0)9

8111

9634

3

Co

nta

ct f

or

War

ran

ty C

laim

s:

Pro

du

ctC

ou

ntr

ies

Co

nta

ct

E-m

ail

Ph

on

eF

ax

All

AvK

P

rod

uct

sW

orld

wid

e N

orbe

rt S

telle

r n.

stel

ler@

new

age-

avks

eg.c

om

+49-

(0)8

41-7

92 ~

163

Mob

ile: +

49-(

0)17

1-22

1-94

53

~195

Is

sued

A

ppro

ved

am:

30.0

3.03

30

.03.

03

von:

N

orbe

rt S

telle

r S

ervi

ce M

anag

er

Em

ilia

San

dau

Ass

ista

nt S

ervi

ce M

anag

er

Unt

ersc

hrift

:N

orbe

rt S

telle

r E

mili

a S

anda

u

Drawings

Circuit Diagrams

Seite 1 Page 1

Legende zum Schaltbild Nr. K 850.3.123 mit 2xDECS200 Regler

Legend to Circuit Diagram No. K 850.3.123 with 2xDECS200 AVR

F1 Schutzschalter für G3 Protection switch for G3 NUR IM STILLSTAND BETÄTIGEN ONLY SWITCH ON AT STANDSTILL G1 Hauptmaschine Main machine G2 Erregermaschine Exciter machine G3 Hilfserregerwicklungen Auxiliary exciter windings Q1 Spannungswandlerschutzschalter Voltage transformer protection switch NUR IM STILLSTAND BETÄTIGEN SWITCH ON ONLY AT STANDSTILL

13-14,21-22 Meldung 13-14,21-22 Signal

R11 Rotierender Varistor Rotating varistors

V1 Rotierende Gleichrichter Rotating rectifiers

T25,T26 Spannungswandler in V-Schaltung zur 3-phasigen Istwerterfassung, 11kV/110V 10VA Klasse 0,5

Voltage transformers in V-connection for sensing voltage measurement, 11kV/110V 10VA cl.0,5

T32 Spannungswandler für G3 mit integriertem Schutzschalter F1 F1 - nur im Stillstand betätigen!

Voltage transformer for G3 with integrated protection switch F1 F1 - only switch at standstill!

DECS 200 2 Spannungsregler DECS200 auf Montageplatte MP251

2 Alternator voltage regulator DECS200 on mounting plate MP251

Versorgungsspannung 24 VDC supply voltage 24 VDC T6 Stromwandler für Strommessung Phase V ( B ) Current transformer for line B sensing input

Übersetzung 150 / 1A <=3VA, 1/3 Nennstrom durchgeführt

Ratio 150/ 1A <=3VA, 1/3 of rated current led through

Messspannungsanschluß 3-phasig Bedienungsanleitung unbedingt beachten!

Sensing voltage connection 3-phase , pay attention to DECS manual!

3-phasiger Anschluß: Verbindungen: U-E1, V-E2, W-E3

3phase sensing: connect: A-E1,B-E2, C-E3

Bedienungsanleitung DECS200 unbedingt beachten!

Pay attention to DECS 200 manual!

Schnellentregung:

Brücken UH1-24 öffnen Quick de-excitation: Open bridges UH1-24

Schnellentregung: Brücken UH1-24 öffnen

Quick de-excitation: Open bridges UH1-24

X1 Hauptklemmen Main terminals X2 Klemmleiste für Regleranschluß Terminal strip for AVR connection X3 Klemmleiste für Regleristwertspannung Terminal strip for AVR sensing voltage measurement

X4.1 Klemmleiste für Stillstandsheizung Terminal strip for heaters X4.2 Klemmleiste für PT100 Terminal strip for RTD`s (PT100) X5.1 Klemmleiste für Stromwandler Terminal strip for CT`s X5.2 Klemmleiste für Rotorerdschlußüberwachung Terminal strip for rotor earth fault monitoring X7.1,7.2,7.3,7.4

Klemmleiste für Lagerölversorgungsanlagen Terminal strips for bearing oil supply systems

X8 Klemmleiste für Lüftermotoren Terminal strips forfan motors - - - - Verbindungen außerhalb des Generators Connections outside the alternator

AvKErstellt am: 5.8.06 geprüft von: Diegeler Revision Nr.: 0

Issued on: 5.8.06 Checked by: Diegeler Revision No.: 0

Seite 2 Page 2

Legende zum Schaltbild Nr. K 850.3.123 mit 2xDECS200 Regler

Legend to Circuit Diagram No. K 850.3.123 with 2xDECS200 AVR

ZUBEHÖR ACCESSORIES Widerstandsthermometer PT100 Resistance Thermometer PT100 A1-12 Statorwicklung Stator winding

Phase U: 1, 4 , 7, 10 Phase V: 2, 5 , 8, 11 Phase W: 3, 6 , 9, 12

Phase U: 1, 4 , 7, 10 Phase V: 2, 5 , 8, 11 Phase W: 3, 6 , 9, 12

A13,14 Lager, B-Seite Bearing, NDE A15,16 Lager, A-Seite Bearing, DE

A20,21 Generator Zuluft Alternator air inlet A22 Generator Abluft Alternator air outlet

H1 Stillstandsheizung 230V 1500W Anti condensation heater 230V 1500W H2 Stillstandsheizung 230V 1500W Anti condensation heater 230V 1500W Stromwandler Current TransformerT14-16 Für Schutz (P) for Protection (P)

Kern Nr. 1: X5, 1-6 (P) Core No. 1: X5, 1-6 (P) Kern Nr. 2: X5, 7-12 (P) Core No. 2: X5, 7-12 (P) 400 / 1 / 1 A; 20 / 20 VA; 5P10 / 5P10 400 / 1 / 1 A; 20 / 20 VA; 5P10 / 5P10

M3-11kV Zorc Spannungsableiter 3-phasig Zorc voltage arrester 3 phase

AvKErstellt am: 5.8.06 geprüft von: Diegeler Revision Nr.: 0

Issued on: 5.8.06 Checked by: Diegeler Revision No.: 0

Operating Instructions DIG

Operating instructionsThree-phase synchronous electrical machines,Series DIG 110…191 with „COSIMAT N“ voltage regulator

Before installing and starting up this machine, please read these instructions carefully.

Machine Type:___________________ Dimension sheet No.____________________

Machine No._____________________ Circuit diagram No._____________________

Operating Instructions DIG 110...191 page 2Rev. November 2001

CONTENTS

1. Operating and maintenance instruction ………… 31.1. Checking for damage incurred during transit ………… 3 1.2. Transport ………… 3 1.3. Storage ………… 3

1.3.1. Preservation ………… 3 Complete machine ………… 3 Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas ………… 3 Bearings ………… 3 Sleeve bearings ………… 3 Ball and roller bearings ………… 3 Cooler ………… 3 1.4. Setting up the machine ………… 3 1.5. Cooling the machine ………… 4

1.5.1. Coolant temperature ………… 4 Direction of cooling air ………… 4 Quality of cooling air ………… 4 1.6. Dust filter ………… 4

1.6.1. Synthetic filter elements ………… 4 1.6.2. Woven metal filter elements ………… 4

1.7. Preparations prior to starting up ………… 4 1.7.1. Removing preservation ………… 5

Complete machine ………… 5 Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas ………… 5 Bearing ………… 5 Sleeve bearing ………… 5 Ball and roller bearings ………… 5 Cooler ………… 5

1.8. Machine drive ………… 5 1.8.1. Belt drive ………… 5 1.8.2. Coupling drive ………… 5

1.9. Aligning the machine ………… 6 1.10. Changing direction of rotation ………… 7 1.11. Electrical connections ………… 7 1.12. Starting up ………… 7

1.12.1. Insulation resistance ………… 7 1.12.2. Operating speed ………… 8 1.12.3. No-load operation ………… 8 1.12.4. Parallel operation ………… 8 1.12.5. Loss of remanence ………… 9

1.13. Power factor regulation ………… 9 1.14. Interference suppression ………… 9 1.15. Operation ………… 9 1.16. Maintenance ………… 9 1.17. Bearings ………… 9

1.17.1. Ball and roller bearings ………… 9 Re-lubricating the bearings …………10 Re-lubrication intervals …………10 Re-lubrication quantity …………10 Lubrication chart …………10 Ball and roller bearing grease …………10 Dismantling the bearings …………11 Assembling the bearings …………11 Monitoring the bearings …………11 1.18. Drying out the machine …………11


1.Operating and maintenance instructions

1.1.Checking for damage incurred during transit

Immediately after receiving the machine, inspect it fordamage incurred during transit. The transport ordelivering company must be notified of possiblecomplaints immediately, or at the latest within seven daysof delivery (covered by warranty).

1.2. Transport

During transit, support the machine only on its feet. Donot allow the weight to be taken by any othercomponents.

Lift the machine at the crane rings attached to the statorhousing. Note that crane rings on attached componentssuch as the cooler assembly must not be used to lift thecomplete machine. They are intended only to simplifyattachment of these components.

In the case of complete machine sets on a base frame,use only the lifting facilities provided on the base frame.The crane rings on the electrical machine itself are notrated for lifting the complete machine set.

If transported over long distances, it is advisable toprotect the machine against environmental influences bysealing it in a plastic cover together with a quantity ofdesiccant (moisture indicator), so that it remains dust-freeand air-tight.

Machines with plain or taper roller bearings, andmachines in a single bearing design are supplied withshipping brace. This shipping brace should never beremoved until the machine has been set up in its futureoperating position on site. Install the shipping braceagain if the machine is, for instance, to be shipped on orstored as a separate unit after trials.

For transport as a complete machine set, take thenecessary safety precautions, for instance support themachine set on anti-vibration elements or attach transitkeepers.

1.3. Storage

If the machine is to be stored after trial running, note thefollowing points:

1.3.1. Preservation

• Complete machine

Store the machine in a dry, dust-free condition, forexample heat-sealed in plastic foil into which a quantityof desiccant has been placed, or ventilated with dry air.Make sure that no moisture can condense on or in themachine and its attached assemblies. The machine mustnot be exposed to vibration while in storage.

• Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas

Clean rust and dirt off the bright metal surfaces andapply a protective lacquer coating. Make sure that thecoating is not porous.

• Bearings

Sleeve bearingsDrain the oil and apply a corrosion inhibitor to thebearing, for instance Tectyl 511 M in the case of sleevebearings lubricated with mineral oil. If the bearings arelubricated with a synthetic oil, make sure that the bearingmaterials, the oilcontent and the preserving agent are allcompatible.

Ball and roller bearingsTo prevent brinelling marks caused by vibration when ata standstill, bearings should either be pre-loaded with atransit keeper or the rotor should be turned once amonth to alter the position of the balls or rollers. Thebearing´s grease content should be increased to themaximum.

• Cooler

Drain out the cooling water, clean the pipes, flushthrough with clean water and dry the complete cooler,using warm or pre-dried air.

Check the efficacy of the protective treatment measuresonce a year. If ambient conditions are particularlyunfavorable, check at more frequent intervals. Ifnecessary, repeat the protective treatment.

1.4. Setting up the machine

The installation site must comply with the machine´senclosure rating and be sufficiently large for cooling andmaintenance purposes. When setting up the machine,make sure that:

• The relevant operation and maintenance safetyregulations are observed

• Cooling air can enter and exit freely


• Exhaust gas and heated cooling air cannot be drawnin by the machine

1.5. Cooling the machine

1.5.1. Coolant temperature

Unless otherwise specified, the machine is built to run ata coolant temperature of up to 40°C and at aninstallation height of up to 1000 meters above mean sealevel. Please refer to the machine´s data plate forcoolant temperature and power rating.

Coolant temperatures higher than stated on themachine´s data plate will result in power loss.

Coolant temperature Max. available power45°C 96%50°C 92,5%

If the machine is ordered to run at coolant temperatureshigher than 40°C, this is shown on its rating platetogether with the alteration in power rating.

1.5.2. Direction of cooling air

The machine is cooled by an integral fan dependent onthe direction of rotation, mounted on the shaft. It drawscooling air through the machine and expels it at the fanside.

To ensure proper cooling, make sure that the direction offan rotation is as indicated by the arrow on the machine.

If it is intended to use forced cooling, either alone or tosupport the integral fan, the direction of airflow androtation must be correct here too.

Important:The distance between the air inlet or outlet on themachine and any nearby wall must not be less than thedimension stated below, otherwise ventilation will beobstructed.Minimum distance (guide value):1 x diameter of machine

1.5.3. Quality of cooling air

To extend the service life of the machine, and inparticular its windings and bearings, it is extremelyimportant that neither contaminated not aggressivecooling air be allowed to enter it. An air fliter can beinstalled if requested by the customer, or can be trofittedprovided sufficient space is available.

1.6. Dust filter

If the machine is equipped with dust filters, please notethe following points.

• The cooling air must not exceed the temperaturestated on the machine´s data plate.

• At the appropriate intervals, the filters should bechecked to establish their degree of contaminationwith dust and dirt.

To ensure that the machine´s windings cannot overheatas a result of blocked filters, three temperature sensorsare provided in the stator winding. These sensors mustbe connected to the warning system.

1.6.1. Synthetic filter elements

These are dry-type filters and must be cleaned at regularintervals, which depend on the amount of dust and dirttrapped by the fliter. FIlter elements can be cleaned withcompressed air, water at a temperature not exceeding50°C or a liquid detergent, but it is often a moreeconomical proposition to renew them.

Comply with all relevant environmental protection andsafety regulations.

1.6.2. Woven metal filter elements

These are supplied dry, that is to say not wetted with oil.They can either be operated dry or sprayed with specialfilter oil. If the filter elements are sprayed with oil, complywith the relevant environmental protection laws whencleaning them. They can be cleaned with a high-pressure

cleaning unit. Additives to dislodge grease can be used,provided that they have been checked for compatibilitywith the filter material. After cleaning, dry the fliterelements and if necessary spray the with fresh oil.

Comply with all relevant environmental protection andsafety regulations.

Regular cleaning of the filter elements is still needed evenif the electrical machine´s windings are protected againstoverheating by built-in temperature sensors. Carefulattention to this point will ensure that the machine alwaysruns cool and reliably.

1.7. Preparations for starting up

Pull the protective lasquer coating off the end of the shaftand the flange, or remove it with solvent. Never clean itoff with emery cloth. Comply with the relevantregulations on environmental protection and safety.


There is a threaded hole on the shaft, to which a pullercan be attached for installing and removing discs orcouplings. Hammering is not permitted, as this candamage the bearings. If the machine is delivered withshipping brace in position, remove it.

If the machine ist of singlebearing design, its rotor isdelivered attached to the shaft flange and the housing bya steel hoop to prevent axial displacement and is locatedin position radially between the shaft and fan housing byan angle bracket. Both these transit keepers (axial andradial) must be removed.

Make quite sure that the radial transit keepers areremoved from the gap only after the rotor has beencentered on the drive shaft flange. Failure to do so canresult in damage to the exciter machine and the NDS(Non-drive-side) bearing.

In the case of machines with a steel disc coupling, theradial transit keepers are screws in the flange bell. Theymust be removed after the machine has been alignedand its position fixed in relation to the drive input.

If the machine was given protective treatment following atrial run, the following measures must be taken:

1.7.1. Removing preservation

• Complete machine

Check the machine´s insulation resistance. If it is belowthe minimum value (see Chapter 1.12.1, Insulationresistance), the machine must be dried out. Theprocedure is described in Chapter 1.18., Drying out themachine.

• Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas

Remove the protective lacquer coating with a suitablesolvent. Do not rub it off with emery cloth. Comply withthe relevant environmental protection and safetyregulations.

• Bearings

Sleeve bearingsDismantle and clean the sleeve bearings. The corrosioninhibiting agent must be removed. (this is not necessary ifTectyl 511 M was used and the storage period was fairlyshort, provided that the bearing is then lubricated withmineral oil).Fill the sleeve bearings with oil as stated on thelubrication plate and in the operating instructions.

Ball and roller bearingsOpen the bearing housing and remove the additionalquantity of grease which was previously added to the

bearings so that only the specified amount remains in thebearing (see chapter on renewing bearings andlubrication plate).

• Cooler

Add water to the cooling circuit and operate it inaccordance with the cooler manufacturer´s operatingand maintenance instructions.

1.8. Machine drive

1.8.1. Belt drive

If the machine is driven by a belt, the machine must beordered specifically with bearings and bearinglubrication to match the higher loadings. Most belt-driven machines have roller bearings on the input side.

The rotor must be ordered with balancing by solid key ,and the grooved belt pulley must be dynamicallybalanced on a smooth mandrel. The belt must runsmoothly, without jerking.Desired balancing accuracy: = Q 2,5 according toGerman VDI 2060 standard.

When flat-type belts or V-belts which have already beenin operation for a fairly long time are removed formaintenance purposes, they must be replaced by newones (in case of hardening).

Important:

Belts that are tensioned too tightly can put the bearingsat risk. For this reason, establish the correct belt tensionwith the belt manufacturer or the plant that supplied themachine, and have checks carried out on site.

1.8.2. Coupling drive

Unless expressly ordered otherwise, the rotor is balancedwith a solid key. The grooved drive elements musttherefore be balanced on a smooth mandrel.

The coupling must be dynamically balanced to anaccuracy of= Q 2,5 according to VDI 2060.

When installing the coupling on to the shaft end, makesure that no hammer-blows or shocks are transmitted tothe machine´s bearings. Always use a suitable puller.

When pulling the coupling on, comply with itsmanufacturer´s assembly instructions. Unless otherwisestated by the supplier, the coupling half can be heatedup to 80°C. It can then be pushed on to the shaft endeasily. Ensure that the drive element is securely located


after tightening, and securely clamped against themechanical stop on the shaft.

1.9. Aligning the machine

Precise, careful alignment of the machine ensures that itruns with the minimum vibration, thus extending theservice life of the machine and in particular of thebearings. This applies to machnies with either flexible orrigid couplings.

Even slight errors of alignment can rapidly result indamaged bearings.It is vital that all the feet are fully in contact. Unevenundersurfaces cause stresses in the bearings and must becompensated for by attaching sheet metal strips. Oncethe machine is aligned correctly, secure it with dowelpins. When aligning a machine of single bearing design,it is important to comply with the reference dimensionsspecified on the dimension sheet and the drawingshowing tolerances and clearances included with themachine. For further instructions, see the chapter onplain bearings.On machines with a steel disc coupling, radial rotoralignment is by means of centering screws inserted intothe centering bell. These screws also act as transitkeepers in a radial direction. They replace thepressboard inserts otherwise placed in the air gap.Alignment is checked by measuring the distance betweenthe outer rim of the steel disc coupling and the machinedinner diameter of the centering bell.In the case of single-bearing machines with a divide DS(drive side) end shield, accuracy of alignment is checkedby measuring the air gap.

If the machine has an undivided bearing plate, amachined end disc is installed at the drive side. Themeasurement is then made between the shaft and themachined inner diameter of te end plate.Take three measurements in each case, at 120-degreeintervals round the shaft. The results must not vary bymore than 0,2 mm.This will ensure a uniform air gap beneath all poles andthe correct axial position of the rotor. Check alignmentaccuracy at the end of the shaft or at the coupling.

While checking, turn the coupling slowly through 360°C,at the same time taking the readings at the individualdial gauges. Attach one dial gauge radially and twoaxially, to compensate for rotor displacement. Refer tothe coupling manufacturer´s data as a guide topermissible deviations from true alignment.

Possible test method:Slowly turn the coupling through360°C and determine maximumdeflection of the dial gauge.

M = dial gauge


Guide values

Shaft center displacement Shaft tilt Coupling gap** Note coupling manufacturer´s data and allow for thermal expansion at the electrical machine and the drive.

If the coupling manufacturer specifies closer tolerances,always comply with them or obtain even lower values ifpossible.

During alignment, remember that the length mayincrease as a result of thermal expansion in the machine.This change in length is approximately 0,1 ,, per meterof machine length and per 10 degrees Centigrade oftemperature rise.

In all cases, try to approach the ideal clearance valuesas closely as poosible.

Important points to be checked before starting up:

a) have pressboard transit keeper inserts been removedfrom the air gap?

b) Have the aligning screws been removed from thecentering bell?

1.10. Changing direction of rotation

Before reversing the machine´s direction of rotation, it isimportant that the manufacturer be consulted.

In most cases the fan is of a directional pattern and willhave to be renewed.

Note that the rotary field also changes with a reversal inthe direction of rotation.

If the machine is to be used in parallel operation, thesensing lead plug connections on the regulator (U andW) must be changed over so that connections U V W onthe regulator again receive a right-handed field. Therotary field will change at the main terminas.

1.11. Electrical connections

The machine must be connected up according to theaccompanying circuit diagram. The marked earthing(grounding) screw must be connected to the earthconductor. Installation is permitted by a qualifiedelectrician only. Comply with the following points:

• VDE safety regulations or those of the local safetyauthorities

• Local electricity supplier´s guidelines regardingprotective measures

• Phase sequence or direction of rotation of machinefield as stated on rating plate

• Correct direction of rotation as stated on themachine´s data plate

When connecting the cables, make sure that nomechanical forces can act on the machine´s connectingterminals. This also applies during assembly work.

Unused cable glands in the terminal box and machinemust be protected against dust and moisture, and closedso that they cannot turn. Take up slack at all screwcontacts and nuts.

If current surges or vibration are to be expected, securethe cables with cable clips or racks. If the plant is set upon flexible mountings, ensure adequate clack in thecables.

1.12. Starting up

1.12.1. Insulation resistance

After a long period out of use or in storage, themachine´s insulation resistance must be measured.

Before starting uf any machine, measure the insulationresistance of the winding between phases (if the starpoint is separate) and between phase and earth. All partsnot subjected to the measuring voltage must be earthed.


When measuring the insulation resistance, allconnections (main connection, measuring connection,connection to regulator and protection or suppressioncircuit) must be disconnected from the winding.

The suppression elements and measuring leads must bedisconnected during high-voltage insulation tests andtests with insulation measuring appliances.

Measure at 500 V DC on low-voltage machines (< 1 kV)or at above 2 kV on high-voltage machines (= 1 kV).

Due to the capacitive charge in the winding, themeasuring unit indicates the correct insulation resistancevalue only after several seconds have elapsed. Earth thewinding immediately after the measuring voltage hasbeen switched off.

If the insulation values are too low, first check theterminal insulation for dirt and moisture. Clean or drythem as the case may be, and repeat the measurement.

Damp windings can lead to current leakage, flash-overor breakdown.

If insulation resistance on new, cleaned or repairedwindings is less than that stated below, drying out isneeded (see Item 1.18, Drying out the machine).

On low-voltage machines with a nominal voltage below1 kV, and in the rotor winding, insulation resistanceshould not be less than 5 MO at a winding temperatureof 25°C.

In the case of medium- and high-voltage machines witha nominal voltage equal to or greater than 1 kV, theinsulation resistance in MO must be calculated using thefollowing formula:

R = 3 + 2 x UN

Where UN is the nominal voltage of the machineexpressed in kV.

When testing insulation and measuring the windings,these must be connected to the posts or bars as the casemay be, so that these parts are tested as well.

Secondary connections such as measuring connectionsto transformers and all connections to regulating,protection or interference suppression circuits, must betested separately. Each of these connections must bechecked individually at the terminal strip. This alsoregister the insulation resistance of the terminal strip.

Use a maximum test voltage of 500 V DC for allsecondary and measuring connections. Insulationresistance should not fall below 5 MO.

1.12.2. Operating speed

The machine´s speed must correspond to the valuestated on its rating plate. The machine must runsmoothly, both at no-load and when under load.

If the drive machine runs at reduced speed, the voltageregulator´s underspeed protection cuts in and de-excitesthe machine. Irregular running will lead to deviationsfrom the nominal ratings.

The machine is voltage-regulated and maintains avoltage accurate to ± 1% in any condition between noload and full load, even if its speed fluctuates by ± 5%.

In the case of special versions, the order valuesconfirmed by the manufacturer should be adopted.

1.12.3. No-load operation

The no-load voltage can be adjusted within a range ofUN ± 8% by connecting the voltage setting rheostat toterminals s and t.

The voltage regulator ensures that the voltage remainsconstant as the machine warms up to its normaloperating temperature.

1.12.4. Parallel operation

Machines operated in parallel are equipped with adamper cage. They can be operated with identical ordissimilar machines or if necessary in parallel with themains.

The three familiar preconditions for parallel operationmust be complied with:

• Identical voltages• Identical frequencies• Identical phase angles

Matching can be carried out manually or by anautomatic synchronizing device. For further details, seethe supplier´s technical description.

In parallel operation, a distinction must be madebetween active and reactive load distribution.

Active load distribution depends only on the speedcharacteristic of the drive and cannot be influenced bythe electrical machine itself.


Reactive load distribution is determined by the electricalmachine´s voltage characteristic, according to load.

1.12.5. Loss of remanence

If the auxiliary exciter machine (G3) has lost itsremanence, that is to say there is no voltage at terminalsUH1-UH2 and WH1-WH2, terminal I2 (+) and K2 (-)must be excited briefly with a DC voltage (1,5 – 12 Volt)while the machine is running.

1.13. Power factor regulation

For operation in parallel with the mains the machine canbe equipped with an additional automatic power-factorregulator (for preset co phi range, see test report). Forfurther details, refer to the description and adjustmentinstructions for the additional „Cos“ power-factorregulating module in conjunction with the „COSIMAT N“voltage regulator.

1.14. Interference suppression

The machine comply with radio inteference requirement„N“ as stated in German VDE 0875. Note that thestandard of interference suppression is related to thequality of earthing.

Disconnect suppressor capacitors, measuringtransfomers and regulators during high-voltageinsulation tests or if insulation measuring equipment is inuse (if the test voltage reaches 80% of the factory´s testvoltage).

1.15. Operation

During operation, current-conducting and rotating partsmust be sealed with the covers provided for this purpose.

Increased vibration may result from insufficiently assuratealignment, poorly fitted foundations or frame, or weakmountings. In addition, vibration can be introduced fromthe drive and non-drive sides.

1.16. Maintenance

Before starting work on the machine make sure that it isswitched off and take action to prevent it from beingswitched on again.

Ensure that machine components which are live duringoperation are at zero voltage (by earthing ordisconnecting the wiring).

All work must be performed by qualified staff possessingthe necessary knowledge and experience.

If there is moisture or dust in the terminal box, it must beremoved from the surface of the insulating parts. Thereason for the accumulation of moisture or dust mustthen be established and rectified.

If severe dust occurs, the electrical machine should beblown through at regular intervals with dry compressedair, as it is running down to a standstill.

Clean the machine´s surface regularly as well, to preventdust and dirt from bulding up and adversely affecting thedissipation of heat.

Make sure that the air inlets and outlets are notobstructed during operation.

Apart from the bearings the dust filters (if installed) andthe attached cooler, the machine requires no routinemaintenance.

If carbon brushes are installed on the machine inequipment designed to perform various monitoringfunctions, they must be checked for wear at regularintervals.

If the machine has add-on equipment, for example acooler, the additional maintenace instructions issued bythe manufacturers of this equipment must be compliedwith.

Like any other machine, the electrical machine requiresto be treated with care.

1.17. Bearings

1.17.1. Ball and roller bearings

The machine is fitted with anti-friction bearings. The DShas a floating bearing, the NDS a fixed bearing.

If the bearings on either side are of the deep groove ballbearing type, they are pre-loaded in relation to eachother by spring elements, this ensures smoother runningand reduces the negative effects of external sources ofvibration on the bearings. Deep-groove ball bearings areinstalled at both bearing points only to special order.

The standard bearing specification is as follows: on thedrive side, a roller bearing, on the non-drive side, a ballbearing or a duplex bearing consisting of one rollerbearing an one ball bearing.

Each of the machine´s bearings is normally providedwith a relubricating device. If a duplex NDS bearing isinstalled, note that there are two grease nipples forrelubricating. Refer to the appropriate column in the


lubrication chart for the correct volume of grease pernipple.

Regreasing should be carried out with a grease gun atthe nippples provided on the machine.

A regulator is installed to control grease volume, so thatold grease is expelled from the bearing.

Before regreasing, clean the nipple so that dirt cannotenter the bearings.

Where possible, apply grease when the machine isrunning at reduced speed, unless this represents ahazard for the operating personnel.

• Relubricating the bearings

Ball and roller bearings are supplied ex- factory pakkedwith high-quality anti-friction bearing grease and aretherefore ready for immediate operation. Machines withrelubricating devices bear a plate on which the followinginformation is stated:

Relubricating interval in hours of operationQuantity of greaseType of anti-friction bearing grease

• Regreasing interval

Bearing must be relubricated regularly in accordancewith the specified relubricating intervals (see chart).

Machines which have not been run for very many hoursmust be relubricated at least once a year. If the statedrelubricating interval is below 1,200 hours, relubricatetwice a year.

Under adverse operating conditions, e.g. a humidatmosphere, relatively high dirt accumulations, severevibrational loadings ets., the relubricating interval mustbe reduced accordingly. If the permitted coolanttemperature is exceeded by app. 15°C, the relubricatinginterval must be halved.

• Relubricating quantity

The machine´s bearings must each be relubricated withthe amount of grease stated. Remove expelled greasefrom the bearing points.When relubricating the bearings, run the machine ifpossible at half speed for one hour to distribute thegrease effectively. During this period, check thetemperatures of the bearings and compare them with thetemperatures recorded before relubricating.

Lubrication chart

Type Lubricationpoints*Quantity ing

Relubrication intervals in hoursfor machine running speed of:

DIG

Sing

lebe

arin

g

Dou

ble

bear

ing

500-

600

min

-1

750-

900

min

-1

1000

-120

0m

in-1

1500

-180

0m

in-1

120/…121

60 40 2500 2000 1500 1000

130/…131

80 60 2500 1500 1200 800

140/…141

100 60 2000 1500 800 600

150/…151

100 60 2000 1000 800 600

156 100 60 1800 900 700 500* In the case of double bearing, the amount of greasestated in the „double bearing“ column is to be injectedinto each of the grease nipples.

• Ball and roller bearing greases

On delivery, the bearings are lubricated with high-grade,lithium-saponified grease of Grade 3 consistency )NLGIclassification). The factory uses Shell Alvania R3 for thispurpose.

The grease channels and the channel between the nippleand bearings are filled with anti-friction bearing greasebefore leaving the factory. The following alternative typesof lithium-saponified anti-friction bearing grease may beused:

Shell Alvania R3Arcanol L71Alpha lub LGMT 3

Or a lithium-saponified brand-name grease ofequivalent specification, heat-resistant up to at least130°C and complying with German Industrial StandardDIN 51825.

Recommendation:

Always relubricate the bearings with the same selectedbrand of grease.


• Dismantling the bearings

During shaft production, the bearing seat and thebearing stop shoulder on the shaft are subject toparticularly stringent quality control. This is essential tomaintain the accuracy of shape needed to keep thebearings fully operational. When dismantling thebearings, it is therefore important to handle the bearingsand bearing rings with particular care, otherwise thebearing seats on the shaft and bearing plate couldbecome damaged.

To simplify dismantling, the parts can be heateduniformly all round to a temperature of app. 80°C. Donot install bearings previously removed, but renew them.

• Assembling the bearings

Bearings must only be renewed by a qualified personpossessing the necessary knowledge and experiece,working in a dust-free environment, on a clean surfaceand using suitable tools including metric wrenches.The grease and bearings must be kept free of impurities,otherwise they will wear out faster and possibly even fail.The correct arrangement of the bearing componentsmust be retained, this applies particularly in the event ofrepair work.

When renewing bearings, install original type-approvedbearings only, and maintain the corect amount ofbearing play. The grease regulating disk should berigidly attached to the shaft. Do not remove newbearings from their packs until just before they areinstalled. Do not wash the bearings out, as theanticorrosion agent applied to them is compatible withmost customary anti-friction beraing greases.Clean the parts of the bearing that are to be re-installed.Before fitting the bearing, check for dimensionalaccuracy and lack of distortion at the bearing seats onthe shaft and in the housing.

When single-piece bearings (e.g. deep-groove ballbearings) are installed, the force exerted to fit them mustalways be applied to the firmly located race, which hasto be mounted first. Forces applied to the free-movingrace have to be transmitted through the balls or rollers,which can damage them and their tracks.

Installation of separable bearings (e.g. roller bearings) ismore straightforward. The two races can be installedseparately. A screwing movement when assembling themhelps to avoid rub marks.

When fitting the bearing on the shaft, heat it to about80°C in an oilbath, oven or by a suitable inductiveheating method. Make absolutely sure that it is locatedcentrally and in positive contact with the shaft shoulder.

Once they have cooled down, pack the bearings fullywith grease. The inner and outer bearing covers musteach be filled with grese to approx. 50% of their fullcapacity.

• Monitoring the bearings

The first indication of damaged bearings is usually anoticeable change in temperature or running behavior,or noise and vibration if bearing damage has reachedand advanced stage.

Recommendation:

Monitor the bearings by measuring transmitted noise andvibration at regular intervals, and compare the readingswith those taken on previous occasions.

1.18. Drying out the machine

To protect the machine against moisture, the built-inheating should always be switched on when the machinedoes not emit any heat of its own. Even a slight increasein the temperature of the air inside the machine willprevent moisture condensation on the insulatingcomponents.If the machine´s insulation value drops below that statedin the chapter „Insulation resistance“, the machine mustbe dried out.

In many cases it can be dried suitably using its ownventilation system, but it should not be electrically livewhile this is being carried out. De-excite the machine asindicated in its circuit diagram. Operate the built-inheating when drying out with the machine´s ownventilation system.

If no improvement in the insulation resistance isregistered after a running period of approx. 2 hours,the machine must be dried out additionally with driedair supplied from the outside.If this in turn does not increase the insulation resistanceafter approx. 4 hours, the machine must be dried out bypassing an electric current through the stator and rotorwindings.

However, this taks requires special knowledge and musttherefore only be performed by personnel that hasreceived specific training. Please contact our serviceorganization in this case.

For additional information on bearing renewal or specialoperating conditions such as run-up synchronization,rapid excitation or de-excitation, please do not hesitateto contact our engineers.

Enclosure to Operating InstructionsAdvise for Commissioning

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 2

Generator with vibration absorbers on foundation

By connection of the cables it must be ensured that no forces have an effect on the machine connection terminals. The same counts for the time duringassembly.

If shock load or vibrations are to be expected, the cables should be fixed over the cable clips and the cable platform.

By elastic mounted gen-sets (see picture above)sufficient 'free cable length' should be ensured to compensate the movements of the diesel/gas motor. In order to ensure that the movements do not have a negative influence on the connection terminals, the cable must be fixed with max. 300 mm distance from the terminal box screw fitting. This cable fixinghas to be connected rigidly to the gen-set in order to avoid relative movements between the cablefixing and the terminal box.

The relative movements between the gen-set and the foundation have to be compensated for by a sufficiently long free cable length between the cable fixing on the gen-set and the foundation.

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 3

Generator with vibration absorbers on frame base

By connection of the cables it must be ensured that no forces have an effect on the machine connection terminals. The same counts for the time during assembly.

If shock load or vibrations are to be expected, the cables should be fixed over the cable clips and the cable platform.

By elastic mounted gen-sets (see picture above)sufficient 'free cable length' should be ensured to compensate the movements of the diesel/gas motor.

In order to ensure that the movements do not have a negative influence on the connection terminals, the cable must be fixed with max. 300 mm distance from the terminal box screw fitting. This cable fixinghas to be connected rigidly to the gen-set in order to avoid relative movements between the cablefixing and the terminal box.

The relative movements between the gen-set and the foundation have to be compensated for by a sufficiently long free cable length between the cable fixing on the gen-set and the foundation.

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 4

Connections

Cable connection acc. to DIN 46200

Elastic parts, such as spring washers, can be used in the electrical connection, however, only on one side of the clamped conductor. If necessary,additional washers are to be used. The other side is for current conduction, why only washers or security locking plates of copper-zinc-alloys must be used.

By electrical connection with eyelet rings, the eyelets have to be protected by washers on both sides against bending.

De-excitation

Open the bridges UH1-24 and WH1-14 on the terminal strip X2. De-excitation with extern switch takes place on these terminals, too.

Using the Protection switches Q1, F1, F2

The purpose of these switches is to protect thevoltage transformers T24 (Q1) and the auxiliaryexciter winding (F1, F2). In case of failure, these switches will lead to a quick de-excitation of the machine.

These switches are not to be used for de-excitingthe machine during operation or maintenance!

Open star point

The voltage transformer T24 has to be disconnected and the cables sufficiently insulated! De-excite the machine as described above.

No tests are to be performed with open star point! The correct connection of the power cables can be checked with appropriate equipment.

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 5

Maintenance for earthing brush

Optimum maintenance and care for earthingbrushes is the base for smallest brush wear. The maintenance of brushes must take place aftercertain intervals that depend on the alternators size as well as load and ambient conditions.

Brushes are subject to wear and tear and must be cleaned by air (pressure or suction) from time to time. Routine check every 3 months isrecommended by AvK to ensure about operationalbehaviour and suitable changing intervals.

All brushes and holders must be checked for free movement. Blocked brushes may lead to damage.

Worn out brushes must be renewed in time, so that damages at the contact surface on the shaft can be avoided. New earthing brushes do not need grind-in (other than slip rings).

Using brushes bigger than the original size is only possible after agreement with the supplier.

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 6

Maintenance of Earthing Fault Monitoring

Optimum maintenance and care of the brushes and slip rings is the base for smallest wear. The maintenance must take place in certain timeintervals. The frequency of the maintenancesdepends on alternator size as well as on load and ambient conditions.

Brushes are subject to wear and tear and must be cleaned by air (pressure or suction) from time to time. Routine checks every 3 months isrecommended by AvK in order to estimate thenecessary time intervals during the actual operation conditions.

All brushes and holders must be checked for free movement. Blocked brushes may lead to damage.

Worned out brushes must be replaced in time in order to avoid damages on the slip rings and to ensure the perfect function of the Earthing Fault Monitoring. New brushes need grind-in with the slip rings. The use of larger brushes than originally mounted is only possible after agreement with the supplier.

Note:

The Earthing Fault Monitoring is mounted on the NDE of the machine.

Attention:

Maintenance works must be performed only during standstill of the machine.

Electrical Machines with two shaft ends

Bearing currents by electrical machines with two shaft ends must be avoided.

AvK recommends an insulated coupling mounted on the NDE.

Another possibility is that all bearings of the NDE aggregate are insulated.

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 7

Anti - condensation heater:

The anti condensation heater is to be connected according to correct rating and supply voltage.Please refer to rating plate of the machine.

Control of the anti – condensation heater should be done that the heater

- is switched on after the machine has stopped,- is switched off before starting up the machine.

Tubular heater type RHK T + H art. no. 100870 and 100872

Description

2 heaters type RHK dia. 8, 5mm x 500mm long assembled into two brackets made of stainless steel as per our drawing no 31522, heaters wired in parallel by brass brackets, silicon insulated connection cable 3000mm long.Number of heater elements is according to required heating power.

Technical data of the heaters

Heater sheath: Chrome-Nickel-Steel AISI 321

Heater wire: NiCr 8020, Mat. no.: 2.48869

Insulation material:pure magnesium oxide, highly compacted

Connection:threaded bolt M4 with silicon insulated cable

Tolerances

Diameter of heaters: 8,5mm ± 0,15mmStraight length of heaters: 500 ± 2 %Wattage per heater: 500 Watt ± 10 %Total wattage (4 heaters):1000 Watt ± 10 %Voltage: 230 VoltDielectric strength: 1250 VFinal test: per standard

DIN EN 60 335

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 8

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 9

Bolting torque for fixing screws

If no further indications are made , use the following bolting torque for connections of fixing screws and fixing nuts:

screwsproperty class

8.8

screwsproperty class

4.6M4 3,0 1,1M5 3,5 2,2M6 9,0 3,7M8 18 9,0M10 45 18M12 50 31M16 110 75M20 250 150M24 440 255M30 980 510M36 1730 890M42 2700 1450

starting torque in Nm

Values according to VDI 2230 calculated considering the maximal admissible surface pressure under the screw head and a frictional co –efficient µ ges = 0,125

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 10

Dust filter made of metal fabric

Description

Design of the filter

The frames and the plates of the filter are fabricated of:• Constructional steel with zinc coated mesh wire• Stainless steel with stainless steel mesh wire

alternatively depending on applicationconditions

Type of filter

B1 according to DIN 24185 / part 100EU2 according to DIN 24185 / part 2

Medium degree of deposition 65 = 80 %

Maintenance

The maintenance intervals depend on the local dust accumulation. The dust protective filter plates have to be cleaned with the usual commercial detergents. Cleaning with high-pressure cleaning devices isalso possible.

Caution:

Do not wet the filter plates with oil!Observe the instructions for pollutioncontrol.

The following detergents can be used whencleaning mechanically:

Calgonit / Somat / Topmat 760 (or equivalent)

If only a manual cleaning is possible, use thefollowing detergents:

Rivonit / RG 1083 (or equivalent)

Regular checks and cleaning of the dustprotective filter system is indispensable for the safety in operation of the electricalmachines

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 11

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 12

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KGBunsenstraße 1785053 Ingolstadt, GermanyPhone: +49(0)841-792-0Fax: +49(0)841-792-250e-mail: [email protected]

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KGDreieich branchBenzstraße 47-4963303 Dreieich, GermanyPhone: +49(0)6103-5039-0Fax: +49(0)6103-5039-40e-mail: [email protected]

Cooler Description

USER MANUAL KLIMA

AIR-AIR COOLER

2

Supplier information:Homepage:

www.Klima.com

The Netherlands:Klima Thermo-Tech B.V. Rogier van de Weydenstraat 45 5642 JG Eindhoven P.O. Box 300 5600 AH Eindhoven Telephone: +31 (0)40-2981818 Telephone service: +31 (0)40-2981858 Fax: +31 (0)40-2981800 E-mail [email protected]

Supplier Belgium:S.A. Klima Belgium N.V. Leuvensesteenweg 49c 1932 Zaventem Telephone: +32 (0)2-7206026 Fax: +32 (0)2-7203407 E-mail [email protected]

Supplier Belgium:Klima warmtetechniek N.V. Buitenheide 4 3930 Hamont-Achel

Supplier France:Klima S.A.R.L. Chateau Rouge - 276 Avenue de la Marne 59708Marcq-en-Baroeul Telephone: +33 (0)320-65-91-65 Fax: +33 (0)320-65-91-60 E-mail [email protected]

Publication: 03.12.2002

3

Table of Contents 1 General Information...........................................................................4

1.1 Product Information ...........................................................41.2 Installation Parts ................................................................51.3 Prohibitions on (putting into) Operation .............................61.4 Guarantee..........................................................................6

2 Safety ...........................................................................................72.1 General Safety...................................................................72.2 Protection: .........................................................................9

3 Transport, Storage and Installation Site. .........................................103.1 Instructions for Transport and Hoisting ............................103.2 Transport and Packaging.................................................113.3 Storage: ...........................................................................113.4 Installation Siting:.............................................................11

4 Installation .......................................................................................124.1 Safety Measures and Facilities on the Heat Exchanger / Installation. ....................................124.1.1 Electrical Connections. ....................................................124.1.1.1 Connection Regulations...................................................124.1.2 Moving Parts....................................................................124.2 Preparation for Installation...............................................134.3 Installation .......................................................................13

5 Start-up .........................................................................................145.1 Inspection before putting the unit into operation ..............145.2 Air Inflow..........................................................................155.3 Inspection after Start-up: .................................................155.4 Shut-Down of the Installation:..........................................15

6 Maintenance and Inspection:...........................................................166.1 Inspection ........................................................................176.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger..........................................176.2.1 Disassembly of the Heat Exchanger................................176.2.1.1 Disassembly Centrifugal Fan...........................................186.2.1.2 Disassembly Axial Fan. ...................................................206.2.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger..........................................206.2.2.1 Air Side Cleaning.............................................................206.2.2.2 Cleaning the Housing. .....................................................216.2.3 Assembly of the Heat Exchanger.....................................216.2.3.1 Assembly Centrifugal Fan................................................216.2.3.2 Assembly Axial Fan. ........................................................21

7 Malfunctions ....................................................................................227.1 Identification and Correction of Malfunctions. ..................227.2 Safety Measures / Facilities:............................................23

8 Customer Service:...........................................................................248.1 Ordering Spare Parts:......................................................248.2 Complaints Procedure: ....................................................24

9 Technical Specifications / Documentation.......................................25

4

1 General InformationPictograms used in this manual

Dangerous situation with possibility of personal injury as well as damage to the equipment.

Reference to tips, comments and supplements with regard to using the equipment.

The general standards apply to symbols that are applied to the installation by the owner.

This manual supplies information and instructions for the correct and safe use of the unit. Many accidents are the result of incorrect use. Instructions in this manual must therefore always be followed.The safety instructions must also always be observed when work is done on 0the equipment. The complete manual must be carefully read. If, after reading this manual, questions still exist, you must contact the supplier / contractor for more information.

The installation may NOT be put into operation before all unclear issues have been resolved.

1.1 Product Information Product : Air/Air Cooler.Type : See Technical Specification Sheet or type plate

For exchanging heat between two airflows. The cool air flows (inner circuit) in a cross current to the cool air (outer circuit) through a tube bundle with one airflow flowing through the tubes and the other airflow flowing around the tubes. The flow of air is maintained by fans. Air/Air Coolers are used for cooling and extracting excess heat converted from energy by electromotors, generators, and transformers, etc.

5

1.2 Installation PartsFig. 1 A few examples of Air/Air Coolers.

Fig 1

1. Housing 2. Centrifugal Fan 3. Axial Fan 4. Cold air in 5. Cold air out 6. Air to be cooled, in 7. Air to be cooled, out

6

1.3 Prohibitions on (putting into) Operation

It is Prohibited to operate the Unit beyond Design Conditions

The unit is designed according to the design parameters as stated in the enclosed technical specification sheet. If these parameters are exceeded then it is PROHIBITED to put the installation into operation without prior consultation with the manufacturer. Moreover, all continued use in such a non-design situation is considered contrary to the regulations. The manufacturer is not liable for any material damage or personal injury that results from further use: this risk is solely the responsibility of the owner / user.

Prior to using the unit, the user must have read and understood the accompanying MANUFACTURERS STATEMENT (Guideline 89/392/EEC art.4 paragraph 2 and Appendix II under B).

Klima has advised on the choice of materials, the user remains responsible for the media used with regards to corrosion.

1.4 Guarantee

Unless covered by a separate agreement, Klima guarantees the products supplied by the company to be sound and in good working order, according to the technical specifications, for a period of 6 months after being put into operation, up to a maximum of 12 months after delivery. The General Terms of Sale and Delivery can be requested from your supplier. Any damage and/or decrease in capacity due to non-observance of this user manual are not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee expires if any adaptations or changes are made to the heat exchanger.

The equipment must always be inspected upon delivery for damage to the equipment during transport. The manufacturer must immediately be notified of any damage during transport.

7

2 Safety

2.1 General Safety Physical injuriesPhysical injuries can be caused by: • Burning, by touching the heat exchanger, the motor or

other hot parts of the installation. • Electrocution from contact with the electrical components • Electrocution from touching live parts due to short

circuiting of the motor • Maiming from contact with the rotating fan • Sucking in or trapping of clothing • Flying parts of the unit (breakage) • Fire and explosion caused by the motor (ignition of the

medium). • Bumping against pointed and/or sharp parts of the

installation

Damage to the equipmentDamage to the equipment can be caused by: • External forces. • Corrosion. • Erosion. • Fatigue. • Pressure / temperature too high. • Impact load. • Transport • Imbalance of the fan (vibrations). • Assembly errors of the motor installation. • Assembly errors in the fan installation. • Overheating of the motor (from overloading)

For transport see: the Instructions for Transport and Hoisting If handled incorrectly, danger for physical injury and/or damage to the equipment exists

Even after switching off the installation the heat exchanger surface can still be hot.

The unit may only be fed with the mediums stated in the technical specification sheet.

8

No fatigue analysis has been taken into account and therefore the unit should only be used for static load.

To avoid damage to the equipment being cooled, first turn off the equipment being cooled and only then stop the cooler.

Sudden changes in pressure and temperature must be avoided.

The values stated in the technical specification sheet must not be exceeded.

This manual describes other safety instructions than those safety instructions related to the chapter in which they occur. The complete manual must therefore be read to be aware of all safety provisions and measures to be taken when using this installation.

The fan's electrical components must be earthed, except for those components with double insulation.

The application of an operating switch in the main or driving current, if safe maintenance of the fan cannot be guaranteed during normal operation.

The fan is only suitable for transporting non-aggressive air unless otherwise agreed with the customer (in writing).

Inspect the clearance of the fan before using for the first time or after maintenance.

After switching off the fan's motor it will take a little while before the fan stops.

The motors assembled by Klima are suited to working in environmental temperatures between -20°C en +55°C. For lower temperatures, if stated on the order, the motor can be greased with special grease for operating temperatures down to -40°C. For higher environmental conditions than +55°C it is necessary to place the motor outside the airflow. A special motor (suitable for higher temperatures) is also available.

9

2.2 Protection: For the protection of others, place the heat exchanger out of reach, in a closed space, e.g. a boiler house, only accessible to authorized staff acquainted with the safety requirements applying to the equipment stored there.If the heat exchanger is set up close to people, presenting a risk of burns, insulation of the heat exchanger is mandatory. The user must take care to provide adequate danger signs on exposed un-insulated parts of the installation, which present risk of burns or other injury and/or damage. The fan's drive is protected. If the cooler is set up close to people, presenting a risk of contact, the fan must be shielded in accordance with Euro Norm EN 294. These protective materials can be delivered by the manufacturer if requested.

10

3 Transport, Storage and Installation Site.

3.1 Instructions for Transport and Hoisting Use the hoisting facilities/crane hooks on the unit. These hoisting facilities are only intended for hoisting the air-water cooler prior to it being assembled to other equipment. The hoisting facilities may no longer be used to lift and/or move the assembly once the cooler is assembled with other equipment. For global hoisting instructions, see Fig. 2.

Fig 2

11

3.2 Transport and Packaging

For transport see: the Instructions for Transport and Hoisting

Always use the appropriate hoisting facilities and equipment.

Respect the prescribed safety norms and regulations.

If handled incorrectly, danger for physical injury and/or damage to the equipment exists

Any packaging must be removed carefully and disposed of in an environmentally friendly way.

3.3 Storage: The unit must always be stored covered and dry. Long-term storage from 2 to 24 months requires airtight packaging of the unit adding a moisture absorbent material e.g. silica-gel.

3.4 Installation Siting:

General conditions on installation siting / location should satisfy: • Sufficiently firm and level ground or construction, adapted to the load

that is expected.• Sound construction and vibration-free installation of the unit. • Protect if necessary against possible damage by e.g. internal transport.• See the technical specification sheet for product-related information.• Protection. For safety, see Chapter 2.2 under “Safety”.• The location where the equipment is placed must have enough space

for installation, maintenance and cleaning. See the relevant chapters.• Sufficient light and space for inspection and maintenance.• The unit is anti seismic to maximum earthquake intensity in accordance

with Eurocode 8.

12

4 Installation

The assembly and start-up must be carried out by a suitably qualified person appointed by the buyer or by a qualified contractor. The installation may only be operated, maintained and repaired by authorised, trained and instructed personnel.

4.1 Safety Measures and Facilities on the Heat Exchanger / Installation.

Installation must be carried out in such a manner that all likely risks are excluded. To achieve this, the following points must at least be observed:

• A temperature-limiting device must be placed in the circuit to protect against excessive temperatures.

• The fitting of inspection facilities such as temperature gauges.

4.1.1 Electrical Connections. Prior to connecting the fan motor one must consult the wiring diagram in the connector box. One must be very careful specially when connecting pole reversible motors. Experience shows that many mistakes are made when installing these motors.The connection must be in accordance with local regulations. A thermal safety switch for the motor is built into the electrical circuit of 3 phase motors for which the setting corresponds to the maximum allowable current as stated on the motor type plate. If the relay is incorrectly set then any damage to the motor will not be compensated either by the manufacturer of the electromotor or by Klima Thermo-Tech B.V. How the unit is switched on, the thickness of the wiring, type and settings of the safety measures, must be chosen in consultation with your contractor or power supplier. All electrical components must be earthed, except for those components with double insulation.

4.1.1.1 Connection Regulations.

• The electrical equipment must be connected in compliance with Euro Norm EN 60204-1.

• Local connection regulations (e.g. NEN 1010) must be complied with.

4.1.2 Moving Parts The installation is equipped with moving parts like an electromotor that drives a fan. These moving parts must be shielded. See the Chapter "Protection".

13

4.2 Preparation for Installation General: • Sufficient space for carrying out assembly, disassembly , maintenance,

cleaning, and other activities on the heat exchanger. • Before the heat exchanger can be connected, all tubes must be clean

so that no pollutants can enter the unit. • The gaskets used must be suitable for the medium, temperature and

pressure to be applied. • The bedplate, construction and mounting must be of sufficient strength

and designed to deal with expansion caused by temperature changes. • Mechanical vibrations in the heat exchanger must be prevented.

The design specifications stated in the technical specification sheet must always be adhered to. If the user deviates from these values, the responsibility rests with him.

4.3 Installation • The instructions for transport and hoisting must be observed when

placing or moving the equipment. • The cooler must be mounted, stress and vibration free, to the equipment

to be cooled. • Any ducts must be mounted stress free to the cooler. • Bolt-nut connections must be clean and lightly oiled.

14

5 Start-up


5.1 Inspection before putting the unit into operation Refer to the accompanying documentation if inspection, control and/or safety devices are built in. As a rule, the safety devices in the system to guard against excesses in temperature must be properly adjusted and tested before start-up. The entire circuit must also be inspected to check whether all connections have been properly made. All relevant safety regulations must be observed both before and during start-up.

The following instructions also apply when starting the fan: • The suction and exhaust openings must be connected to a duct system. • The suction and/or exhaust openings must be fitted with a protective

grid in the case of free suction or exhaust. • There must be no foreign objects in the fan. • Check if all bolts are properly tightened. • Check that the fan is running freely (manually).

Utmost caution must be taken when inspecting that the fan is running freely due to the extreme risk for physical injury if the fan were to unexpectedly go live during inspection.

• Inspect -if applicable- the setting of grids, valves, appendages and suchlike.

• Check the direction of the fan by applying current briefly.

Danger of maiming from contact with the rotating fan.

• The direction of the fan must be checked based on the directional arrow on the housing or the motor.

N.B. Never turn on again immediately; always wait until the fan and/or motor has completely stopped and never stop the fan by hand.

15

5.2 Air Inflow Once all inspections have been carried out, the fan(s) may be started and the rest of the installation may be put into operation.

5.3 Inspection after Start-up: After heating the heat exchanger for a certain period of time, all connections must be inspected for leakage. In case of leakage they must be repaired. See Chapter 7. Check whether the settings of the measuring and control devices reflect the expected values.

Check after starting the fan for: • Vibrations.• Unusual sounds.• Current consumption in relation to the motor's maximum allowable

amperage.

If any deviation is observed, the fan must immediately be stopped and the deviation must be corrected.

5.4 Shut-Down of the Installation: To shut down the heat exchanger the supply and return flows of the circuit must be closed. Normal operation is done with the on/off switch that is installed in the installation with an "on" and "off" indication. For remote control the switch must be marked with a functional description. The supplier of a third party must install a work switch enabling the main or drive current to be switched off.


16

6 Maintenance and Inspection:


The owner must post warnings against environmental factors that can pose a threat. Preferably using pictograms and/or text.

The owner must enforce the wearing of protective clothing and gloves by the personnel wherever necessary.

Maintenance, cleaning etc. must only take place on a shutdown unit.

Special measures apply to a shutdown unit. See Chapter 5.5.

Depending upon operating conditions, maintenance should be carried out every 1000 hours of operation or minimally 1x per year.

17

6.1 Inspection To guarantee a high degree of operational reliability regular inspection of the equipment by the maintenance and operating personnel is necessary for the following: • Leakage. • Temperature within the permissible limits. • Fouling of the fan, motor and possibly the heat exchanger (drop in

capacity). • Vibrations / strange noises. • General condition of the installation. • Corrosion. • Functioning of the safety devices. • Torque of the bolts. • Temperature of the bearings max. 95°C (ambient temperature + 40°C). • Temperature of the motor max. 135°C (ambient temperature +80°C).

6.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger.

Maintenance, cleaning etc. must only take place on a shutdown device. If this is not possible then these activities must be able to be carried out without danger.

6.2.1 Disassembly of the Heat Exchanger.

Proceed as follows:


Wait until the heat exchanger has cooled down!

18

6.2.1.1 Disassembly Centrifugal Fan.

The electromotor is mounted on a mounting plate and then the fan is mounted on the motors' shaft. Motor, fan and mounting plate are attached to/on the housing as one unit. Disassembly of the fan or motor is therefore done in reverse order. Use of a tackle here is advised (See Fig. 3).

Fig 3

1. Housing 2. Electromotor. 3. Shaft 4. Mounting Plate 5. Fan 6. Bolt 7. Nut

19

Fan, fitted with a clamping bush.

Loosen all Allen screws. Place one or two screws in the disassembly hole(s). Tighten the Allen screw(s) and fan and bush will come loose (See Fig. 4. A clamping bush with 2 disassembly holes is shown here as an example).

Fig 4

1. Electromotor. 2. Fan 3. Clamping bush 4. Allen screw 5. Disassembly hole 6. Assembly hole

20

Fan, fitted with drawing plate.

Disassemble the locking plate. Then assemble a drawing plate to the boss and pull the fan off the shaft by turning the central bolt (See Fig. 5).

Fig 5

1. Locking plate 2. Drawing plate 3. Boss part 4. Fan 5. Shaft 6. Central bolt 7. Locking nut

6.2.1.2 Disassembly Axial Fan.

For more information on the axial fan, refer to the manual „KLIMA AXIAL FAN“.

6.2.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger Cleaning the Filters. If any filters are built in these must be replaced or cleaned when they reach their replacement date.

6.2.2.1 Air Side Cleaning

• Using a vacuum cleaner. • Using compressed air blow through (in the opposite direction to the

normal airflow).

21

6.2.2.2 Cleaning the Housing.

If the housing needs to be cleaned care must be taken to avoid dirt falling on or into the equipment being cooled. To do so the housing is disassembled prior to cleaning.

6.2.3 Assembly of the Heat Exchanger.

6.2.3.1 Assembly Centrifugal Fan.

Fan, fitted with a clamping bush.Clean and degrease all bare surfaces. Position the bush in the correct position in the shaft and hand tighten the Allen screws in the assembly holes. Slide the boss with the bush on the shaft. Line them up. Tighten the Allen screw completely. Firmly tighten the Allen screws one by one. Fill all holes with grease. (See Fig. 4).

Fan, fitted with drawing plate.Slide the fan onto the shaft (note the pin) and attach the fan using the locking plate and nut and lock the nut. Assembly of the fan/motor with mounting plate to the housing must be done carefully to avoid damage to the fan. Mind the position of the junction box during assembly and check that the fan is running freely before tightening the bolts. (See Fig. 5).

6.2.3.2 Assembly Axial Fan.

For more information on the axial fan refer to the manual „KLIMA AXIAL FAN“.

22

7 Malfunctions

7.1 Identification and Correction of Malfunctions.

Malfunction Possible cause Correction of the malfunction

Imbalance of the fan Resolve the imbalance Fan malfunctioning / damaged

Replace fan

The operating conditions deviate from those stated in the technical specification sheet.

Adjust the operating conditions.

The heat exchanger is fouled.

Clean the heat exchanger (see Chapter: Cleaning the Heat Exchanger).

Assembly error(s) in the motor installation.

Correct assembly error(s) in the motor installation.

Assembly error(s) in the ventilator installation.

Correct assembly error(s) in the ventilator installation.

Overheating of the motor (from overloading)

Resolve the overload

Insufficient stability Optimise stability The connections have been interchanged.

Correct the connections.

Heat exchanger has insufficient capacity.

Fan running in reverse direction.

Change motor connection according to description in terminal box.

Malfunction Possible cause Correction of the malfunction Gasket faces dirtied or damaged.

Clean gasket faces. In case of damaged gasket faces, contact your supplier.

Defective gasket. Replace gasket. Bolt tightened insufficiently. Check joints and re-tighten

carefully. Defective tube. Contact your supplier. The operating conditions deviate from those stated in the technical specification sheet.

Adjust the operating conditions.

Heat exchanger is leaking

External forces. Assemble the installation so that it is stress-free.

23

7.2 Safety Measures / Facilities: Facilities must be provided (ladders, steps, cat ways etc.) to be able to safely reach all places to make adjustments and to perform maintenance and repairs.

24

8 Customer Service:

8.1 Ordering Spare Parts: When ordering spare parts it is important to provide the correct data. One should at least state: • Project and order number. • Complete description of product / type (See Technical Specification /

type plate). • Required part (for name see documentation).

8.2 Complaints Procedure: For complaints, requirements, or imperfections of the unit, please contact Klima, or your supplier’s, service department.

25

9 Technical Specifications / DocumentationTechnical specification sheet must be added here.

Regulator Descriptions

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR

DIGITAL EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEM

DECS-200

Edit Reset

RS-232

COM 0

Pre-Position

SystemControlExcitationDigital

DECS-200

P0003-2606/04/01

LowerLimits

UpperBalanceNull

TrackingInternal

Publication: 9360100990 Revision: E 12/05

DECS-200 Introduction i

INTRODUCTIONThis instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the DECS-200 Digital Excitation Control System. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:

• General Information and Specifications

• Controls and Indicators

• Functional Description

• Installation

• Maintenance

WARNING!

To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, only qualified personnel should perform the procedures in this manual.

NOTE

Be sure that the device is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper wire attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the unit case. When the DECS-200 is configured in a system with other devices, it is recommended to use a separate lead to the ground bus from each unit.

ii Introduction DECS-200

First Printing: January 2002

Printed in USA

© 2002, 2004, 2005 Basler Electric, Highland Illinois 62249 USA

All Rights Reserved

December 2005

It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design of all features and options are subject to modification without notice. Should further information be required, contact Basler Electric.

BASLER ELECTRIC ROUTE 143, BOX 269

HIGHLAND IL 62249 USA http://www.basler.com, [email protected]

PHONE +1 618.654.2341 FAX +1 618.654.2351

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

of Basler Electric, Highland Illinois, USA. It is loaned for confidential use, subject to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in any manner detrimental to the interest of Basler Electric.

DECS-200 Introduction iii

REVISION HISTORY

The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the DECS-200 hardware, firmware, and software. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual (9360100990) are also summarized. Revisions are listed in chronological order.

Hardware Version and Date Change

A, B, 11/01 • Pre-production manufacturing improvements and releases C, 01/02 • Released hardware to production

• Added CSA, UL, and CE logos to the part number labels D, 03/02 • Revised engineering documents E, 05/02 • Revised packing material F, 05.02 • Implemented firmware version 1.01.02 G, 06/02 • Implemented BESTCOMS version 1.03.04 and updated production test H, 08/02 • Improved circuit board component labeling

I • Revision level not used J, 10/02 • Revised terminal numbering overlays K, 01/03 • Began using new front panel LCD (display) L, 05/04 • Improved dielectric strength of “C” power supply (P/N 9360100100, 102 only)

L, M, 06/04 • Released firmware version 1.02.00. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision M, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision L.)

M, N, 07/04 • Updated power supply circuit boards. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision N, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision M.)

N, P, 07/04 • Released firmware version 1.02.01 and BESTCOMS version 1.04.01. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision P, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision N. Revision level O not used.)

P, Q, 03/05 • Improved mounting of front panel communication connector. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision Q, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision P.)

Q, R, 06/05 • Released firmware version 1.02.03 (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision R, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision Q.)

R, S, 07/05 • Updated packing material. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision S, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision R.)

Firmware Version and Date Change

1.01.01, 09/01 • Initial release 1.01.02, 05/02 • Resolved field overcurrent indication problem when field overvoltage alarm was

triggered • Improved var to AVR mode (online) tracking • Resolved nuisance EDM indication on secondary DECS in dual DECS applications • Resolved field overvoltage and field overcurrent alarm indication of secondary

DECS during startup in dual DECS applications 1.01.03, 11/02 • Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles parameter 1.02.00, 06/04 • Added takeover-style OEL

• Added option of specifying on-line/off-line OEL activation via the 52J/K and 52L/M contact inputs

• Added stator current limiting and loss of field protection • Added automatic alarm reset when generator frequency decreases below 10 Hz • Improved crosscurrent compensation

1.02.02, 04/05 • Improved Auxiliary input measurement accuracy 1.02.03, 06/05 • Modified firmware for compatibility with new LCD

iv Introduction DECS-200

Software Version and Date Change

1.03.00, 09/01 • Initial Release 1.03.03, 05/02 • Updated BESTCOMS to add oscillography trigger to step response 1.03.04, 06/02 • Improved overall functionality. Allowed V/Hz Slope Setting adjustments to be made

in increments of 0.01 instead of 0.1. The default value of the Analysis screen was changed from 10% steps to 2% steps.

1.03.05, 11/02 • Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles parameter. 1.04.00, 06/04 • Added takeover-style OEL, SCL, and loss of field settings to interface.

Manual Revision and Date Change

—, 01/02 • Initial release A, 01/02 • Changed introduction section to reflect the January first printing date. Repaginated

the introduction so that the table of contents begins on an odd page. Edited the table of contents entries for sections five and seven to reflect the appropriate names.

B, 10/02 • Updated Figure 4-3 to correct error in terminal numbers. Updated terminal assignments in Section 1 to correct the error reflected from old Figure 4-3. Added Section 8, Troubleshooting. Corrected various minor errors.

C, 11/02 • Changed Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection in Section 1 to reflect the pole ratio and increment. Removed Gen Poles and added Pole Ratio to Figure 2-2. Made changes to Figures 2-6 and 2-8. Deleted reference to Generator Poles and Exciter Poles in Sec. 3, Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Function but added Pole Ratio. Updated the list of internal variable on page 3-14.Revised the Installationportion in Sec. 5 for using a CD-ROM disc. Added the Pole Ratio Calculator in Sec 5 as well as updated the screen shots. Updated screen shots in Figures 6-1, 6-3, 6-7 and 6-14. Changed increment levels of register 47747-48, Table 7-17. Updated Table 7-25.

D, 06/04 • Section 1: Updated output contact ratings. • Section 2: Modified tables and menu branch drawings to show added settings. • Section 3: Added functional description of takeover OEL and SCL. Removed

reference to A-phase and C-phase as acceptable sensing current source for crosscurrent compensation applications.

• Section 4: Added Crosscurrent Sensing sub-section with table listing crosscurrent sensing terminals.

• Section 5: Revised or added all applicable BESTCOMS screens and setting descriptions to accommodate new settings/features.

• Section 6: Added/changed BESTCOMS screens and DECS-200 settings to accommodate changed BESTCOMS screens and new DECS-200 settings.

• Section 7: Added/revised Modbus register tables to accommodate new DECS-200 settings.

E, 12/05 • Removed expired patent information from Section 1.• Added missing setting descriptions to Section 5• In Section 4, added caution box regarding the length of screws used to attach

escutcheon plate to DECS-200 • Made various minor corrections/changes throughout manual

DECS-200 Introduction v

CONTENTS

Section 1 • General Information ................................................................................................................ 1-1

Section 2 • Human-Machine Interface....................................................................................................... 2-1

Section 3 • Functional Description............................................................................................................. 3-1

Section 4 • Installation ............................................................................................................................... 4-1

Section 5 • BESTCOMS Software............................................................................................................. 5-1

Section 6 • Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1

Section 7 • Modbus™ Software................................................................................................................. 7-1

Section 8 • Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 8-1

vi Introduction DECS-200

This page intentionally left blank.

DECS-200 General Information i

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................1-1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................1-1FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................1-1

Functions ............................................................................................................................................1-1Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................................1-1HMI Interface ......................................................................................................................................1-1

APPLICATION........................................................................................................................................1-2Introduction .........................................................................................................................................1-2Operating Power.................................................................................................................................1-2Control Power .....................................................................................................................................1-2Sensing ...............................................................................................................................................1-3Excitation Limiters...............................................................................................................................1-3External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional)...............................................1-3Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes...................................................................1-3Communication With a PC..................................................................................................................1-3

MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................1-3Sample Style Number.........................................................................................................................1-4

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................................1-4Control Power .....................................................................................................................................1-4Operating Power.................................................................................................................................1-4Generator Voltage Sensing ................................................................................................................1-5Generator Current Sensing.................................................................................................................1-5Bus Voltage Sensing ..........................................................................................................................1-5Accessory Inputs ................................................................................................................................1-5Communication Ports .........................................................................................................................1-5Contact Inputs.....................................................................................................................................1-6Contact Outputs..................................................................................................................................1-6Field Output ........................................................................................................................................1-6Regulation...........................................................................................................................................1-6Parallel Compensation........................................................................................................................1-7Field Overvoltage Protection ..............................................................................................................1-7Field Overcurrent Protection...............................................................................................................1-7Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection.............................................................................................1-7Generator Undervoltage Protection....................................................................................................1-7Generator Overvoltage Protection......................................................................................................1-8Loss of Sensing Protection .................................................................................................................1-8Loss of Field Protection ......................................................................................................................1-8Soft Start Function ..............................................................................................................................1-8Voltage Matching ................................................................................................................................1-8On-Line Overexcitation Limiting .........................................................................................................1-8Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting .........................................................................................................1-9Underexcitation Limiting .....................................................................................................................1-9Manual Excitation Control...................................................................................................................1-9Metering ..............................................................................................................................................1-9Sequence of Event Recording (SER) ...............................................................................................1-10Data Logging (Oscillograpy) .............................................................................................................1-10Temperature Range..........................................................................................................................1-10Type Tests ........................................................................................................................................1-10Physical.............................................................................................................................................1-10UL Recognition .................................................................................................................................1-10CSA Certification ..............................................................................................................................1-10CE Compliance.................................................................................................................................1-10

Figures Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application....................................................................1-2Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart............................................................................................1-3

ii General Information DECS-200


DECS-200 General Information 1-1

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTIONThe Basler Digital Excitation Control System (DECS-200) is a microprocessor-based control device intended for generator power management. Programmability of system parameters and regulation settings enables the DECS-200 to be used in a wide range of applications and provides greater flexibility in excitation system optimization. The DECS-200 can accommodate generator exciter field requirements up to 15 Adc continuously in 32, 63 or 125 Vdc applications with one model.

FEATURESDECS-200 units have the following features and capabilities.

Functions

• Four control modes o Automatic voltage regulation (AVR) o Manual or field current regulation (FCR) o Power factor (PF) o Reactive power (var)

• Soft start buildup with an adjustable ramp in AVR and FCR control modes • One adjustment range or pre-position setpoint for each control mode • Overexcitation limiting (OEL) and underexcitation limiting (UEL) in AVR, var and PF control modes • Twenty stability selections • Underfrequency compensation or volts per hertz ratio limiter • Autotracking between operating modes and between DECS-200 units (optional) • Automatic transfer to a backup DECS-200 unit (optional) • Eight generator protection features

o Field overvoltage o Field overcurrent o Generator overvoltage o Generator undervoltage o Watchdog timer o Loss of sensing o Exciter diode monitor (EDM) o Loss of field

• Generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and reactive differential compensation • Data logging and event recording

Inputs and Outputs

• Single-phase rms bus voltage sensing • Single-phase or three-phase rms generator voltage sensing • Single-phase generator current sensing (1 or 5 amperes, nominal) • Analog inputs (±10 Vdc and 4 to 20 mAdc) provide proportional, remote control of the setpoint • Eleven PLC-compatible contact sensing inputs for system interface • Separate ac and dc power inputs accommodate redundant operating power sources • Pulse-width modulated output power stage rated at a maximum of 15 amperes, continuous • Five output relays for system control or annunciation

o Three programmable output relays o Two fixed-function output relays

HMI Interface

• Front panel HMI includes pushbutton controls, LED indicators and a backlit, liquid crystal display (LCD)

• BESTCOMS Windows® based software provides easy, fast and accurate setup and control

1-2 General Information DECS-200

• Three communication ports o Front RS-232 port for communication with a PC using BESTCOMS software o Right-side panel RS-232 port for dedicated communication with a redundant DECS-200 o RS-485 communication port for communication with a remote terminal

• Modbus protocol for the RS-485 port allows communication at distances of up to 1,200 meters (3,937 feet)

APPLICATION

Introduction

In the typical application shown in Figure 1-1, the DECS-200 controls the exciter field of a synchronous generator. Front panel controls, indicators and serial communication ports using PC software make the system easy to operate locally or from remote locations. DECS-200 operation, settings and safety setup procedures in this manual should be studied before implementing your application. For detailed application assistance, contact Basler Electric or your local sales representative.

Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application

Operating Power

Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is typically obtained from the generator output through a power transformer. Alternately, operating power can be supplied from a permanent magnet generator (PMG).

Control Power

If power supply option C (120/125 Vac/Vdc) is selected, a redundant power source can be used with the DECS-200. (See Figure 1-1.) In this configuration, if one of the two sources fails, the other source will continue to supply DECS-200 operating power. If power supply option L (24/48 Vdc) is selected, no redundant power source is available.


Sensing

The DECS-200 senses generator voltage and current through voltage and current transformers. Field voltage and field current values are sensed internally.

Excitation Limiters

Integrated overexcitation and underexcitation limiters (OEL and UEL) are available for both on-line and off-line protection.

External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional)

For critical applications, a second DECS-200 can provide backup excitation control. The DECS-200 allows for excitation system redundancy by providing external tracking and transfer provisions between DECS-200 units. The secondary DECS-200 operating modes can be programmed to track the primary DECS-200 operating mode. Proper, redundant excitation system design allows for removal of the failed system. Periodic testing of the backup system must be performed to ensure that it is operational and can be put into service without warning.

Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes

In applications using a single DECS-200, the DECS-200 can be programmed so that the inactive operating modes track the active operating mode. Operating modes include AVR, FCR, PF and var. If the excitation system is normally operating on-line in Internal mode and a loss of sensing occurs, the DECS-200 could be transferred to manual (FCR) mode where the loss of sensing has no impact on the exciter's ability to maintain proper excitation levels. While performing routine testing of the DECS-200 in backup mode, the internal tracking feature allows a transfer to an inactive mode that will result in no disturbance to the system.

Communication With a PC

Communication between the DECS-200 (front panel RS-232 port) and a PC is possible through BESTCOMS software. BESTCOMS enables fast and easy programming of setpoints and ranges and allows for step changes to facilitate proper stability settings. BESTCOMS also provides easy start and stop control and operator adjustment of the excitation system with real-time metering. The software catalog number is BESTCOMS-DECS200. BESTCOMS is provided with the DECS-200 as part of the software/manual package.

MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION DECS-200 operating characteristics are defined by letters and numbers that make up the style number. The model number and style number describe the options included in the DECS-200 and appear on a label attached to the side of the case. Upon receipt of a DECS-200 unit, be sure to check the style number against the requisition and packing list to ensure that they agree.

Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart


Sample Style Number

The style number identification chart (Figure 1-2) defines the electrical characteristics and operational features included in the DECS-200. For example, if the style number were DECS-200-1L, the device would have the following characteristics and features.

DECS-200 -- Digital Excitation Control System 1--- Internal autotracking/transfer L --- 24/48 Vdc control power supply

SPECIFICATIONSDECS-200 electrical and physical characteristics are listed in the following paragraphs.

Control Power

Input VoltageDC Input: 16 to 60 Vdc (style XL) or 90 to 150 Vdc (style XC) AC Input: 85 to 132 Vac, 50/60 Hz (style XC only) Note: Isolation transformer for ac input is required when dual control

power sources are used.

BurdenDC Input: 30 W AC Input: 50 VA

TerminalsDC Input: B7 (+), B8 (–) AC Input: B9 (L), B10 (N) (style XC only)

Operating Power To achieve the proper DECS-200 output voltage, the appropriate operating power input voltage must be provided.

32 Vdc PWM OutputNominal: 60 Vac Operating Range: 56 to 70 Vac, ±10% Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase Burden: 780 VA

63 Vdc PWM OutputNominal: 120 Vac Operating Range: 100 to 139 Vac, ±10%Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase Burden: 1,570 VA

125 Vdc PWM OutputNominal: 240 Vac Operating Range: 190 to 277 Vac, ±10%Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase Burden: 3,070 VA

Voltage BuildupFrom a minimum of 3 Vac

TerminalsC2 (A-phase), C3 (B-phase), C4 (C-phase)


Generator Voltage Sensing Type: 1-phase/3-phase, 4 ranges Burden: <1 VA per phase Terminals: A1, A2, A3

50 Hertz SensingRange 1: 100 Vac (85 to 127 Vac) Range 2: 200 Vac (170 to 254 Vac) Range 3: 400 Vac (340 to 508 Vac) Range 4: 500 Vac (425 to 625 Vac)

60 Hertz SensingRange 1: 120 Vac (94 to 153 Vac) Range 2: 240 Vac (187 to 305 Vac) Range 3: 400 Vac (374 to 600 Vac) Range 4: 600 Vac (510 to 660 Vac)

Generator Current Sensing Type: Two ranges, two channels Frequency: 50/60 Hz Ranges: 1 A or 5 A nominal, continuous Burden: <1 VA per phase

Terminals1 A Sensing: B1, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL) B4, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation) 5 A Sensing: B2, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL) B5, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)

Bus Voltage Sensing Type: 1-phase, 4 ranges, Burden: <1 VA Sensing Ranges: Identical to generator voltage sensing Terminals: A4, A5

Accessory Inputs

Current InputRange: 4 to 20 mAdc Terminals: A6 (+), A7 (–)

Voltage InputRange: –10 to +10 Vdc Terminals: A9 (+), A10 (–)

Communication Ports

InterfaceRS-232: Full duplex RS-485: Half duplex

ConnectionsCom 0: Front panel DB-9 connector Com 1: Right-side panel DB-9 connector Com 2: Left-side panel screw terminals (A40, A41, A42)

ParametersBaud: 1200 to 19200 Data Bits: 8 Parity: None Stop Bits: 1 (Com 0, Com 1) or 2 (Com 2)


Contact Inputs Type: Dry contact, accept PLC open-collector outputs Interrogation Voltage: 12 Vdc

Terminal AssignmentsStart: A21, A22 Stop: A23, A24 Auto (AVR): A25, A26 Manual (FCR): A27, A28 Raise: A29, A30 Lower: A31, A32 Pre-Position: A33, A34 Unit/Parallel (52L/M): A35, A36 Var/PF (52J/K): A37, A38 Secondary Enable: A39, A40 Alarm Reset: A41, A42

Contact Outputs

Make and Break Ratings24 Vdc: 8.0 A 48 Vdc: 0.7 A 125 Vdc: 0.2 A 120/240 Vac: 10.0 A

Carry Ratings24/48/125 Vdc: 8.0 A 120/240 Vac: 10.0 A

Terminal AssignmentsStart/Stop (ON, OF): A11, A12 Watchdog (WTCHD): A13, A14 Relay 1 (RLY1): A15, A16 Relay 2 (RLY2): A17, A18 Relay 3 (RLY3): A19, A20

Field Output

Continuous Output Rating60 Vac Input: 32 Vdc, 15 Adc 120 Vac Input: 63 Vdc, 15 Adc 240 Vac Input: 125 Vdc, 15 Adc

10 Second Forcing Output Rating60 Vac Input: 50 Vdc, 30 Adc 120 Vac Input: 100 Vdc, 30 Adc 240 Vac Input: 200 Vdc, 30 Adc

Minimum Field Resistance

32 Vdc Application: 2.13 Ω63 Vdc Application: 4.2 Ω125 Vdc Application: 8.3 Ω

Regulation

AVR Operating ModeAccuracy: ±0.25% over load range at rated PF and constant generator frequency Steady State Stability: ±0.1% at constant load and generator frequency Temperature Drift: ±0.5% for a 0 to 50°C change V/Hz Characteristic: Slope from 0 to 3 PU is adjust-able in 0.1 PU increments. Voltage

regulation error is within ±2.0% of the nominal voltage. Response Time: <1 cycle


AccuracyFCR Mode: ±1.0% of the nominal value for 10% of the bridge input voltage change or

20% of the field resistance change. Otherwise, ±5.0%. Var Mode: ±2.0% of the nominal VA rating at the rated frequency Power Factor Mode: ±0.02 PF of the PF setpoint for the real power between 10 and 100% at

the rated frequency. Internal Tracking: 0.5%

Parallel Compensation

Modes: Reactive Droop and Reactive Differential (cross-current) ∗Burden: ∗ Can exceed 1 VA if external resistors are added to the CT circuit for

crosscurrent compensation.

Adjustment RangeReactive Droop: 0 to 30% Reactive Differential: –30 to 0%

Field Overvoltage Protection

PickupRange: 1.0 to 325 Vdc Increment: 1.0 Vdc

Time DelayRange: 0.2 to 30 s Increment: 0.1 s

Field Overcurrent Protection

PickupRange: 0 to 16 Adc Increment: 0.1 Adc

Time DelayCharacteristic: Inverse per ANSI C50.13

Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection

Pole RatioRange: 1 to 10 (0 if unknown) Increment: 0.01

Ripple ThresholdOpen and Shorted Diode: 0 to 100%

Time DelayOpen Diode Protection: 10 to 60 s Shorted Diode Protection: 5 to 30 s

Open and Shorted Diode Inhibit LevelsRange: 0 to 100% or <1 Adc field current <45 Hz and >70 Hz generator frequency

Generator Undervoltage Protection

PickupRange: 0 to 30 kVac Increment: 1.0 Vac



Generator Overvoltage Protection

PickupRange: 0 to 30 kVac Increment: 1.0 Vac


Loss of Sensing Protection Unbalance Generator Volts: 0 to 100% Balanced Generator Volts: 0 to 100%

Time DelayRange: 0 to 30 s Increment: 0.1 s

Loss of Field Protection

PickupRange: 0 to 3,000,000 kvar Increment: 1 kvar

Time DelayRange: 0.0 to 9.9 s Increment: 0.1 s

Soft Start Function

Setting RangeSoft Start Bias Level: 0 to 90% in 1% increments Soft Start Bias Time Delay: 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second increments

Voltage Matching Accuracy: Generator rms voltage is matched with the bus rms voltage to within

±0.5% of the generator voltage

On-Line Overexcitation Limiting Response time: <3 cycles

High Current LevelPickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc Time Range: 0 to 10 s Time Increment: 1 s

Medium Current LevelPickup Range: 0 to 20.0 Adc Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc Time Range: 0 to 120 s Time Increment: 1 s

Low Current LevelPickup Range: 0 to 15 Adc Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc Time Range: continuous


Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting

High Current LevelPickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc Time Range: 0 to 10 s Time Increment: 1 s

Low Current LevelPickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc Time Range: 0 to 10 s Time Increment: 1 s

Underexcitation Limiting Adjustment Range: 0 to 100% of the generator rated apparent power (kvar) at 0 kW real

power. Or customizable to generator curve capability.

Manual Excitation Control Range: 0 to 15.0 Adc Increment: 0.1 Adc

Metering Generator VoltageRange: 0 to 160% of nominal Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)

Generator CurrentRange: 0 to 200% of nominal Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)

Generator FrequencyRange: 10 to 90 Hz Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz

Bus VoltageRange: 0 to 160% of nominal Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)

Bus FrequencyRange: 10 to 90 Hz Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz

Phase AngleRange: –90 to +90 Accuracy: ±1.0

Field VoltageRange: 0 to 375 Vdc Accuracy: ±1.25 V or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)

Field CurrentRange: 0 to 31 Adc Accuracy: ±0.15 A or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)

Power FactorRange: –0.5 to +0.5 PF Accuracy: <0.02 PF

Real Power and Reactive PowerRange: 0 to 200% of nominal Accuracy: <1.0% of nominal


Sequence of Event Recording (SER)

127 event report, stored in volatile memory (retrievable via BESTCOMS) SER triggered by: Input/Output status changes, system operating status changes or alarm annunciations

Data Logging (Oscillograpy)

Stores 8 records in volatile memory. Up to 6 variables can be logged in a record. Sampling rate is 600 data points per log, up to 599 pre-trigger, 4 ms to 10 second intervals, (2.4 sec to 6,000 sec. total log duration).

Temperature Range

Operating: –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F)Storage: –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)CD-ROM: 0 to +50°C (32 to +122°F)

Type Tests

Shock15 G in 3 perpendicular planes

Vibration5 to 26 Hz: 1.2 G 27 to 52 Hz: 0.914 mm (0.036") double amplitude 53 to 500 Hz: 5 G

Surge Withstand Capability and Fast TransientTested per IEEE C37.90.1-1989

Dielectric StrengthTested per IEEE 421.3

Salt FogTested per MIL-STD-810E, Method 509.3

Physical Weight: 6.35 kg (14 lb) Dimensions: Refer to Section 4, Installation

UL Recognition UL recognized per standard 508, UL file number E90735.

CSA Certification Certified per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 Number 14, CSA File Number LR23131.

CE Compliance The DECS-200 meets the criteria set forth by the following standards:

EN 50081-2Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) emissions standard: EN 55011, Level A.

EN 50082-2Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Immunity

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)EN 61000-4-2, Level B/IEC 1000-4-2

Radiated SusceptibilityEN 61000-4-3, Level A/IEC 1000-4-3

Electrical Fast TransientEN 61000-4-4, Level B/IEC 1000-4-4


Radio Frequency ConductedEN 61000-4-6, Level A/IEC 1000-4-6

Power Frequency MagneticsEN 61000-4-8, Level A/IEC 1000-4-8

DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface i

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE........................................................................................2-1INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................2-1FRONT PANEL controls and indicators .................................................................................................2-1

Menu Navigation.................................................................................................................................2-2Navigation Aids...................................................................................................................................2-2Edit Sessions ......................................................................................................................................2-2Changing Settings ..............................................................................................................................2-3

PASSWORD PROTECTION..................................................................................................................2-8METERING SCREEN ............................................................................................................................2-9

Metering Fields ...................................................................................................................................2-9Setpoint Field....................................................................................................................................2-10Percent-of-Range Field.....................................................................................................................2-10Mode Message Field ........................................................................................................................2-10Alarm Annunciation Field..................................................................................................................2-10Alarm Message Screen ....................................................................................................................2-10Screens with Special Editing Modes ................................................................................................2-11Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................................2-11

FRONT PANEL OPERATION..............................................................................................................2-22Operating Modes ..............................................................................................................................2-22Setpoints ...........................................................................................................................................2-22Loop Gains .......................................................................................................................................2-23Controller Gains................................................................................................................................2-24Metering ............................................................................................................................................2-24Protection..........................................................................................................................................2-24Limiters .............................................................................................................................................2-25System Parameters ..........................................................................................................................2-26General Settings ...............................................................................................................................2-29

Figures Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators........................................................................................2-1Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch .........................................................................................................2-12Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch...........................................................................................................2-13Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch......................................................................................................2-14Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch ..........................................................................................................2-15Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch........................................................................................................2-16Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch ...........................................................................................................2-17Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3) ....................................................................2-18Figure 2-9. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 2 of 3) ....................................................................2-19Figure 2-10. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 3 of 3) ..................................................................2-20Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch ...........................................................................................2-21

Tables Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions ................................................................................2-2 Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters ...............................................................................................2-4 Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level ......................................................................2-8 Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities........................................................................................2-9 Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode ....................................................................2-10Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages .........................................................................................................2-10 Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index......................................................................2-23

ii Human-Machine Interface DECS-200


DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-1

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE INTRODUCTIONThis section describes the DECS-200 human-machine interface (HMI), illustrates how to navigate through the menu screens, and explains how to use the front panel interface to view and change settings.

FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS The front panel HMI consists of a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD), six pushbutton switches, six LED indicators, and an RS-232 communication connector. The LCD displays DECS-200 settings and excitation system information through the use of a structured menu. Menu screens are viewed and settings are changed by operating the front panel pushbuttons. Active conditions are annunciated by the front panel LEDs. The RS-232 connector (Com 0) enables communication between the DECS-200 and a PC operating BESTCOMS software.

Front panel HMI components are shown in Figure 2-1 and described in Table 2-1.

Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators

2-2 Human-Machine Interface DECS-200

Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions

Locator description

A LCD. Backlit liquid crystal display is 64 by 128 pixels in size and serves as the primary source of information from the DECS-200. Displays operations, setpoints, loop gains, metering, protection functions, system parameters, and general settings.

B Pre-Position LED. Lights at the predefined, pre-position setpoint of the active mode.

C Lower Limit LED. Lights at the minimum setpoint value of the active mode.

D Upper Limit LED. Lights at the maximum setpoint value of the active mode.

E Scrolling Pushbuttons. Pushbutton switches are used to scroll up, down, left, and right through the menu structure. When operating in Edit mode, the Left and Right pushbuttons select the variable to change and the Up and Down pushbuttons change the variable value.

F Reset Pushbutton. Cancels editing sessions, resets alarm annunciations and latched alarm relays, and can be used for quick access to the metering screen.

G Serial Port (Com 0). This port is dedicated to RS-232 communication with a computer terminal or PC running a terminal emulation program such as BESTCOMS. See Section 1 and Section 3 for more information about the DECS-200 serial ports.

H Edit Pushbutton. Enables settings changes. When the Edit pushbutton is first pushed, an LED within the pushbutton lights to indicate that Edit mode is active. When settings changes are complete (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit pushbutton is pressed again, the LED turns off to indicate that the changes are saved.

I Null Balance LED. Lights when the inactive modes (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) match the active mode.

J Internal Tracking LED. Lights when any inactive mode (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) is tracking the active mode to accomplish a bumpless transfer when changing active modes.

Menu Navigation

The front panel scrolling pushbuttons are used to move through the menu structure displayed by the LCD. Pressing the Reset pushbutton (when an edit session is not in progress) gives quick access to the Metering screen. Metering values cannot be viewed during an edit session.

Navigation Aids

On-screen navigation assists the user in moving from screen to screen. These navigation aids are contained in the top and bottom lines of the LCD.

The top line contains a menu path that is similar to the DOS prompt on a personal computer. When the menu path exceeds the width of the LCD, the first part of the menu path is replaced with two dots (..) so that the last part will be seen. Regardless of the menu path length, the current screen name is always shown.

The bottom line displays the menu screens that can be accessed from the current screen with the Left, Down and Right pushbuttons on the front panel. The Left pushbutton listing consists of a “<”, followed by an abbreviated menu name. The Down pushbutton listing consists of the letter v, followed by an abbreviated menu name. The right-pushbutton listing consists of a “>”, followed by an abbreviated menu name.

If the Left and Right pushbutton listings are blank, then the current screen is the only one on this level. If the Down pushbutton listing is blank, then there are no screens below the current screen.

Edit Sessions

Password access is required before entering an edit session. To initiate an edit session, press the Edit pushbutton. The Edit pushbutton lights to indicate that the front panel is in edit mode. If the appropriate access level is not active, then a prompt to enter a password appears. (Paragraphs titled Password Defaults and Password Protection in this section have more information about using passwords.)


Editing Settings

Once the password is entered and security access is obtained, the first editable field of the current screen is underlined. The setting in this field can be modified by pressing the Up pushbutton to increase the setting or the Down pushbutton to decrease the setting. To edit another setting on the current screen, use the Left pushbutton to advance the underline upward or the Right pushbutton to advance the underline downward to the other editable fields.

After all desired editing on the current screen is complete, the changes can be saved or the values that were in use prior to the edit session can be restored. Changes are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton which terminates the edit session and saves the changes in nonvolatile memory. Changes are aborted by pressing the Reset pushbutton which terminates the edit session without saving the changes. The previous values are then restored by reading them from nonvolatile memory. In both cases, the Edit pushbutton LED turns off to indicate that the edit session is terminated.

Security (password) access is not immediately lost when an edit session is terminated. Security access terminates after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity at the front panel. (Security access timeout is different from edit session timeout;. see Edit Session Timeout.) If this period of inactivity occurs during an edit session, any changes made are saved in nonvolatile memory and will be used or continue to be used by the DECS-200. At this time, both edit access and security access are terminated.

In order to modify settings on another screen with the same access level, the user merely navigates to that screen and presses the Edit pushbutton to start a new edit session on the new screen.

Edit Session Timeout

If the front panel is left in the Edit mode after any setting changes are made, the changes will be saved and the edit session terminated after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity.

Changing Settings

All settings that are viewable at the front panel are password protected and require security access to change.

Global access grants the right to change any viewable setting at the front panel.

Setpoint access grants the right to change only a few settings. These include basic operating settings like Start/Stop, AVR/FCR, PF/var, control setpoints and pre-positions.

See Table 2-2 for a complete setting list that shows the range, increments and default values. In Table 2-2, note that the Ref. column refers to numbers associated with the menu screens shown later in this section. These numbers should help you find the specific screen that contains the setpoint or parameter that you want to change. For a list of settings that are accessible with the Setpoint access level, see Table 2-3. All editable settings on a single menu screen are at the same access level.

NOTE

On most screen, setting changes are used immediately by the DECS-200. However, these changes are not saved in nonvolatile memory until the Edit pushbutton is pressed to terminate the edit session.

CAUTION

Pressing the Reset pushbutton after changing the active mode setpoint will cause a step change in the operating setpoint that may have the potential to adversely affect the system.


Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default

1.1 Start/Stop Selection Stop, Start N/A Stop

AVR/FCR Selection AVR, FCR N/A AVR

PF/Var Control Enable Off, PF Control, Var Control N/A Off

Load Comp. Selection Off, Droop N/A Droop

Pre-Position Enable Off, On N/A On

1.2 Voltage Matching Off, On N/A Off

Internal Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off

External Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off

Underfrequency UF, V/Hz N/A UF

2.1 AVR Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 V 120 V

FCR Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A

Droop Compensation –30% nom. 30% nom. 0.1% nom. 5% nom.

Var Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var

PF Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.00

2.1.1 Fine Voltage Band 0% (nom.) 30% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 20% (nom.)

AVR Min. Setpoint 70% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 70% (nom.)

AVR Max. Setpoint 100% (nom.) 110% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 110% (nom.)

FCR Min. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 0% (nom.)

FCR Max. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 120% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 120% (nom.)

2.1.2 Var Min. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%

Var Max. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%

Max Lag PF 0.5 1.0 0.005 0.8

Max Lead PF 1.0 –0.5 0.005 –0.8

Voltage Matching Band 0% (nom.) 20% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 10% (nom.)

Volt. Matching Ref. 90.0% 120.0% 0.1% 100%

2.2 AVR Prep. Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 VA 120.0 V

FCR Prep. Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max. setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A

Var Prep. Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var

PF Prep. Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.000

3.1 Gain Table Index 1 21 1 21

AVR/FCR Kp 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 30.0

AVR/FCR Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 150.0

AVR/FCR Kd 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0

AVR/FCR Td 0.0 1.0 0.01 0.08

3.2 AVR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

FCR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 25.0

3.3 OEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0

OEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

UEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0

UEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0

SCL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0

SCL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

3.4 PF Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 120.0

PF Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

Var Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 120.0

Var Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 1.00

Voltage Matching Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0


Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default 4.1 1st Metering Field V Avg

2nd Metering Field Vc-a

3rd Metering Field

Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, V Avg, Line I, VA, watts, var, PF Gen Hz, Bus Hz, Bus V, Fld V, Fld I, V Aux, EDM OC, EDM SC

Fld I

5.1 Corner Frequency 15.0 Hz 90.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 57.0 Hz

Underfrequency Slope 0.00 x V/Hz 3.00 x V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz 1.00 x V/Hz

5.2 Field OV Enable Off, On N/A Off

Field OC Enable Of, On N/A Off

Stator OV Enable Off, On N/A Off

Stator UV Enable Off, On N/A Off

Loss of Sensing Enable Off, On N/A Off

Loss of Sensing Xfr to FCR Enable

Off, On N/A Off

5.3 Exciter Open Diode Enable

Off, On N/A Off

Exciter Shorted Diode Enable

Off, On N/A Off

Loss of Field Enable Off, On N/A Off

5.4 Field OV Threshold 1 V 325 V 1 V 20 V

Field OC Base Value 0.1 A 16 A 0.1 A 0.1 A

Stator OV Threshold 0 V 30,000 V 1 V 150 V

Stator UV Threshold 0 V 30,000 V 1 V 90 V

EDM OD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%

EDM SD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%

5.5 EDM Inhibit Level 0% 100% 0.1% 10%

LOS Balanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 50%

LOS Unbalanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 20%

Loss of Field Level 0 3,000,000 kvar 1 kvar 50.00 kvar

5.6 Field OV Delay 0.2 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s

Exc OC Time Dial Mult. 0.1 20.0 0.1 1.0

Stator OV Delay 0.1 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s

Stator UV Delay 0.5 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s

Loss of Voltage Sensing 0.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s

Open Exciter Diode Delay

10.0 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s

5.7 Shorted Exciter Diode Delay

5.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s

Loss of Field TD 0.0 9.9 0.1 9.9 s

6.1 OEL Style Summing Point/Takeover N/A Summing Pnt

OEL Option Option 1/Option 2/Option 3 N/A Option 1

6.2 On-Line OEL Inst. Limit 0.0A 30.0 A 0.1 A 3.0 A

On-Line OEL Inst Time 0 s 10 s 1 s 10 s

On-Line OEL Med. Limit 0.0 A 20.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A

On-Line OEL Med. Time 0 s 120 s 1 s 120 s

On-Line OEL Cont. Limit 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A

6.3 Off-Line OEL Hi Limit 0.0 A 30 A 0.1 A 3.0 A

Off-Line OEL Hi Time 0 s 10 s 1 s 10 s

Off-Line OEL Low Limit 0.0 A 15 A 0.1 A 1.0 A

6.4 Off-Line Takeover OEL Max. Current

0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A

Off-Line Takeover OEL High Current

0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A


Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default

Off-Line Takeover OEL Time Delay

0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s

6.5 On-Line Takeover OEL Max Current

0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A

On-Line Takeover OEL Min Current

0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A

On-Line Takeover TD 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s

6.6 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW

UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW




6.7 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar

UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar




6.8 SCL High Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0.0 A

SCL High Limit Time 0.0 s 60.0 s 1.0 s 0 s

SCL Low Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0 A

7.1.1 Gen. Rated Output V 85 V 30,000 V 1 V 120 V

Gen. Rated Output I 10.0 A 60,000 A 0.1 A 200.0 A

Gen. Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 10 Hz 60 Hz

7.2.1 Rated Field Voltage 1.0 V 180.0 V 0.1 V 32.0 V

Rated Field Current 0.1 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A

Pole Ratio 0 10 0.01 0

7.3.1 Gen. Sensing PT Pri. 1 V 30,000 V 1 V 120 V

Gen. Sensing PT Sec. 1 V 600 V 1 V 120 V

Bus Sensing PT Pri. 1 V 500,000 V 1 V 120 V

Bus Sensing PT Sec. 1 V 600 V 1 V 120 V

Gen. CT Pri. 1 A 60,000 A 1 A 200 A

Gen. CT Sec. 1 A 5 A 4 A 5 A

7.4.1 Sensing Configuration 1-phase A-C, 3-phase N/A 1-ph A-C

Auxiliary Input Type Voltage, Current N/A voltage

Cross Current Gain –30.00 30 0.01 0

7.4.2 AVR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1

FCR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1

Var Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1

PF Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1

Inner or Outer Loop Inner, Outer N/A Inner

7.5.1 Relay 1 Contact Sense NC, NO N/A NO

Relay 1 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained

Relay 1 Moment Time 0.10 s 5.00 s 50 ms 0.10 s

Field Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off

Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off

Stator Undervoltage On, Off N/A Off

7.5.2 Stator Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off

Underfrequency On, Off N/A Off

Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off

Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off

FCR Mode On, Off N/A Off



No Voltage Sensing On, Off N/A Off

7.5.3 Setpoint at Low Limit On, Off N/A Off

Setpoint at High Limit On, Off N/A Off

System Below 10 Hz On, Off N/A Off

Open Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off

Shorted Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off


Relay 2 Annunc. Type Momentary Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained






Overexcitation On, Off N/A Off

Underexcitation On, Off N/A Off









Relay 3 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained



Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off




Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off

Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off








7.6.1 AVR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1 s 20 s

FCR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1 s 20 s

Var Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1 s 20 s

PF Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1 s 20 s

7.7.1 AVR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release

FCR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release

Var Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release

PF Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release

7.8.1 Soft Start Level 0% 90% 1% 5%

Soft Start Time 1 s 7,200 s 1 s 5 s

7.9.1 Internal Track rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s



Internal Track Delay 0.0 s 8 s 0.1 s 0.1 s

External Track Rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s

External Track Delay 0.0 s 8 s 01. s 0.1 s

8.1.1 Com0 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps

Com1 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps

Com2 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps

8.1.2 Com2 Address 0 247 1 247

Com2 Delay 0 ms 200 ms 10 ms 10 ms

Parity None, Odd, Even N/A None

Stop Bits 1 2 1 2

8.2 LCD Contrast 40 80 1 60

8.3 Real-Time Clock Setting N/A 1 N/A

Real-Time Clock Date Setting

N/A 1 01-01-01

8.3.1 Time Format 12 hr, 24 hr N/A 12 hr

Daylight Saving Time DS ON, DS OFF N/A DS Off

Date Format d-m-y, m/d/y N/A d-m-y

PASSWORD PROTECTION All editable settings on the front panel are password protected. Passwords can be a maximum of six characters in length and may contain all letters, all numbers, or a mixture of both. Passwords are not case sensitive; the DECS-200 will accept a correct password consisting of uppercase or lowercase letters. There are two levels of access: global and setpoint. Global access grants the user the right to change any editable setting through the front panel. Setpoint access grants the user the right to change a limited number of settings. These settings include the basic operational settings like Start, Stop, AVR/FCR, PF/var, control setpoints and pre-position. For a complete list, refer to Table 2-3. All editable settings on a single menu screen are at the same access level.

Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level Screen Setting

OPERATE_1 (1.1) Start/Stop Control

OPERATE_1 (1.1) AVR/FCR Mode

OPERATE_1 (1.1) PF/Var Mode

OPERATE_1 (1.1) Load Compensation Type

OPERATE_1 (1.1) Pre-Position Enable

OPERATE_2 (1.2) Voltage Matching Enable

OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotracking Enable

OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotransfer Enable

MODE_SET (2.1) AVR Mode Setpoint

MODE_SET (2.1) FCR Mode Setpoint

MODE_SET (2.1) Var Mode Setpoint

MODE_SET (2.1) PF Mode Setpoint

MODE_SET (2.1) Droop Setting

PREP_SET (2.2) AVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position

PREP_SET (2.2) FCR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position

MODE_SET (2.2) Var Mode Setpoint Pre-Position

ADJUST (4.1) 1ST Metering Field Display Quantity

ADJUST (4.1) 2nd Metering Field Display Quantity

ADJUST (4.1) 3rd Metering Field Display Quantity

ADJUST (4.1) Active Setpoint

CONTRAST (8.2) LCD Contrast


DECS-200 units are delivered with the global and setpoint passwords set at decs2. When a password is entered, software first checks for a match between the entered password and the global password. Because the two passwords are the same, global access is always granted. This means that in order to allow setpoint access only, the global and setpoint passwords must be changed so that they are not the same. Passwords may be changed using BESTCOMS software. It is suggested that the user change the passwords in order to provide security against unauthorized parameter changes. Once changed, the passwords should be stored in a secure location.

If the user-defined passwords are lost or forgotten, the default passwords may be restored by simultaneously pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during power-up of the DECS-200. Restoring the passwords to the default values will also change all previously programmed settings to the default values. Before restoring the default passwords (and settings), all DECS-200 settings should be downloaded to a file by using BESTCOMS software. After the default settings are loaded, the user-programmed settings can be uploaded to the DECS-200 from the saved settings file. The user may also reprogram the passwords.

A password is required the first time any DECS-200 setting is changed or when the password access expires (after 10 minutes with no additional entries). If a user with settings access attempts to begin an edit session on a screen requiring global access, the settings access is revoked and the user is prompted to enter a password to gain global access.

METERING SCREEN Information displayed by the metering screen is grouped into five field types: metering, setpoint, percent of range, mode message, and alarm annunciation.

Metering Fields

Three user-programmable fields display up to three different metering quantities at a given time. Table 2-4 lists the metering quantities that may be selected.

Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities Metering Labels Metering Quantities

Va-b Generator A-B (L-L) rms voltage

Vb-c Generator B-C (L-L) rms voltage

Vc-a Generator C-A (L-L) rms voltage

Vavg Average of three generator L-L voltages

Line I Generator line current

VA Generator load VA

Watts Generator load watts

Var Generator load var

PF Generator load power factor

Gen Hz Generator frequency

Bus Hz Bus frequency

Bus V Bus rms L-L voltage

Fld V Field voltage

Fld I Field current

V Aux Voltage proportional to auxiliary input

EDM OD Open exciter diode ripple

EDM SD Shorted exciter diode ripple

CAUTION

Pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during DECS-200 power-up will cause all user-programmed settings to be replaced with the default settings.


The values in all three metering fields are automatically scaled by an autoranging function to display up to four digits of resolution, a decimal point, and if needed, a multiplier such as k for 1,000 or M for 1,000,000. For negative values with magnitudes greater than 999.9, only three digits of resolution are displayed.

Setpoint Field

The setpoint field displays the setpoint for the present mode of operation. Table 2-5 lists the relationship between the operating mode and the setpoint field quantity.

Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode

Operating Mode Setpoint Field Quantity Mode Message

Off Setpoint from last mode UNIT IS OFF

Voltage Matching AVR setpoint VOLTAGE MATCHING

FCR (Manual) FCR setpoint FCR (MANUAL)

AVR (Auto) AVR setpoint AVR (AUTO)

Droop AVR setpoint DROOP

Var Control Var setpoint VAR CONTROL

PF Control PF setpoint POWER FACTOR CONTROL

Percent-of-Range Field

The percent-of-range field displays the setpoint expressed as a percentage of the available adjustment range. This relationship is linear. For example, a setpoint that is midway between minimum and maximum would be displayed as 50.0%. A setpoint that is at the maximum limit would be displayed as 100%.

Mode Message Field

The bottom of the metering screen contains the mode message field which displays a message indicating the DECS-200’s current mode of operation.

Alarm Annunciation Field

The alarm annunciation field, located directly below the metering fields, remains blank during normal operating conditions. When an alarm condition occurs, the message “ALARMS (PRESS < OR >) appears in the alarm annunciation field. The message appears as an inverse display—light colored characters appear on a dark background. See Alarm Message Screen for information about how to identify which alarm condition was annunciated.

Alarm Message Screen

From the metering screen, pressing either the Left or Right scrolling pushbutton will cause the alarm message screen to appear. This screen displays up to six messages identifying the conditions that led to the most recent annunciations. Table 2-6 lists the messages that may appear as annunciations on the alarm message screen. When more than one message is listed, the newest annunciations are appended to the bottom of the list. Once the list contains six messages, any further annunciations will cause the oldest messages to be deleted from the top of the list.

Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages

Annunciation Message Duration of Message

FIELD OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset

FIELD OVERCURRENT Maintained until reset

GEN. UNDERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset

GEN. OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset

UNDERFREQUENCY Clears 2 s after end of event

OVEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event

UNDEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event


Annunciation Message Duration of Message

LOST VOLTAGE SENSING Maintained until reset

FAILED TO BUILD UP Clears 2 s after end of event

SYSTEM BELOW 10 HZ Maintained until reset

EXCITER DIODE OPEN Maintained until reset

EXCITER DIODE SHORT Maintained until reset

Once the list of annunciation messages has been viewed, it may be cleared by pressing the Reset pushbutton. If a condition that LED to an annunciation is still present when the alarm message screen is cleared, then a new annunciation message will be generated.

Pressing the Reset pushbutton will also send the display back to the Metering screen. Furthermore, the alarms message on the Metering screen will also be cleared. However, if the user leaves the alarm message screen by pressing the Left, Right or Up scrolling pushbuttons, then the annunciation messages list remains intact. This allows the user to maintain a short history of annunciations. In addition, the alarms message on the Metering screen will also remain. The disadvantage of this is that the metering screen would no longer indicate that a new annunciation occurred because the alarms message would always be present.

Screens with Special Editing Modes

There are several screens that operate differently while in the edit mode. OPERATE_1 (1.1), BAUD_RATE (8.1.1), and MODBUS (8.1.2) are examples of such screens. In each case, any changes made to a setting are not used by the system (nor saved in nonvolatile memory) until the Edit pushbutton is pressed again. The programmable inputs for output relays 1 through 4 work in the same manner. These are on screens RELAY_1 (7.5.1) through RELAY_3B (7.5.9).

The REG_GAIN (3.1) screen also operates in a different manner when in the Edit mode. The first four parameters on this screen represent a table containing twenty sets of predefined PID values and one set of user-definable values. The first of these, STAB SET #, which means stability settings number, is the index to the table. The second, third, and fourth parameters (AVR/FCR Kp, Ki, and Kd), are the actual entries in the table. Stability setting numbers 1 to 20 are the predefined values, and 21 is the set of user-definable values.

Editing these parameters works as follows: As long as STAB SET # is set to 21, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki, and Kd may be individually edited and customized. The values displayed are not used by the system until they are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton. This means that if a change is aborted by pressing the Reset pushbutton, the PID numbers currently being used by the system remain unchanged.

If STAB SET # is 1 to 20, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki and Kd may not be edited from the display (although the cursor can be moved to their display fields). If the STAB SET # is changed, the values shown in the display fields will not change until the selected STAB SET # is saved. When the STAB SET # is saved, the table entries are saved, used by the system and displayed on the LCD.

If the DECS-200 is using the user-defined values previously set at STAB SET # 21 and a STAB SET # of 1 to 20 is saved, the user-defined values are lost. The next time that user-defined values for STAB SET # 21 are required, they must be manually entered and then saved. It is assumed that the table entries for STAB SET # 1 to 20 will be used as starting points from which users will arrive at their own customized values after the selected starting point has been saved (and thus copied into STAB SET # 21).

Menu Tree

The menu tree has eight branches:

1. OPERATING. Displays mode status and on or off status (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)

2. SETPOINTS. Display and setting of mode values (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)

3. LOOP GAINS. Loop gains for each element are set here (Kp, Ki, Kd, Kg)

4. METERING. Real-time metering of user-selected values and alarm messages.

5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function parameters such as pickups.

6. LIMITERS. Display and setting of system limiters (OEL, UEL, etc.)


7. SYSTEM PARAMETERS. Display and setting of system parameters. This menu item consists of nine sub-branches:

• Generator Data • Field Data • Transformers • Configuration • Output Contacts • Traverse Rates • Pre-position Modes • Startup • Tracking

8. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of communication setting parameters and LCD contrast.

Figures 2-2 through 2-11 illustrate all branches in the menu tree. In Figures 2-2 through 2-11, the upper left corner of each screen displays a one, two or three digit number with decimal points between each digit. These numbers are reference numbers to the screens in the menu tree. A letter at the upper right corner (G, S, and N) indicates the security access level (global, setpoint and not applicable) required to edit that screen.

Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch


Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch


Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch


Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch


Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch


Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch


Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3)


Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch


FRONT PANEL OPERATION The following paragraphs describe the settings and adjustments that are available via the DECS-200 front panel. They are grouped into eight main categories which include: operating modes, setpoints, loop gains, metering, protection, limiters, system parameters, and general settings.

Front panel settings and adjustments are listed and described in the following paragraphs. Settings are organized by category and by screen.

Operating Modes

Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_1 (1.1)

START/STOP - starts and stops the regulator

AVR OR FCR - selects the regulator mode: AVR for automatic voltage regulator, FCR for field current regulator (also known as MANUAL mode)

PF OR var - selects the controller mode: OFF for none, var for var control, PF for power factor control

LOAD COMP - selects the load compensation type: OFF for none, DROOP for voltage droop.

PRE-POSITION - enables/disables the pre-position function: OFF to disable, ON to enable

Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_2 (1.2)

VOLT MATCH - turns the voltage matching function on and off (Internal tracking between modes)

INT TRACK - turns the internal tracking function on and off

EXT TRACK - turns the external tracking function on and off

UF OR V/HZ - selects either underfrequency or volts-per-hertz limiting

Setpoints

Screen: \SETPT\MODE_SET (2.1)

AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulation setpoint in actual generator voltage

FCR MODE - the field current regulation setpoint in Amps

DROOP - the amount of voltage droop as a % of rated generator voltage when the kvar load numerically equals the rated kW

Var MODE - the var controller regulation setpoint in var

PF MODE - the power factor controller regulation setpoint

Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_1 (2.1.1)

FINE V BD - the adjustable voltage band (var volt band) around the generator's output voltage as a % of rated generator voltage when var/PF mode is active

AVR MIN - the minimum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage

AVR MAX - the maximum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage

FCR MIN - the minimum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current

FCR MAX - the maximum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current

Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_2 (2.1.2)

MIN var OUT - the minimum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kW (negative for absorbing)

MAX var OUT - the maximum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kW (negative for absorbing)

MAX LAG PF - maximum lagging power factor setpoint

MAX LEAD PF - maximum leading power factor setpoint

V MATCH BD - the adjustable voltage band allows the voltage matching function to activate if the bus voltage is within this band. This setting is a numerical % of rated generator voltage(Gen to Bus

V MATCH REF - (Gen to Bus PT Match Level) the bus voltage setpoint for the voltage matching function as a numerical % of bus voltage


Screen: \SETPT\PREP_SET (2.2)

The present control mode operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value when the unit receives a pre-position command.

AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator setpoint pre-position value

FCR MODE - the field current regulator setpoint pre-position value

Var MODE - the var controller setpoint pre-position value

PF MODE - the power factor setpoint pre-position value

Loop Gains

Screen: \GAIN\REG_GAIN1 (3.1)

STAB RANGE - the index into the internally defined PID table. Table 2-7 lists the automatic pre-defined stability gain settings for the exciter field and the 20 stability settings.

AVR/FCR Kp - proportional gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop

AVR/FCR Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop

AVR/FCR Kd - derivative gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop

AVR/FCR Td - derivative time constant used in AVR/FCR loop

Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index

Excitation Mode Setting

Generator Open Circuit Time

Constant (T’do)

Generator Exciter Time

Constant (Texc) Kp Ki Kd

1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.20 4.433

2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.00 8.750

3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.90 13.670

4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.80 18.960

5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.80 24.500

6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.40 30.220

7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.10 36.060

8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.80 42.000

9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.90 48.010

10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.70 54.080

11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.60 60.200

12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.50 66.350

13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.60 72.540

14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.90 78.750

15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.40 84.980

16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.10 91.230

17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.90 97.500

18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.10 103.800

19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.40 110.100

Exc

iter

Fie

ld

20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.80 116.400

Screen: \GAIN\REG GAIN2 (3.2)

AVR Kg - loop gain used in AVR mode

FCR Kg - loop gain used in FCR mode


Screen: \GAIN\LIM_GAINS (3.3)

OEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the overexcitation limiter loop

OEL Kg - loop gain used in the overexcitation limiter

UEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the underexcitation limiter loop

UEL Kg - loop gain used in the underexcitation limiter

SCL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the stator current limiter

SCL Kg - loop gain used in the stator current limiter

Controller Gains

Screen: \GAIN\CTL_GAINS (3.4)

PF Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the power factor controller

PF Kg - loop gain used for the power factor controller

Var Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the var controller

Var Kg - loop gain used for the var controller

V MATCH Kg - loop gain used for the voltage matching function

Metering

Screen: \METER\ADJUST (4.1)

1st metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities

2nd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities

3rd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities

SETPT - the present control mode operating setpoint

Screen: \METER\ALARM_MSG (4.2)

Reset Button - clears any displayed alarm messages (and returns to the ADJUST metering screen).

Protection

Screen: \PROT\UNDERFREQ (5.1)

CORNR FREQ - the corner frequency for the underfrequency curve

UF SLOPE - the slope of the underfrequency curve

Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENABL1 (5.2)

FIELD OV - field overvoltage detection enable

FIELD OC - field overcurrent detection enable

STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage detection enable

STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage detection enable

NO SENSING – loss of voltage sensing detection enable

NO SNS→FCR – transfer to FCR mode enable (when a loss of voltage sensing is detected). Loss of voltage sensing detection must also be enabled for this feature to work.

Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENAB2 (5.3)

EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode detection enable

EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode detection enable

LOSS FIELD - enables and disables loss of field protection

Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL (5.4)

FIELD OV - field overvoltage threshold

FIELD OC - field overcurrent base value (100%)

STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage threshold

STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage threshold


EDM OD RIPL - open exciter diode ripple threshold

EDM SD RIPL - shorted exciter diode ripple threshold

Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL2 (5.5)

EDM INH LVL - exciter diode detection inhibit level

LOS BAL V - loss of balanced sensing voltage threshold

LOS IMBAL V - loss of unbalanced sensing voltage threshold

LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay

Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMER (5.6)

FIELD OV - field overvoltage time delay

FIELD OC TD - field overcurrent time dial multiplier

STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage time delay

STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage time delay

NO SENSING - lost sensing voltage time delay

EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode time delay

Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMR2 (5.7)

EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode time delay

LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay

Limiters

Screen: LIMITERS (6.0)

ENABLED - selects which limiters are enabled: NONE, UEL, OEL, OEL/UEL, SCL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL, or SCL/OEL/UEL

Screen: \LIMIT\OPTION (6.1)

On-line overexcitation limiter style and options.

OEL STYLE - selects Summing Point or Takeover style overexcitation limiter

OEL OPTION - selects on-line and off-line overexcitation limiter control options:

Option 1: On-line OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are open. Off-line OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are closed.

Option 2: On-line OEL settings are active when the 52 J/K contact is open. Off-line OEL settings are active when the 52 J/K contact is open.

Option 3: On-line OEL settings are active at all times.

Screen: \LIMIT\ONLINE (6.2)

On-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.

INST LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit threshold

INST TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit time delay

MED LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current threshold

MED TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current time delay

CONT LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter continuous (low) current threshold

Screen \LIMIT\OFFLINE (6.3)

Off-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.

OEL HI LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter high current threshold

HI LIM TIME - off-line overexcitation limiter high current time delay

OEL LO LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter low current threshold


Screen \LIMIT\OFFTAKOVR (6.4)

Off-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.

OEL MAX CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold

OEL MIN CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold

OEL TD - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay

Screen \LIMIT\ONTAKOVR (6.5)

On-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.

OEL MAX CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold

OEL MIN CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold

OEL TD - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay

Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_X (6.6)

Underexcitation limiter real-power curve points.

PNT 1 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 1





Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_Y (6.7)

Underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve points.

PNT 1 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 1





Screen \LIMIT\SCLIM (6.8)

Stator current limiter settings.

SCL HI LIM - stator current limiter high current setpoint

HI LIM TIME - stator current limiter time delay

SCL LO LIM - stator current limiter low current setpoint

System Parameters

Screen: \GEN\GEN_DATA (7.1.1)

RATED VOLT - generator rated output voltage

RATED CURR - generator rated output current

FREQUENCY - generator rated frequency

Screen: \EXCTR\EXCTR_DATA (7.2.1)

FIELD VOLT - rated field voltage

FIELD CURR - rated field current

POLE RATIO - ratio between exciter poles to the number of generator poles

Screen: \XFMRS\XFMR_DATA (7.3.1)

GEN PT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary voltage rating

GEN PT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary voltage rating

BUS PT PRI - bus sensing transformer primary voltage rating

BUS PT SEC - bus sensing transformer secondary voltage rating


GEN CT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary current rating

GEN CT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary current rating

Screen: \CONFG\CNFG_DATA (7.4.1)

SENSING - sensing configuration: single-phase or three-phase

AUX IN TYPE - selects the auxiliary input type as voltage or current

CRSS I GAIN - cross current compensation input gain

Screen: \CNFG AUX Gains (7.4.2)

The auxiliary input allows an analog signal to be externally applied to the DECS-200 to modify the operating setpoint. The amount of change that may be induced is proportional to the magnitude of the signal and the input gain.

AVR MODE – auxiliary input gain in AVR mode

FCR MODE – auxiliary input gain in FCR mode

Var MODE – auxiliary input gain in var mode

PR MODE – auxiliary input gain in PF mode

INNER/OUTER – control loop summing point location where the auxiliary input signal is to be injected. For AVR or FCR mode, select INNER. For var or PF mode, select outer. Once selected, the injection point remains fixed across all modes of operation.

Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1 (7.5.1)

There are three types of relay annunciation: momentary, maintained and latched. A relay that is programmed for momentary annunciation will do so for a (programmable) time interval and then cease. The momentary annunciation for an existing condition will not repeat. A relay that is programmed for maintained annunciation will do so for the duration of the condition that is being annunciated. A relay programmed for a latched annunciation will continue to annunciate the condition until an alarm reset command is given through the front panel, BESTCOMS software (via the front RS-232 port) or Modbus(via the rear RS-485 port).

OUTPUT SENSE - relay 1 contact normal state: NO for normally open, NC for normally closed

OUTPUT TYPE - type of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained, LATCHED for latched

MOMENT TIME - the duration of a momentary annunciation

FIELD O/V - assignment of field overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1

FIELD O/C - assignment of field overcurrent annunciation to output relay 1

STATOR U/V - assignment of stator undervoltage annunciation to output relay 1

Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1A (7.5.2)

STATOR O/V - assignment of stator overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1

UNDER FREQ - assignment of underfrequency annunciation to output relay 1

IN OEL - assignment of overexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1

IN UEL - assignment of underexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1

IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 1

NO V SENSE - assignment of lost voltage sensing annunciation to output relay 1

Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1B (7.5.3)

AT LO LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at low limit annunciation to output relay 1

AT HI LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at high limit annunciation to output relay 1

BELOW 10 HZ - assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 1

EXC DIOD OD - assignment of open exciter diode to output relay 1

EXC DIOD SD - assignment of shorted exciter diode to output relay 1

LOSS FIELD - enables and disables annunciation of loss of field protection


Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1C (7.5.4)

IN SCL - enables and disables stator current limiting annunciation



OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained, LATCHED for latched










IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (manual) annunciation to output relay 2





BELOW 10 HZ – assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 2







OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained, LATCHED for latched










IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 3





BELOW 10 HZ – assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 3






Screen: \TRVRS\TRVRS_RATE (7.6.1)

The traverse rate is the time required to adjust the present control mode setpoint from one extreme of the programmed adjustment range to the other extreme.

AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator mode traverse rate

FCR MODE - the field current regulator mode traverse rate

Var MODE - the var control mode traverse rate

PF MODE - the power factor control mode traverse rate

Screen: \PMODE\PREP_MODE (7.7.1)

The pre-position mode for the present control mode determines whether or not the unit will respond to further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If the pre-position mode is set for MAINTAIN, then further setpoint change commands are ignored. If the pre-position mode is set for RELEASE, then subsequent setpoint change commands are followed.

AVR MODE - automatic voltage regulator pre-position mode

FCR MODE - field current regulator pre-position mode

Var MODE - var controller pre-position mode

PF MODE - power factor controller pre-position mode

Screen: \START\START_UP (7.8.1)

SS LEVEL - soft start level

SS TIME - soft start time

Screen: \TRACK\TRACK_DATA (7.9.1)

Internal tracking (autotracking) and external tracking (auto-transfer)

INT RATE - the traverse rate of internal tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints

INT DELAY - the time delay before internal tracking begins after it is turned on

EXT RATE - the traverse rate of external tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints

EXT DELAY - the time delay before external tracking begins after it is turned on

General Settings

Screen: \COMMS\BAUD_RATE (8.1.1)

COM0 RS232 - the front panel RS232 communications port baud rate

COM1 RS232 - the rear panel RS232 autotracking communications port baud rate

COM2 RS485 - the rear panel RS485 Modbus communications port baud rate

Screen: \COMMS\MODBUS (8.1.2)

Settings for the rear panel RS485 Modbus communications port

COM2 ADDR - device address

COM2 DELAY - response delay time

PARITY - parity: NONE, ODD, or EVEN

STOP BITS - number of stop bits: 1 or 2

Screen: \SETUP\CONTRAST (8.2)

Front panel LCD contrast setting


Screen: \D200\SETUP\CLOCK (8.3)

TIME - displays and sets the current time

DATE - displays and sets the current date

Screen: \RTC\CLK_FORMAT (8.3.1)

TIME FORMAT - selects the format for displaying time on Screen 8.3

DST FORMAT - selects the DECS-200 RTC for day light savings time

DATE FORMAT - selects the format for displaying the date on Screen 8.3

DECS-200 Functional Description i

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................3-1INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................3-1FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................................................................3-1

Contact Input Circuits .........................................................................................................................3-2Start.................................................................................................................................................3-2Stop .................................................................................................................................................3-2AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation)..............................................................................................3-2FCR (Field Current Regulation) ......................................................................................................3-2Raise ...............................................................................................................................................3-2Lower...............................................................................................................................................3-2PRE-P (Pre-Position) ......................................................................................................................3-252L/M (Unit/Parallel) .......................................................................................................................3-252J/K (Var/Power Factor Enable) ...................................................................................................3-3SECEN (Secondary Enable)...........................................................................................................3-3ALRST (Alarm Reset) .....................................................................................................................3-3

Analog Inputs......................................................................................................................................3-3Generator Voltage Sensing Ranges ............................................................................................... 3-3Generator Voltage (VCA) ..................................................................................................................3-3Generator Voltage (VAB)...................................................................................................................3-4Bus Voltage (BUS VCA) ....................................................................................................................3-4Phase B Line Current......................................................................................................................3-4Cross-Current Loop Input................................................................................................................3-4Accessory Input (Remote Setpoint Control)....................................................................................3-4Field Current and Field Voltage ......................................................................................................3-4

Operating Power.................................................................................................................................3-4Control Power .....................................................................................................................................3-4Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) .....................................................................................................3-5Microprocessor ...................................................................................................................................3-5Digital Signal Processor (DSP)...........................................................................................................3-5Operational Settings ...........................................................................................................................3-5Watchdog Timer .................................................................................................................................3-5Real-Time Clock .................................................................................................................................3-5Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output ..............................................................................................3-5Relay Output Circuits..........................................................................................................................3-5

Programmable Outputs ...................................................................................................................3-5Watchdog Output ............................................................................................................................3-6On/Off Output..................................................................................................................................3-6

Communication...................................................................................................................................3-6Memory Circuits..................................................................................................................................3-6Protection Functions ...........................................................................................................................3-7

Field Overvoltage ............................................................................................................................3-7Field Overcurrent ............................................................................................................................3-7Generator Overvoltage....................................................................................................................3-8Loss of Sensing...............................................................................................................................3-8Below 10 Hertz................................................................................................................................3-8Loss of Field....................................................................................................................................3-8Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) ..........................................................................................................3-8Exciter Diode Monitor Settings........................................................................................................3-9

SOFT START .........................................................................................................................................3-9LIMITER FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................................................3-10

Underfrequency Limiter ....................................................................................................................3-10Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter.............................................................................................................3-11Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ............................................................................................................3-11

Summing Point OEL......................................................................................................................3-11Takeover OEL ...............................................................................................................................3-12On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options......................................................................................................3-12

ii Functional Description DECS-200

Underexcitation Limiter .....................................................................................................................3-13Stator Current Limiting......................................................................................................................3-13

DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION.....................................................................................3-14DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING...................................................................................................3-14

Sequence of Events Reporting .........................................................................................................3-14System Contact Input State Changes...........................................................................................3-14System Output State Changes......................................................................................................3-14System Alarm State Changes.......................................................................................................3-14Changes in State of System Status ..............................................................................................3-14

Oscillography ....................................................................................................................................3-15Internal Variables ..........................................................................................................................3-15

Figures Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram.........................................................................................................3-1Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves ............................................................................................3-7Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference.................................................................................................3-10Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency Compensation Curve .....................................................................3-10Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve......................................................................................3-11Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting ............................................................................................3-11Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting ............................................................................................3-11Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL............................................................3-12Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve ......................................................................................................3-13Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting.........................................................................................................3-13Figure 3-11. Data Record Example .........................................................................................................3-16

Tables Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings) ......................................................3-3

DECS-200 Functional Description 3-1

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTIONThis section illustrates and describes the functional capabilities of the DECS-200.

FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS The function blocks of the DECS-200 are illustrated in Figure 3-1 and described in the following paragraphs.

CONTACTINPUT

CIRCUITS

POWERSUPPLY

VAC

VDC

+5

+12

-12

+24

DIGITALSIGNAL

PROCESSOR

MICROPROCESSOR

FRONTPANELLEDS

FRONTPANEL

KEYPAD

FRONTPANEL

LCD

ANALOGINPUT

CIRCUITS

BUS VCA

GEN VCA

GEN VAB

LINE IB

LINE IA/C

ACC V/I

ADC

RAM EEPROM

WATCH-DOGTIMER

ZCDZCD

COM0RS-232PORT

COM1RS-232PORT

COM2RS-485PORT

P0003-19.vsd03-09-01

FLASHMEMORY

RELAYOUTPUT

CONTACTS

ALRST

LOWER

RAISE

PRE-P

FCR

AUTO

CHOPPER(PWM)

52J/K

POWERINPUT

F+

F-

WTCHD

ON/OF

RLY3

RLY2

RLY1

START

52L/M

SECEN

STOP

Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram

3-2 Functional Description DECS-200

Contact Input Circuits

Eleven contact input circuits, powered by isolated 12 Vdc, provide operational input control for the DECS-200. If the start and stop inputs should become active at the same time, the stop input has priority. If the AVR and FCR inputs should become active at the same time, the FCR input has priority. Each of the eleven inputs, their functions, and types of input required are defined in the following paragraphs.

Start

This input accepts a momentary contact closure and enables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is enabled, this input has no effect.

Stop

This input accepts a momentary contact closure and disables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is disabled, this input has no effect. The Stop input also take precedence over the Start input.

AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation)

This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in AVR mode. Once the DECS-200 is in AVR mode, this input has no effect.

FCR (Field Current Regulation)

This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in FCR mode. Once the unit is in FCR mode, this input has no effect. The FCR input takes precedence over the AVR input.

Raise

This input increases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed. The raise increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate. The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.

Lower

This input decreases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed. The lower increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate. The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.

PRE-P (Pre-Position)

This input accepts a continuous contact closure that causes all setpoints to be changed to the pre-position (predefined) value. If the active pre-position mode is Maintain, then the pre-position input will override the raise and lower inputs to maintain the setpoint at the pre-position value while the contact is closed. If the active pre-position mode is Release, then the pre-position input will change the setpoint to the pre-position value and respond to raise and lower inputs.

If the non-active pre-position mode is Maintain and internal tracking is enabled, the non-active mode will maintain the non-active setpoint at the pre-position value and override the tracking function. If the non-active pre-position is Release and internal tracking is enabled, then the pre-position input will change the setpoint to the pre-position value and respond to the tracking function.

Typically, this input is connected to a 52b auxiliary contact on the generator breaker. When the generator breaker opens, all setpoints are forced to the pre-position settings. This is especially helpful if FCR mode is active and the generator is under a load. Utilizing a 52b contact will force the FCR setpoint to its pre-position setting which could be preset to the generator’s no-load, nominal voltage.

52L/M (Unit/Parallel)

This input informs the DECS-200 that the system is operating in single-unit operation or paralleled to another generator or power grid in droop mode. It also switches between which overexcitation limiter (off-line limiter or on-line limiter) is activated when excitation levels exceed the OEL settings. This input is typically connected to a 52b auxiliary contact of the generator breaker and requires a continuous contact closure to switch modes. Refer to the 52J/K (Var/PF Enable) paragraph for more information.

If both the 52L/M and 52J/K contact inputs are closed, AVR mode is active while the off-line overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for stand-alone (single unit) generator operation.

If the 52L/M contact input is open and 52J/K contact input is closed, droop mode is active while the on-line overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for


two or more generators paralleled together on an isolated bus (islanded) or paralleled directly to the utility grid. Cross-current compensation (CCC) can also be utilized in this contact configuration. However, this mode (CCC) is not intended for paralleling to the utility grid.

If both 52L/M is open and 52J/K are open, var/power factor mode is active while the on-line overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for applications requiring var or power factor regulation when paralleled to the utility grid.

Table 3-1 describes 52 L/M and 52 J/K contact functionality for default OEL option 1. OEL options 2 and 3 are discussed in Overexcitation Limiter, On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options.

Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings)

DECS-200 Operating Mode 52L/M 52J/K Generator Operating Mode

AVR mode active, off-line OEL enabled, no droop, no var/PF

Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone

Droop mode active, on-line OEL enabled, no var/PF

Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or two or more generators islanded (droop or cross-current comp.)

Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL enabled

Open Open Paralleled to utility grid

52J/K (Var/Power Factor Enable)

This input accepts a continuous contact closure that disables var/power factor operation. An open contact enables the DECS-200 to control the generator reactive power in either the var or power factor modes. These functions must be enabled via HMI, BESTCOMS or Modbusã before use. For more information, refer to the 52L/M (Unit/Parallel) paragraphs. If neither var nor power factor mode is desired, it is recommended that a jumper wire be placed across the 52J/K and common terminals, and switch the 52L/M input with the generator breaker auxiliary contact (52b).

SECEN (Secondary Enable)

This input accepts a continuous contact closure and enables the DECS-200 unit as the secondary unit to another excitation control system.

ALRST (Alarm Reset)

This input accepts a momentary contact closure to clear all latched relay annunciations and front panel alarm messages.

Analog Inputs

The following analog inputs are used to sense the following quantities:

• Generator voltage (three-phase/single-phase) • Bus voltage (single-phase) • Phase B (line) current • Cross current loop input • Accessory input (remote setpoint control) • Field voltage (internal) • Field current (internal)

Generator Voltage Sensing Ranges

The ac voltage sensing range of the DECS-200 is split into four operating ranges: 120 volts nominal, 240 volts nominal, 480 volts nominal, and 600 volts nominal. The range selection is the same for generator and bus voltages and is based on the secondary VT voltage for the generator voltage sensing. The 120 volt range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 85 and 153 Vac. The 240 volts range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 170 and 300 Vac. The 480 volt range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 340 and 528 Vac. The 600 volt range is selected if the generator VT voltage is between 540 and 690 Vac.

Generator Voltage (VCA)

The GEN VCA input senses the generator voltage across phases A and C. This voltage is used to estimate the generator rms voltage and frequency.


Generator Voltage (VAB)

The GEN VAB input senses the generator voltage across phases A and B and is used to estimate the generator rms voltage. This voltage is used with the VCA voltage to estimate the bus rms voltage and frequency. This input is not internally isolated.

Bus Voltage (BUS VCA)

The BUS VCA input senses the bus voltage across phases A and C. This voltage is used to estimate the bus rms voltage and frequency. The BUS VCA input is not internally isolated.

Phase B Line Current

This internally isolated input is developed from a current transformer (CT) and used to calculate the B-phase generator line current.

Cross-Current Loop Input

This input is developed from a current transformer (CT) connected to phase B of a generator and used when generators are operating in cross-current compensation mode.

Accessory Input (Remote Setpoint Control)

This internally isolated input may be either an analog voltage (–10 to +10 Vdc) or current (4 to 20 milliamperes). Separate terminals provide convenient terminations but only one input may be used in any application. This input is typically supplied by a power system stabilizer or similar device.

The accessory voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. This input may be in the range of –10 to +10 Vdc or 4 to 20 milliamperes. The input signal is named a voltage signal even though one input mode may be 4 to 20 milliamperes. When the current input mode is selected, the input current (4 to 20 milliamperes) is converted by the DECS-200 to –5 to +5 Vdc voltage signal. The following equation is used when converting current signals to voltage signals.

( )12625.0 −= IVAUX

Where: VAUX is the voltage signal I is the current in milliamperes

The accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the accessory gain setting. The gain setting is in the range of –99 to +99. If the gain is set to zero, the accessory voltage input signal is made inactive. The accessory voltage input can be active in all four operating modes.

In AVR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the voltage gain setting which defines the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated generator voltage.

In FCR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the current gain setting which defines the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated field current.

In var mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the var gain setting which defines the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated apparent power of the generator.

In power factor mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the power factor gain setting and divided by 100 which defines the power factor setpoint change.

Field Current and Field Voltage

These signals are sensed internally. The field voltage signal is used for field overvoltage protection. The field current signal is used for: off-line and on-line overexcitation limiting, auto-tracking, and field over-current protection.

Operating Power

The DECS-200 operating power input accepts three-phase or single-phase voltage over the range of 50 to 277 Vac (depending on the nominal field voltage) at 50 to 500 hertz. The input is rectified and filtered by the input’s low-pass filter, which feeds the chopper stage. Depending on the operating power applied, three nominal output voltages are possible: 32, 63, or 125 Vdc.

Control Power

Control power may be either of two types:. nominal 24/48 Vdc or nominal 120 Vac/125 Vdc. For the 120 Vac/125 Vdc control power type, both ac and dc input power voltage may be applied for redundant power supply operation. Refer to Section 1, General Information, Specifications, for voltage ranges. The power


supply provides +5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc, and +24 Vdc for the DECS-200 internal circuitry. When dual power sources are used, an isolation transformer is required for the ac input.

Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

All analog input signals are brought to the input of the 12-bit ADC. Each input signal is sampled at a rate that is controlled by the digital signal processor (DSP).

Microprocessor

The microprocessor is the heart of the DECS-200 and performs control, computation, self testing, and communication functions. The main processor (labeled microprocessor in Figure 3-1) generally performs low speed tasks such as protective functions, frequency measurements, communication, watchdog alarm, and other system functions. The microprocessor generates the PWM (pulse width modulated) control signal needed for chopper control and monitors its status.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

The DSP supports measurement, control (output and converters), metering functions and filtering. It controls both the ADC and the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). All eight analog input signals from the ADC are filtered by the finite impulse response (FIR) filters. AC signals are also filtered by the infinite impulse response (IIR) filters and dc signals (field voltage and current) are filtered by averaging filters. The DSP provides the microprocessor with the signal defining the chopper duty cycle/PWM control.

Operational Settings

Operational settings that affect the system are stored in nonvolatile memory. These settings may be changed through BESTCOMS or the front panel interface. Password access is required to change settings. Settings may be viewed without obtaining password access.

Watchdog Timer

If the microprocessor fails for any reason, output pulses to the watchdog timer stop and, after a brief interval, the watchdog timer takes the system off line and closes the watchdog output contacts.

Real-Time Clock

The real-time clock is used by the event and data logging functions to timestamp events. Time can be displayed in either 12- or 24-hour formats and can be selected to allow for daylight saving time. Two date formats are available: d-m-y or m/d/y. All formats may be selected either through the front panel HMI or BESTCOMS. Any cycling of power to the DECS-200 will reset the clock.

Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output

The pulse-width modulated signal provided by the microprocessor controls the field voltage by modulating the duty cycle of the chopper (power module).

Relay Output Circuits

There are five output relays. These relay outputs are controlled by the microprocessor and sustain seven amperes at 240 Vac. Each output relay has 300 volt surge protectors across the contacts to protect against arcing from inductive loads. Relay outputs one through three are fully programmable via all interfaces. Two output relays (one form A and one form B) have predetermined functions. All output relays are described in the following paragraphs.

Programmable Outputs

Output relays RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 may be programmed using the front panel HMI, BESTCOMS software (using the front RS-232 port (COM0)) or through the Modbus™ protocol (using the left RS-485 port (COM2)).

The three output relays labeled RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 have the following programmable features.

• Selection of contact functionality (normally open or normally closed) • Selection of output type (momentary, maintained for as long as the condition is present, or latched

until reset) • Program duration of momentary annunciation (from 0.1 to 5 seconds in 50 millisecond steps) • Selection of conditions to be annunciated, including:


o Field overvoltage o Field overcurrent o Generator undervoltage o Generator overvoltage o Volts per hertz or underfrequency limit o Overexcitation limit o Underexcitation limit o FCR mode o Loss of sensing (LOS) voltage o Active setpoint at low limit o Active setpoint at high limit o Generator frequency below 10 hertz o Open exciter diode o Shorted exciter diode o Loss of field o Stator current limit

Watchdog Output

The Watchdog (WTCHD) output indicates a software execution problem within the DECS-200. The contact closes under the following circumstances:

• No control power is applied to the DECS-200 • After application of power for approximately eight seconds • Software in the DECS-200 stops executing normally

On/Off Output

The On/Off (ON/OF) output indicates the enabled/disabled status of the DECS-200. the On/Off output closes when the DECS-200 is enabled and opens when the DECS-200 is disabled.

Communication

The RS-232 port (Com 0), located on the front panel, is dedicated for communication with a PC running BESTCOMS software.

The RS-232 port (Com 1), located on the right side of the unit, is dedicated for communication with a second DECS-200. This port provides tracking between units in a redundant DECS-200 system.

The RS-485 Port (Com 2), located on the left side of the unit, is dedicated for communication in remote terminal unit (RTU) mode using the Modbusã protocol.

All three ports have a default baud rate of 9600. However, the baud rate for each port can be set independently. Available baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Ports Com ) and Com 1 use a data format of 8N1 which stands for 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Port Com 2 has a default data format of 8N2 but the parity and number of stop bits are programmable. The choices for parity include: None, Odd, and Even. The number of stop bits may be either 1 or 2.

Memory Circuits

There are three types of memory circuits: flash memory, random access memory (RAM) and electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Flash memory is nonvolatile and stores the

NOTE

If the contacts of a programmable output relay are configured as normally closed, the normally closed contact state is maintained only while the DECS-200 has control power applied. When power is removed from the DECS-200, these contacts will open.

NOTE

Changing the baud rate or data format while that interface is in use will result in a loss of data and probably a complete loss of communication.


operating software. RAM is volatile and serves as temporary storage for data. EEPROM is nonvolatile and stores the settings and configuration.

Protection Functions

Eight protection functions are available in the DECS-200:

• Field overvoltage • Field overcurrent • Generator undervoltage • Generator overvoltage

• Loss of sensing • Generator frequency below 10 hertz • Loss of field • Exciter diode monitor

Each protection function can be indicated locally on the front panel display, remotely through communication port Com 0 or Com 2, and any of the three programmable output relays.

Field Overvoltage

When the field voltage increases above the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of the Field Overvoltage Delay setting, a field overvoltage condition is annunciated. A field overvoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting is adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1 Vdc increments. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Delay setting is adjustable from 0.2 to 30.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the field overvoltage timer is timing down and the field voltage drops below the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting, the field overvoltage timer is reset. The field overvoltage function may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.

Field Overcurrent

When the field current increases above the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting for the duration of the Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting, a field overcurrent condition is annunciated. Field overcurrent is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level and Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay settings are related by an inverse function. This means that the higher the field current goes above the threshold, the shorter the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is a linear multiplier for the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20 Adc in 0.1 Adc increments. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20.0 in increments of 0.1. The field overcurrent protection function may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings. Figure 3-2 shows a set of typical field overcurrent timing curves. Notice that field current levels below 103% of the field overcurrent setpoint value are unpredictable and may not cause an annunciation. Also, field current levels greater than 250% (field current multiple of 2.5 in Figure 3-2) of the setpoint value cause an annunciation in the same amount of time as the 250% level.

Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves


Generator Overvoltage

When the generator voltage increases above the Generator Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of the Generator Overvoltage Delay setting, a generator overvoltage condition is annunciated. A generator overvoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Generator Overvoltage Level setting is adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1 Vac increments. The Generator Overvoltage Delay setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 60.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the generator voltage drops below the Generator Overvoltage Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset. Generator overvoltage protection may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.

Loss of Sensing

A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated when either of two conditions exist:

• All three phases of generator voltage decrease below the Loss of Sensing Voltage–Balanced Level setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.

• Any individual phase of generator sensing voltage differs by more than the Loss of Sensing Voltage–Unbalanced Level setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.

A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Balanced and Unbalanced Level settings are adjustable from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments. The Time Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 30.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments.

Below 10 Hertz

When the generator frequency decreases below 10 hertz, the condition is annunciated on the front panel display as SYSTEM BELOW 10 Hz. The programmable output relays may be configured to initiate additional annunciations or actions. A system below 10 hertz annunciation is reset automatically when the generator frequency increases above 10 hertz.

Loss of Field

When the reactive power absorbed by the generator exceeds the Loss of Field Level setting for the duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, a loss of field condition is annunciated. A loss of field is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Loss of Field Level setting is adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar increments. The Loss of Field Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 9.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the absorbed reactive power decreases below the Loss of Field Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset. Loss of field protection can be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.

Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM)

The DECS-200 monitors the output of the brushless exciter power semiconductors through the exciter field current and protects against both open and shorted diodes in the exciter bridge. When implementing the EDM, it is imperative that the user know and specify the number of poles for the exciter armature and the number of poles for the generator rotor.

The EDM function estimates the fundamental harmonic of the exciter field current using discrete Fourier transforms (DFTs). The harmonic, expressed as a percentage of the field current, is then compared to the trip levels for open diode detection (OD ripple) and shorted diode detection (SD ripple). If the percentage of field current exceeds the OD Level or SD Level setting, then the appropriate delay will begin. After the programmable delay for the OD or SD event expires, and if the percentage of field current still exceeds the OD Level or SD Level setting, the event is annunciated. An exciter diode failure is annunciated on the front panel HMI and can be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. EDM

NOTE

If the number of poles for the exciter armature and the generator rotor is unknown, the EDM function will still operate. However, only a shorted diode can be detected. If the number of poles is not known, it is best to select all parameters for the exciter open diode to off. In this situation, the generator and exciter pole parameters must be set at zero to prevent false tripping.


inhibit parameters prevent nuisance annunciations due to low excitation current or out-of-range generator frequency. The following parameters are required for complete operation of the EDM function.

• Pole ratio • Trip level of EDM OD ripple • Trip level of EDM SD ripple

• Open exciter diode delay • Shorted exciter diode delay • EDM inhibit level

Exciter Diode Monitor Settings

It is especially difficult to detect open diode conditions when the number of generator and exciter poles is unknown. For this reason, the ratio of the number of poles for the brushless exciter armature to the generator rotor be entered to ensure proper operation for both open and shorted diode protection.

Setting the Trip Level

To set the trip level of the EDM OD (open diode) ripple and EDM SD (shorted diode) ripple parameters, the maximum ripple current on the field must be known. This can be accomplished by running the generator unloaded and at rated speed. Vary the generator voltage from minimum to maximum voltage while monitoring the EDM OD and EDM SD % ripple on the DECS-200 HMI metering screen. Record the highest value for each. See Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for more details on displaying metering quantities.

With Number of Generator Poles Known

Multiply the highest EDM OD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level , by 3. The result is the Exciter Open Diode % Ripple Level (EDM OD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 2 and 5 to increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM OD indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds.

Multiply the highest EDM SD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level by 50. The result is the Exciter Shorted Diode % Ripple Level (EDM SD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 40 and 70 to increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds.

The DECS-200 has fixed EDM inhibit levels to prevent nuisance EDM indications while the generator sensing voltage is less than 45 Hz, greater than 70 Hz, or when the field current is less than 1 Adc. Although the user can adjust the field current inhibit level from 0 to 100%, the fixed EDM inhibit levels take priority. Pole ratios must be in the range of 1 to 10 with 0 used if the ratio is unknown.

With Number of Generator Poles Unknown

The DECS-200 can detect shorted diode conditions when the number of generator poles are not known. To provide this protection, disable EDM OD protection and set the pole ratio to zero. Enable EDM SD protection. Multiply the maximum EDM SD % ripple value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level, by 30. The multiplier can be varied between 20 and 40 to increase or decrease the trip margin. Reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD indication.

Test the EDM Settings

Start the generator from a dead stop condition and increase its speed and voltage to the rated value. Load the machine to its rating and confirm no EDM alarm indications occur. All of the EDM setup guidelines presented here assume the exciter diodes were not opened or shorted at the time of setup andtesting.

SOFT START DECS-200 soft start capability provides for an orderly buildup of terminal voltage from residual to the voltage setpoint in the desired time with minimal overshoot. When the system is in startup, the voltage reference is adjusted by the amount calculated based on two parameters. These parameters are level and time. Soft start bias level is adjustable from 0 to 90 percent of the active mode setpoint in increments of 1 percent with a default setting of 5 percent. Soft start time is adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in increments of 1 second with a default setting of 5 seconds. Figure 3-3 illustrates a plot of the voltage reference showing soft-start bias at 30%, soft-start time at 8 seconds and a voltage setpoint of 100%. Soft start level is the same parameter as soft-start bias when accessed on the Startup tab of the BESTCOMS System Settings screen.


Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference

LIMITER FUNCTIONS DECS-200 limiter functions include an underfrequency limiter, V/Hz ratio limiter, overexcitation limiter, underexcitation limiter, and a stator current limiter.

Underfrequency Limiter

When the generator frequency drops below the corner frequency for the underfrequency slope (Figure 3-4), the voltage setpoint is automatically adjusted by the DECS-200 so that generator voltage will follow the underfrequency slope and an underfrequency annunciation occurs. The underfrequency slope can be tuned to have zero to three times the volts/hertz slope in 0.01 increments. The corner frequency can be set across a range of 45 to 65 hertz in 0.1 hertz increments. This adjustability enables the DECS-200 to precisely match the operating characteristics of the prime mover and the loads being applied to the generator. The generator underfrequency function may be effectively disabled by setting the slope to zero. However, if the system frequency is below the corner frequency, underfrequency will be annunciated even if the slope is set at zero.

Corner Frequency

GE

NE

RA

TO

R V

OLT

S

GENERATOR FREQUENCY

P0004-34.vsd12-03-01

0 %

100 %

Nominal10 Hz

Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency Compensation Curve


When the underfrequency function is active, an underfrequency annunciation occurs. Underfre-quency is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation.

Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter

The volts per hertz ratio limiter prevents the regulation setpoint from exceeding the volts per hertz ratio that is prescribed by the slope setting of the DECS-200 as stated in the previous paragraphs. This feature is also useful for other potentially damaging system conditions such as a change in system voltage and reduced frequency situations that could exceed the systems volts per hertz ratio limit. Figure 3-5 illustrates a typical 1.10 PU volts per hertz limiter curve.

Overexcitation Limiter (OEL)

Overexcitation limiting operates in all modes except FCR mode. The DECS-200 senses the field current output and limits the field current to prevent field overheating. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 announces that all conditions for OEL are fulfilled. The DECS-200 provides two types of overexcitation limiting: Summing Point and Takeover.

Summing Point OEL

Two OEL current levels are defined for off-line operation: high and low (see Figure 3-6). The generator can operate continuously at the low OEL current level and for a programmed time at the high OEL current level.

Volts/H

ertz

Ratio

GE

NE

RA

TO

R V

OLT

S

GENERATOR FREQUENCY

P0004-33.vsd12-03-01

0 %

110 %

Nominal0 Hz

100 %

Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve

FIE

LD C

UR

RE

NT

TIME IN SECONDS

HighCurrentTime

CONTINUOUS

D2851-18.vsd04-03-01

0-10sec

LowCurrentLevel

0-15Adc

HighCurrentLevel

0-30Adc

Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting

Three OEL current levels are defined for on-line operation: high, medium, and low (see Figure 3-7). The high and medium current levels can be maintained only for a user-defined amount of time. The generator can operate continuously at the low OEL current level.

FIE

LD C

UR

RE

NT

TIME IN SECONDS

HighCurrentTime

0-10sec

CONTINUOUS

D2851-17.vsd04-03-01

MediumCurrentTime

0-120sec

LowCurrentLevel

0.0 - 15 Adc

MediumCurrentLevel

0.0 - 20 Adc

HighCurrentLevel

0.0 - 30Adc

Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

The 52L/M (unit/parallel) contact input status determines which limiter is active (on-line or off-line). When the 52L/M input is closed, the off-line limiter is active. When the 52L/M input is open, the on-Line limiter setting is active.


In addition to the three current levels, the DECS-200 also uses embedded timers to prevent excessive heating of the exciter field that may be a result of repetitive overexcitation conditions. A duration timer monitors the accumulated time actually spent in an overexcitation condition and a reset timer is used to count backward from either the High OEL Current Time setting or the sum of the high plus the Medium OEL Current Time setting depending on the duration timer value. The reset timer countdown begins when the excitation current falls below the low OEL current limit level. In the event a subsequent overexcitation condition occurs before the reset timer reaches zero, the OEL limiter will resume from its state prior to the excitation current falling below the low OEL current limit level. A full OEL cycle cannot occur until the reset timer has counted down to zero after a previous OEL condition.

When the system is limiting overexcitation, an OEL condition is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation.

Takeover OEL

When takeover-style overexcitation limiting is used, the level of field current at which limiting occurs is determined by an inverse time characteristic. This inverse time characteristic is similar to that shown in Figure 3-8. Two current levels and a time dial setting are defined for the takeover OEL. Separate curves may be selected for on-line operation. If the system enters an overexcitation condition, the field current is limited and forced to follow the selected curve.

Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL

On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options

Selection of on-line or off-line OEL levels/curves is determined by an OEL option selection. The following options are available.

Option 1 (default). When option 1 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when either the 52J/K contact input or 52L/M contact input are open. Off-line OEL settings are active when both the 52J/K contact input and 52L/M contact input are closed. The 52J/K contact input can be used to switch between on-line OEL and off-line OEL when the 52L/M contact input is jumpered. If var/power factor correction is disabled, Droop mode will be active when the 52J/K contact input is opened and AVR mode will be active when the 52J/K contact input is closed.

Option 2. Option 2 allows the 52J/K contact input to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are active. When option 2 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when the 52J/K contact input is open. Off-line OEL settings are active when the 52J/K contact input is closed. Option 2 is intended for cross-compound generator applications where both machines are paralleled at low rpm. Therefore, Droop mode needs to be active (52L/M contact input opened) as the speed of the machines are increased. However, off-line OEL settings for both machines need to be active.

Option 3. When option 3 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiting settings are active at all times. Option 3 allows the DECS-200 to operate in AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-line OEL settings. In this case, the on-line OEL settings are active to limit excessive excitation current. This option also eliminates the need for the DECS-200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single unit application. Therefore, voltage should not droop as reactive load increases.


Underexcitation Limiter

Underexcitation limiting (UEL) operates in all modes except FCR mode. UEL senses the leading var output of the generator and limits any further decrease in excitation to prevent loss of synchronization and end-iron heating during parallel operation. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 announces that all conditions for UEL are fulfilled. The reactive power level is selected at zero active power and the UEL limiting curve is calculated based on this value and the generator voltage and current rating. Typical leading kvar curves and a user-selected, five-point curve are shown in 3-9.

45.0k

37.5k

30.0k

22.5k

15.0k

7.5k

0.0

Rea

ctiv

e P

ower

Abs

orb

(var

) x

1000

45.0k37.5k30.0k22.5k15.0k7.5k0.0

Real Power Generate (W) x 1000

D2851-2506-28-05

Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve

When the system is limiting underexcitation, a UEL annunciation occurs. Underexcitation is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation.

Stator Current Limiting

The stator current limiter (SCL) senses the level of stator current and limits it to prevent stator overheating. The SCL operates in all modes except FCR. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 only announces that a stator overcurrent condition exists; it does not provide current limiting.

Two SCL current levels are provided: high and low (see Figure 3-10). The generator can operate continuously at the low SCL level and for a programmed time at the high SCL level.

TIME IN SECONDS

HighCurrentTime

Continuous

P0013-1911-10-04

0-60 s

LowCurrentLevel

0-66,000 Aac

HighCurrentLevel

0-66,000 Aac

ST

AT

OR

CU

RR

EN

T

Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting


DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION Droop and line-drop compensation are accomplished through the load compensation equation:

( ) TCCTC IjXRVV ++=1

Where: 1CV is the compensated output voltage

TV is the measured terminal-voltage vector

( )Cc jXR + are the compensation impedance values

TI is the measured terminal-current vector

When the droop percentage is a positive quantity, reactive droop compensation is performed. Droop is the product of the output voltage and the kvar that the generator is exporting. This is equivalent to the above compensation equation with RC equal to zero and neglecting the real part of the vector,

TI .

When the droop percentage is a negative quantity, line-drop compensation (LDC) is preformed. LDC takes into account the real part of the vector,

TI . Since LDC is typically used to compensate for reactive impedance losses in transformers, RC is assumed to be zero. For LDC, the above equation becomes:

( ) TCTC IjXVV +=1

DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING DECS-200 data logging and reporting features include a sequence of events recorder that records up to eight oscillography records.

Sequence of Events Reporting

A sequence of events recorder monitors the internal and external status of the DECS-200. Events are scanned at 50 millisecond intervals with 127 events stored per record. All changes of state that occur during each scan are time tagged. Sequence of events reports are available through BESTCOMS. All monitored events are listed below.

System Contact Input State Changes

• Alarm reset • AVR mode enable • FCR mode enable • Pre-Position • Secondary enable

• Start • Stop • Unit/Parallel (52 L/M)∗• VAR/PF enable (52 J/K)∗

∗ The 52 contacts are reported as disabled when the input is jumpered to common and reported as enabled when the input is not jumpered. All other contacts are reported as enabled when the inputs are jumpered to common.

System Output State Changes

• On/Off relay output • Relay 1 output • Relay 2 output

• Relay 3 output • Watchdog relay output

System Alarm State Changes

• Exciter diode open • Exciter diode shorted • Field overcurrent • Field overvoltage • Generator overvoltage • Generator undervoltage

• Loss of field • Lost voltage sensing • Overexcitation limit • Stator current limit • Underexcitation limit • Underfrequency

Changes in State of System Status

• Auto tracking mode • Control mode • Limiter mode • Load compensation mode • Operating mode

• Soft-start mode • Stop/Start • Underfrequency mode • Voltage matching mode


Oscillography

The data recording function of the DECS-200 can record up to eight oscillography records. Oscillography records recorded by the DECS-200 use the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE). Each record is time and date stamped. After eight records have been recorded, the DECS-200 begins recording the next record over the oldest record. Because all oscillography records are stored in volatile memory, the records will be lost if power is lost.

A record consists of six user selectable variables with 600 data points recorded for each variable. The sample rate or time between data point samples is user selectable from 4 milliseconds to 10 seconds. Therefore, the recording duration for a variable can range from 2.4 seconds to 6,000 seconds.

Data points may be selected for pre-trigger operation in order to capture events prior to a fault. Up to 599 pre-trigger data points may be selected. Data points that are not designated for pre-trigger recording are assigned to the post-trigger portion of the fault record. This feature combined with the adjustable sample rate allows for flexible data sampling around the fault.

The DECS-200 monitors six user-selectable internal variables. The following internal variables may be selected:

Internal Variables

• Auto tracking output (for future use) • Auxiliary input voltage∗• AVR Error Signal • Bus frequency • Bus voltage • Control output • Crosscurrent input∗• Exciter field current Ifd • Exciter field voltage Vfd • Generator average L-L voltage • Generator frequency • Generator Ib in amps • Generator kVA • Generator kvar • Generator kW • Generator power factor • Generator Vab • Generator Vbc • Generator Vca • Generator V-I phase angle∗• Internal PID Integrator State

∗ Typically, these are used when commissioning or troubleshooting.

Data recording may be triggered manually using BESTCOMS, logic triggers, or level triggers.

Logic triggers allow data recording to occur as a result of an internal or external status change of the DECS-200.

Level triggering allows the user to select triggering of a data record based on the value of one of the internal variables. The value can be a minimum or maximum value and can be specified to trigger a record when the monitored variable crosses a minimum threshold from above or a maximum threshold from below. A minimum and maximum threshold may also be selected for the monitored variable causing the monitored value to trigger a record when it goes above its maximum or falls below its minimum.

Figure 3-11 shows an example of a data record as it would look when viewed with BESTwave software. The example illustrates a voltage step change while monitoring average voltage, field voltage, and field current over a time period of 2.75 seconds.

For more information about selecting triggering types or levels, selecting internal variables for monitoring or viewing oscillography records, see Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.


Figure 3-11. Data Record Example

DECS-200 Installation i

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION...................................................................................................................4-1GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................................4-1PRODUCT REGISTRATION..................................................................................................................4-1MOUNTING............................................................................................................................................4-1CONNECTIONS.....................................................................................................................................4-6

Right-Hand Panel Connections ..........................................................................................................4-6Front Panel Connections ....................................................................................................................4-7Left-Hand Panel Connections.............................................................................................................4-7

Control Power .................................................................................................................................4-7Operating Power .............................................................................................................................4-7Chassis Ground ..............................................................................................................................4-8Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing .............................................................................................. 4-8Generator Current Sensing .............................................................................................................4-8Accessory Input...............................................................................................................................4-9Contact Inputs .................................................................................................................................4-9Output Contacts ............................................................................................................................4-10Field Output...................................................................................................................................4-10Com 2 Connections.......................................................................................................................4-10

Figures Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions .................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount ...............................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions.................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount..............................................................4-5Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections..........................................................4-6 Figure 4-6. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections ................................................................4-9 Figure 4-7. RS-485 DECS-B-37 to DECS-200 ........................................................................................4-11

Tables Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................4-6 Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications .................................................................................4-7 Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals ..........................................................................................................4-7 Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals......................................................................................................4-8 Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals .......................................................................4-8Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals......................................................................................4-8 Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals .......................................................................................................4-9 Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals ...........................................................................................................4-9 Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals.......................................................................................................4-10 Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals .........................................................................................................4-10 Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals ..................................................................................................................4-10

ii Installation DECS-200


DECS-200 Installation 4-1

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION GENERALDECS-200 Digital Excitation Control Systems are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of a system, check the part number against the requisition and packaging list for agreement. Inspect for damage, and if there is evidence of such immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric Regional Sales Office, your sales representative or a sales representative at Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois.

If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-free environment.

PRODUCT REGISTRATION Registering with Basler Electric enables you to receive important information updates on your product plus new product announcements. Register your product by directing your web browser to http://www.basler.com/Register.

MOUNTINGThe orientation of the DECS-200 heat sink requires vertical mounting for maximum cooling. Any other mounting angle will reduce the DECS-200’s heat dissipation capability and possibly lead to premature failure of critical components. The DECS-200 may be mounted anywhere that the ambient temperature does not exceed the environmental conditions listed in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.

Overall DECS-200 dimensions are shown in Figure 4-1.

Two DECS-200 mounting configurations are possible: projection mounting and panel mounting. The panel drilling diagram for projection mounting of a DECS-200 is shown in Figure 4-2. Panel mounting of a DECS-200 is possible with the optional escutcheon plate (part number 9360107100). Escutcheon plate dimensions are shown in Figure 4-3. The panel cutting and drilling diagram for the escutcheon plate is illustrated in Figure 4-4.

CAUTION

The hardware provided with the escutcheon plate should be used to attach the plate to the DECS-200. If other screws are used, ensure that the screw length does not exceed 5/16” (0.3125”).

4-2 Installation DECS-200

Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions


Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount


Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions


Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount


CONNECTIONSDECS-200 connections are dependent on the application and excitation scheme used. Observe the following guidelines when making DECS-200 connections:

• A given application may not require the use of all DECS-200 inputs and outputs. • Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the unit. • Applying incorrect control power, operating power, or sensing values may damage the unit. Compare

the unit style number with the style chart (Figure 1-2) before applying control power.

Terminations for DECS-200 connections are located on the right-hand panel, the front panel, and the left-hand panel.

Right-Hand Panel Connections

Right-hand panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 1) that is used for communication with a second DECS-200 unit when operating in a redundant system. A communication cable, part number 9310300032, is available for interconnecting two DECS-200 units. Table 4-1 lists the Com 1 pin numbers and functions. Figure 4-5 illustrates the communication connections between DECS-200 units.

Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions

Pin Name Description Function

1 Not used N/A

2 XMIT Transmit Sends serial data from DECS-200

3 RCV Receive Receives serial data from DECS-200

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Receives signal indicating that the sending unit is operational

5 GND Ground Provides the signal ground

6 DSR Data Set Ready Sends a signal indicating that the DECS-200N is operational

7, 8, 9

Not used N/A

P0007-0703-13-01

3

2

1

DB-9 MALE

TO DECS-200DB-9 FEMALE

5

4

8

7

9

6

3

2

1

5

4

8

7

9

6

NO CONNECTION

NO CONNECTION

NO CONNECTION

NO CONNECTION

XMIT

RCV

DTR

GND

DSR

DB-9 MALE

TO DECS-200DB-9 FEMALE

XMIT

RCV

DTR

GND

DSR

Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections

NOTE

The DECS-200 must be hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper wire attached to ground terminal C1. When the DECS-200 is configured in a system with other devices, a separate lead should be used to connect each device to the ground bus.


Front Panel Connections

Front panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 0) that is intended for short-term, RS-232 serial communication with a PC operating BESTCOMS software. Refer to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software for information about using BESTCOMS to communicate with the DECS-200.

Left-Hand Panel Connections

Left-hand panel terminations consist of screw compression terminals. These terminals are illustrated in Figure 4-6. Table 4-2 lists the wire size capacity and maximum screw torque for each terminal on the left-hand panel.

Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications

Terminals Wire Size Capacity Maximum Screw Torque

A1 – A45 B7 – B10

14 AWG 0.4 N•m (3.5 in-lb)

B1 – B6 C1 – C6

10 AWG 0.5 N•m (4.4 in-lb)

In the following paragraphs, DECS-200 terminal functions are described and the terminal assignments for each function are listed.

Control Power

DECS-200 units have two sets of power terminals. One set receives dc control power and the other set receives ac control power.

A DECS-200 with a style number of XL accepts nominal dc control power of 24 or 48 Vdc. The ac control power input of a style XL DECS-200 is not used.

A DECS-200 with a style number of XC accepts nominal dc control power of 125 Vdc and nominal ac control power of 120 Vac. One source (either dc or ac) is sufficient for operation, but two sources can be used to provide redundancy. The dc input has internal protection against reversed polarity connections. When dual control power sources are used, an isolation transformer (part number BE31449001) is required for the ac input. Control power terminal functions are listed in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals

Terminal Description

B7 (BAT+) Positive side of dc input

B8 (BAT–) Negative side of dc input

B9 (L) Line side of ac input

B10 (N) Return or neutral side of ac input

Operating Power

Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is usually derived from the generator output. This input can also be developed by any suitable source that delivers voltage within the limits specified in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.

Operating power may be either three-phase or single-phase. For single phase connections, any terminal combination can be used.

The operating power applied must be of sufficient magnitude to support the required level of excitation voltage. For 32 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 56 to 70 Vac (60 Vac nominal). For 63 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 100 to 139 Vac (120 Vac nominal). For 125 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 190 to 277 Vac (240 Vac nominal). The operating power frequency can be within the range of 50 to 500 hertz.


Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals


C2 (A) A-phase operating power input

C3 (B) B-phase operating power input

C4 (C) C-phase operating power input

Chassis Ground

Terminal C1 (GND) serves as the DECS-200 chassis ground connection.

Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing

The DECS-200 accommodates either three-phase or single-phase generator sensing voltage with four automatically selected ranges: 120, 240, 400, or 600 Vac for 60 hertz systems or 100, 200, 400, or 500 Vac for 50 hertz systems. When single-phase generator sensing voltage is used, use terminals A1 and A3 for the sensing connections.

A single bus sensing voltage input connects from phase A to phase C. The bus voltage sensing input has four automatically selected ranges which are identical to the generator sensing voltage ranges.

Generator and bus voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-5.

Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals


A1 (E1) A-phase generator sensing voltage input

A2 (E2) B-phase generator sensing voltage input

A3 (E3) C-phase generator sensing voltage input

A4 (B1) A-phase bus sensing voltage input

A5 (B3) C-phase bus sensing voltage input

Generator Current Sensing

A single current sensing input connects to a CT monitoring generator current on phase B. Two terminals are provided to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.

An input is also provided for sensing the current in a cross-current (reactive differential) compensation loop. Two or more paralleled generators can operate in cross-current compensation mode. Figure 4-6 illustrates a typical connection diagram for two paralleled generators using the 5 Aac sensing range on the DECS-200 cross-current input. The 1 Ω resistor is a typical value that can be used to set the burden. (Ensure that the resistor power rating is adequate for the installation.) Like the generator current sensing input, the cross-current input has two terminals to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.

Generator current sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals


B1(CTB 1 AMP)

B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing

B2(CTB 5 AMP)

B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing

B3(CTB COM)

B-phase generator sensing current common terminal

B4(CT CC 1A)

Cross-current input for 1 Aac sensing

B5(CT CC 5A)

Cross-current input for 5 Aac sensing

B6(CT CC COM)

Cross-current common terminal


GEN 1

GEN 2

CT CC 5A

CT CC COM

DECS-200

CT CC 5A

CT CC COM

DECS-200

1.0

1.0

CT

CT

LOADCCCENABLECONTACT

05-28-04P0005-02

Phase B

Phase B

Figure 4-6. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections

Accessory Input

DECS-200 units accept analog accessory signals from other controllers (e.g., power system stabilizers) for remote control of the setpoint. Two types of accessory inputs are provided: voltage and current. Only one accessory input (voltage or current) may be used at one time. The voltage input accepts a signal over the range of –10 Vdc to +10 Vdc. The current input accepts a signal over the range of 4 mAdc to 20 mAdc. Shielded cable is recommended for the accessory signal. Terminal A8 is provided for the shield connection. Accessory input terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-7.

Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals


A6 (I+) Positive side of current accessory input

A7 (I–) Negative side of current accessory input

A8 (GND) Shield connection for accessory input

A9 (V+) Positive side of voltage accessory input

A10 (V–) Negative side of voltage accessory input

Contact Inputs

The DECS-200 has 11 fixed-function contact inputs. Each contact input supplies an interrogation voltage of 12 Vdc and accepts dry switch/relay contacts or open-collector PLC outputs. Open-collector devices connected to the contact inputs must be compatible with the 12 Vdc interrogation voltage, be capable of conducting a minimum of 5 mAdc, and have off-state leakage current no greater than 100 µAdc. Table 4-8 lists the contact input terminals.

Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals

Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type

Start A21 (START) A22 (COM) Momentary

Stop A23 (STOP) A24 (COM Momentary

AVR Mode Enable A25 (AUTO) A26 (COM) Momentary


Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type

FCR Mode Enable A27 (FCR) A28 (COM) Momentary

Raise Command A29 (RAISE) A30 (COM) Momentary

Lower Command A31 (LOWER) A32 (COM) Momentary

Pre-Position A33 (PRE-P) A34 (COM) Continuous

Unit/Parallel A35 (52L/M) A36 (COM) Continuous

Var/PF Enable A37 (52J/K) A38 (COM) Continuous

Secondary Enable A39 (SECEN) A40 (COM) Continuous

Alarm Reset A41 (ALRST) A42 (COM) Momentary

Output Contacts

The DECS-200 has two fixed-function contact outputs and three user-programmable contact outputs. All output contacts are normally open (NO) except for the Watchdog output which is normally closed (NC). Output contact terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-9. For additional information about relay output specifications, refer to Section 1, General Information. For information about configuring the user-programmable outputs, refer to Section 3, Functional Description.

Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals


A11 (ON/OF)

A12 (ON/OF)

On/Off contact terminals

A13 (WTCHD)

A14 (WTCHD)

Watchdog contact terminals (normally closed)

A15 (RLY1)

A16 (RLY1)

Programmable relay #1 terminals

A17 (RLY2)

A18 (RLY2)


A19 (RLY3)

A20 (RLY3)


Field Output

The DECS-200 output is capable of supplying 15 Adc of continuous excitation current to a field with no less than 2.13 ohms of resistance (at 32 Vdc), 4.2 ohms of resistance (at 63 Vdc), or 8.3 ohms of resistance (at 125 Vdc). Field output terminals are listed in Table 4-10.

Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals


C5 (F+) Field output positive terminal

C6 (F–) Field output negative terminal

Com 2 Connections

Communication port Com 2 is intended for polled communication over a Modbus network. Twisted-pair cable is recommended for Com 2 connections. Com 2 terminals are listed in Table 4-11. Figure 4-7 illustrates the Com 2 connections used for multiple DECS-200 units communicating over a Modbus network.

Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals Terminal Description

A43 (A) RS-485 send/receive A terminal

A44 (B) RS-485 send/receive B terminal

A45 (C) RS-485 signal ground terminal


P00

07-0

811

-21-

05

22

6

4

A

B

C

Terminal BlockDB-37 FemaleTo DECS-200T0 RS-422/RS-485

19

24

4000'MAX.

DECS-200Com 2

Rt

tR

Rt = Optional terminating resistor (120 O typical)

A43

A44

A45

A

B

C

DECS-200Com 2

A43

A44

A45

A

B

C

DECS-200Com 2

A43

A44

A45

Figure 4-7. RS-485 DB-37 to DECS-200

DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software i

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE...................................................................................................5-1INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................5-1INSTALLATION......................................................................................................................................5-1

Operating Requirements.....................................................................................................................5-1Installing BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................5-1Connecting the DECS-200 and PC ....................................................................................................5-1

STARTING BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................5-1Establishing Communication ..............................................................................................................5-1Configuring the Communication Ports................................................................................................5-2Configuring the Real-Time Clock........................................................................................................5-2Assigning Identification Labels ...........................................................................................................5-3Creating a Password ..........................................................................................................................5-3

CHANGING SETTINGS .........................................................................................................................5-3Sending Settings to the DECS-200 ....................................................................................................5-3Retrieving DECS-200 Settings ...........................................................................................................5-3Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory...............................................................................................5-3

SYSTEM SETTINGS..............................................................................................................................5-4System Configuration .........................................................................................................................5-4Setting Adjustments............................................................................................................................5-8Control Gain......................................................................................................................................5-15Analysis.............................................................................................................................................5-17Protection/Relay ...............................................................................................................................5-21Data Log ...........................................................................................................................................5-25Metering ............................................................................................................................................5-30

SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES ......................................................................................5-32Saving Files ......................................................................................................................................5-32Printing Files .....................................................................................................................................5-33Opening/Uploading Files ..................................................................................................................5-33

PID WINDOW.......................................................................................................................................5-33PID Calculations Based On Input Values ......................................................................................... 5-34Adding To PID List............................................................................................................................5-35Removing A PID List Record............................................................................................................5-35Retrieving Existing Data From PID List ............................................................................................5-35

TERMINATING COMMUNICATION ....................................................................................................5-35

Figures Figure 5-1. BESTCOMS Title and Version ................................................................................................5-1 Figure 5-2. Comm Port Selection...............................................................................................................5-2 Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings..................................................................................................5-2Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................5-2Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen ...................................................................................................5-2Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen.....................................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen............................................................................................5-3Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab...............................................................5-4Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab....................................................................5-5Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab ......................................................................5-6Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator.............................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab................................................................5-7Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab.........................................................................5-8Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab ..............................................................................5-9Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab .................................................................................5-11Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab ............................................................................5-11Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab...................................................................5-12Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab.............................................................5-13Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab................................................................................5-14Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab................................................................................5-15

ii BESTCOMS Software DECS-200

Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen............................................................................................................5-15Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab ..................................................................................................5-18Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab ..................................................................................................5-18Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab ....................................................................................................5-19Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab.....................................................................................................5-20Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab ..........................................................................................5-22Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab..........................................................................................5-22Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab.........................................................................5-24Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab .................................................................................5-25Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab ......................................................5-25Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting .............................................................................................5-26Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen...........................................................................................................5-27Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab .................................................................................5-28Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters........................................................5-29Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab .........................................................................................5-31Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab ....................................................................................5-32Figure 5-36. PID Window.........................................................................................................................5-34

Tables Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups........................................................................................5-16 Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers .....................................................................................5-30 Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic ...........................................................................................................5-31

DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-1

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE INTRODUCTIONBESTCOMS is a Windows®-based application that provides a user-friendly environment for programming and customizing the DECS-200. In addition to screens for configuring DECS-200 settings, BESTCOMS has metering screens for viewing machine and system parameters and control screens for remote control of the excitation system. An integrated PID calculator simplifies the selection of stability settings.

INSTALLATIONBESTCOMS-DECS200 software contains a setup utility that installs the program on your PC. When it installs the program, an uninstall icon is created that you may use to uninstall (remove) the program from your PC. The minimum recommended operating requirements are listed in the following paragraph.

Operating Requirements • IBM compatible PC, 486 DX2 or faster (100 MHz or higher speed microprocessor recommended),

with a minimum 20 megabytes of RAM • Microsoft, Windows® 95, 98, Me, 2000, XP or NT®

• CD-ROM drive • One available serial port

Installing BESTCOMS 1. Insert the DECS-200 CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive. 2. When the DECS-200 Setup and Documentation CD Menu appears, click the Install button for

BESTCOMS-DECS200. The BESTCOMS setup utility automatically installs BESTCOMS.

When BESTCOMS is installed, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows program menu. This folder is accessed by clicking the Start button and pointing to Programs. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon for BESTCOMS-DECS200.

Connecting the DECS-200 and PC

Connect a communication cable between the DECS-200 front panel RS-232 connector (Com 0) and the appropriate communication port of the PC.

STARTING BESTCOMS BESTCOMS is started by clicking the Windows Start button, pointing to Programs, the Basler Electric folder, and then clicking the BESTCOMS-DECS200 icon. At startup, a dialog box with the program title and version number is displayed briefly. After this dialog box is displayed, the System Configuration Screen is displayed (Figure 5-7).

Establishing Communication

Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 must be established before viewing metering values or reading or changing settings. BESTCOMS screen settings are updated only after communication is opened or the communication settings have been changed.

Open the DECS-200 communication port by clicking Communications on the menu bar, hovering the mouse pointer over Open Comm Port and clicking Front Port - RS-232 (Figure 5-2). When the Comm Port dialog box appears, select the appropriate PC communication port and click the Initialize button. BESTCOMS initiates communication by retrieving the configuration settings from the DECS-200.

NOTE

BESTCOMS may display the dialog box of Figure 5-1 when initiating DECS-200 communication, obtaining DECS-200 configuration settings or performing other tasks. It's important to wait until the box disappears before trying to execute communication commands. Issuing commands while the Reading from DECS-200 dialog box is present may disrupt communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200.

Figure 5-1. Wait Dialog Box

5-2 BESTCOMS Software DECS-200

Configuring the Communication Ports

DECS-200 communication settings are changed through the Communication Port Settings screen. To access this screen, click Communications on the menu bar and click Port Configuration.Communication port settings are illustrated in Figure 5-2 and described in the following paragraphs.

Serial Port. To modify the settings of a communication port, the serial port must first be selected. Each port has a corresponding setting selection. Front-panel communication port settings are adjusted by selecting COM0 RS-232. Right-hand panel communication port settings are adjusted by selecting COM1 RS-232. Left-hand panel communication port settings are adjusted by selecting COM2 RS-485.

Baud Rate. A baud rate of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 may be selected for each serial port.

Parity. This setting can be adjusted only for port Com 2. A setting of N (no parity) O (odd parity), or E (even parity) may be selected.

Data Bits. The number of data bits is not adjustable and fixed at 8.

Stop Bits. This setting can be adjusted only for port Com 2. One (1) stop bit or two (2) stop bits may be selected.

Modbus Settings, Address. This setting is enabled only for port Com 2. A device address of 1 through 247 may be selected.

Modbus Settings, Response Time Delay. This setting is enabled only for port Com 2. A response time delay of 10 to 200 milliseconds may be entered in 10 millisecond increments.

Once changes are made to the communication settings and the OK button is clicked, the Password dialog box of Figure 5-3 appears and prompts you to enter a password. Each DECS-200 is delivered with "decs2" as the default password. See Creating a Password for information about changing the password. After the correct password is entered, the communication setting changes are made active.

Configuring the Real-Time Clock

DECS-200 timekeeping is set and configured through the Set Real Time Clock screen (Figure 5-4). To access the Set Real Time Clock screen, click Configure on the menu bar and click Real Time Clock. The DECS-200 date and time are set by altering the date and time fields or by retrieving the PC date and time and then sending the values to the DECS-200. The date format can be selected as MM/DD/YY or DD-MM-YY. Timekeeping can use the 12-hour or 24-hour format. Daylight saving time compensation can be enabled or disabled.

Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings

Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box

Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen


Assigning Identification Labels

Identification labels can be assigned to the DECS-200 through the Device ID screen (Figure 5-5). The information entered on the Device ID screen identifies the DECS-200 unit and associates it with a location and one or two operators. The Device ID screen is accessed by clicking Configure on the menu bar and clicking Device ID Information.Information entered on the Device ID screen is used in sequence-of-events reporting and settings printouts. Each field of the Device ID screen accepts a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.

Creating a Password

Password protection guards against unauthorized changing or viewing of DECS-200 settings. A single password protects all DECS-200 settings. The DECS-200 is delivered with a default password of decs2. The password can be changed only after communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 is established. Once the password is changed, it should be stored in a secure location. If the user-defined password is lost or forgotten, BESTCOMS must be reloaded to restore the default password. A user password is entered on the Change DECS Password screen. This screen, illustrated in Figure 5-6, is accessed by clicking Communications on the menu bar and clicking Password Change. A password containing up to six alphanumeric characters may be entered.

Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen

Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen

CHANGING SETTINGS A setting is changed by clicking within the setting field and typing the new setting value. When the cursor is placed within a setting field, the range limits and increments for the setting are displayed on the status bar. If a value outside the range limits is entered, an Input Error dialog box will appear and display the acceptable range limits for the setting.

Sending Settings to the DECS-200

Once all desired setting changes have been made on a setting group screen, the settings must be sent to the DECS-200 before viewing other screens. Otherwise, the setting changes will be lost. Setting changes can be sent to the DECS-200 by clicking the SendToDECS button or by clicking Communications on the menu bar and then clicking Send To DECS. A single setting change can be sent to the DECS-200 by pressing the keyboard Enter key. Functions controlled by option buttons or checkboxes are immediately sent to the DECS-200 when the option button or checkbox is selected.

Retrieving DECS-200 Settings

Settings are retrieved from the DECS-200 by clicking the GetFromDECS button. This causes the current DECS-200 settings to be displayed on the BESTCOMS setting screens. DECS-200 settings can also be retrieved by clicking Communications on the menu bar and clicking Get From DECS.

Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory

DECS-200 settings are saved in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). In the event of a control power loss, these are the settings that are active at power-up. When setting changes are made and sent to the DECS-200, they are automatically saved to EEPROM (if the correct password is entered). When you close communication or exit BESTCOMS, you may be asked for a password. Enter the correct password to ensure that all setting changes are saved.


SYSTEM SETTINGS DECS-200 settings, metering values, and data records are arranged into seven groups within BESTCOMS:

• System Configuration • Setting Adjustments • Control Gain • Analysis

• Protection/Relay • Data Log • Metering/Operation

Each group is contained on a BESTCOMS screen. A screen’s settings and parameters are further organized by labeled tabs within the screen. In the following paragraphs, settings, metering values, and data records are arranged and defined according to the organization of the BESTCOMS screen and tabs.

System Configuration

The System Configuration screen consists of four tabs labeled System Options, System Data, Rated Data, and Auxiliary Input. To view the System Configuration screen, click the Configure button on the toolbar or click Screens on the menu bar and click System Configuration.

System Options

System Options tab functions are shown in Figure 5-7 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab

Limiter Mode. This setting disables all limiters or enables the underexcitation limiter (UEL), overexcitation limiter (OEL), or stator current limiter (SCL). Selection of the following limiter combinations is also possible: OEL/UEL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL, and SCL/OEL/UEL.

Sensing Configuration. Configures the generator sensing voltage as either single-phase or three-phase.

Underfrequency Mode. Configures underfrequency limiting for V/Hz or underfrequency operation.

Generator Frequency. Selects either 50 hertz or 60 hertz as the nominal system frequency.

Voltage Matching. Enables or disables voltage matching. For voltage matching to be enabled, the DECS-200 must be operating in AVR mode, var/power factor correction must be disabled, and the system must be off line.

Version Numbers. These two read-only fields display the version of BESTCOMS software and the firmware version of the DECS-200 connected to the PC operating BESTCOMS. In order for the DECS-200 firmware version to be displayed, communication must be established between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200.


System Data

System Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-8 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab

Generator PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the generator potential transformer (PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.

Generator PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Sets the rated secondary voltage of the generator potential transformer. Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 600 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.

Generator CT Ratings, Primary Current. Sets the rated primary current of the generator current transformer (CT). A setting of 1 to 60,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.

Generator CT Ratings, Secondary Current. Sets the rated secondary current of the generator current transformer (CT). A setting of 1 Aac or 5 Aac may be entered.

Bus PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 500,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.

Bus PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Sets the rated secondary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 600 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.

Internal Tracking, Enabled/Disabled. Enables or disables tracking of the active control mode setpoint by the inactive control modes.

Internal Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a control mode change and setpoint tracking. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Internal Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the inactive control mode to traverse (cross) the full setting range of the active control mode setpoint. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

External Tracking, Enable/Disable. Enables or disables tracking of a second DECS-200’s setpoint.

External Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a transfer to a second DECS-200 and start of tracking of the second DECS-200 setpoint. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.


External Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the DECS-200 to traverse (cross) the full setting range of a second, active DECS-200. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Rated Data

Rated Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-9 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab

Generator Rated Data, Voltage. Sets the rated line-to-neutral generator voltage. A setting of 85 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.

Generator Rated Data, Current. sets the rated generator line current. A setting of 10 to 60,000 Aac may be entered in 0.1 Aac increments.

Generator Rated Data, Power Factor. Sets the rated generator power factor which is used to calculate generator real power. A setting of 0.5 (leading) to –0.5 (lagging) may be entered in 0.01 increments.

Generator Rated Data, Real Power. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field, current field, power factor field, and the square root of 3.

Generator Rated Data, Rating. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field, current field, and the square root of 3.

Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Voltage. Sets the rated exciter field voltage. A setting of 1 to 180 Vdc may be entered in 0.1 Vdc increments.

Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Current. Sets the rated exciter field current. A setting of 0.1 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Resistance. This read-only field is the calculated result of the field voltage field being divided by the field current field.

Pole Ratio, Calculate Pole Ratio. Clicking this button displays the Pole Ratio Calculator screen (Figure 5-10). Enter the number of exciter poles and generator poles and press the Enter key to view the calculated result. The “Number of EXCITER Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 1,000. The “Number of GENERATOR Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 100. Clicking the Accept button closes the Pole Ratio Calculator screen and enters the ratio in the Pole Ratio field.


Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator

Pole Ratio, Pole Ratio. Sets the ratio of the number of exciter poles to the number of generator poles. A setting of 0 to 10 may be entered in 0.01 increments. This value can be calculated automatically using the pole ratio calculator , accessed by clicking the Calculate Pole Ratio button.

Auxiliary Input

The auxiliary voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. For more information on the auxiliary voltage input, refer to Section 3, Functional Description. Auxiliary Input tab functions are shown in Figure 5-11 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab

Auxiliary Input, Input Type. Selects the accessory input type as voltage or current for remote control of the setpoint.

Auxiliary Input, Summing Type. Selects either Inner Loop or Outer Loop as the summing type. When Inner Loop is selected, the operating mode is either AVR of FCR. When Outer Loop is selected, the operating mode is either var or power factor.


Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Gain Settings. The four auxiliary gain setting fields, AVR, FCR, var, and PF, select the gain which affects the setpoint of the selected operating mode. The signal applied to the accessory input is multiplied by the auxiliary gain setting. Each gain setting can be adjusted from –99 to +99 in increments of 0.01. For more information on the accessory gain settings, refer to Section 3, Functional Description.

Droop Settings, Reactive Droop Compensation. Sets the level of droop compensation for paralleled generators or line-drop compensations. Droop compensation is adjustable from 0 to +30% of the generator nominal, terminal voltage in 0.1% increments. Line-drop compensation is adjustable from –30 to 0% of the generator nominal terminal voltage in 0.1% increments.

Droop Settings, Cross Current Compensation Gain. Sets the level of cross-current compensation (reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators. Cross-current compensation gain is adjustable from –30 to +30% of the rated CTs in 0.01% steps. Refer to Section 4, Installation, for more information on cross-current compensation gain.

Setting Adjustments

The Setting Adjustments screen consists of eight tabs labeled AVR/FCR, var/PF, Startup, OEL Type, OEL (Summing), OEL (Takeover), UEL, and SCL. To view the setting adjustment screen, click the Settings button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Setting Adjustments.

AVR/FCR

AVR/FCR tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-12 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab

Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Setpoint. Sets the desired generator output voltage when operating in AVR mode. The range of this setting is based on the generator voltage setting entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen. This setting is also limited by the settings of the AVR Min and AVR Max fields. If sensing step-down transformers are used, primary voltage should be entered.

Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Min. Sets the minimum generator output voltage, expressed as a percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Max. Sets the maximum generator output voltage, expressed as a percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Automatic Voltage Regulator, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the AVR setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.


Automatic Voltage Regulator, Pre-position Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for AVR mode. This value replaces the AVR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the AVR Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The setting range is identical to the AVR Setpoint setting range. If sensing step-down transformers are being used, primary voltage should be entered.

Automatic Voltage Regulator, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.

Field Current Regulator, FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current setpoint when operating in FCR mode. The range of this setting is based on the field current rating entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the FCR Min and FCR Max fields.

Field Current Regulator, FCR Min. Sets the minimum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated field current. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Field Current Regulator, FCR Max. Sets the maximum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated field current. A setting of 1 to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Field Current Regulator, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the FCR setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Field Current Regulator, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for FCR mode. This value replaces the FCR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the FCR Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The setting range is identical to the FCR Setpoint setting range.

Field Current Regulator, Pre-position Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.

Var/PF

Var/PF tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-13 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab

Reactive Power Control, var Setpoint. Sets the reactive power setpoint when operating in var mode. The range of this setting depends on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the var Min and var Max fields.


Reactive Power Control, var Min. Sets the minimum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.

Reactive Power Control, var Max. Sets the maximum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.

Reactive Power Control, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the var setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Reactive Power Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for var mode. This value replaces the var setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the var Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The setting range is identical to the var Setpoint setting range.

Reactive Power Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further setpoint change commands once the operating var setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.

Reactive Power Control, Var/PF Fine Volt Band. Sets the upper and lower boundaries of voltage correction when operating in var or PF mode.

Power Factor Control, PF Setpoint. Sets the generator operating power factor. The range of this setting is determined by the settings of the PF (Leading) and PF (Lagging) fields.

Power Factor Control, PF (Leading). Sets the limit for leading power factor. A setting of –1 to –0.5 may be entered in 0.005 increments.

Power Factor Control, PF (Lagging). Sets the limit for lagging power factor. A setting of 0.5 to 1 may be entered in 0.005 increments.

Power Factor Control, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the power factor setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Power Factor Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for Power Factor mode. This value replaces the PF setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the PF Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The setting range is identical to the PF Setpoint setting range.

Power Factor Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further setpoint change commands once the operating PF setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.

Startup

Startup tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-14 and described in the following paragraphs.

Startup Control, Soft Start Level. Sets the generator soft-start voltage offset used during startup. A setting of 0 to 90% may be entered in 1% increments.

Startup Control, Soft Start Time. Sets the soft-start time limit used during startup. A setting of 1 to 7,200 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Underfrequency Setting, Corner Frequency. Sets the generator corner frequency for generator under-frequency protection. A setting of 15 to 90 Hz may be entered in 0.1 Hz increments.

Underfrequency Setting, Slope. Sets the generator frequency slope for generator underfrequency protection. A setting of 0 to 3 V/Hz may be entered in 0.01 V/Hz increments.

Voltage Matching, Band. Configures the generator voltage matching band as a percentage of the generator rated voltage. When the bus voltage falls outside this band, no voltage matching occurs. A setting of 0 to 20% may be entered in 0.01% increments.

Voltage Matching, Gen to Bus PT Match Level. Ensures accurate voltage matching by compensation for the error between the generator and bus voltage sensing transformers. The Match Level is expressed as the relationship of the generator voltage to the bus voltage (expressed as a percentage). A setting of 90 to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.


Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab

OEL Type

Overexcitation Limiter Type tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-15 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab

OEL Limiter Style. Selects either the summing-point type of overexcitation limiter or the takeover-type of overexcitation limiter.

OEL Setting Selection Option. Selects the on-line and off-line OEL settings for various 52J/K and 52L/M contact statuses.


Option 1 activates the on-line OEL settings when either the 52J/K contact or 52L/M contact is opened. The off-line OEL settings are activated when both the 52J/K and 52L/M contacts are closed. When the 52L/M contact input is jumpered, the 52J/K input can be used to switch between the on-line OEL and off-line OEL. If var/PF modes are disabled, a closed 52J/K contact enables AVR mode and an open 52J/K contact enables droop compensation.

Option 2 configures the 52J/K contact to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are active. When the 52J/K contact is closed, the off-line OEL settings are active. When the 52J/K contact is open, the on-line OEL settings are active. This configuration is intended for cross-compound generator applications where both machines are paralleled at low rotational speed. Therefore, droop compensation needs to be active (open 52L/M contact) as the speed of the machines is increased. However, both machines need active, off-line overexcitation limiting protection.

Option 3 activates the on-line OEL at all times. This configuration enables the DECS-200 to operate in AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-line OEL settings. The active on-line OEL is able to limit excitation current if needed. This configuration also eliminates the need for the DECS-200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single-unit application. Therefore, generator voltage should not droop as reactive load increases.

OEL (Summing)

Summing-Point Overexcitation Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-16 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab

Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Time. Sets the duration for the high current setpoint of the off-line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 10 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Off-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

On-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Level. Establishes the medium-level current setpoint for the on-line, summing point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.


On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Time. Sets the duration for the medium current setpoint of the on-line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 120 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

On-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

OEL (Takeover)

Takeover Overexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-17 and described in the following paragraphs.

Off-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

Off-Line Settings, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

Off-Line Settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the off-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab

On-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 15 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

On-Line Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

On-Line settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the on-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Off-Line Curve and On-Line Curve Checkboxes. Checking these boxes displays a plot of the takeover-style off-line and on-line overexcitation limiter curves. Curve magnification is adjusted by the Zoom X, Zoom Y, Zoom XY, and Zoom OUT buttons.

UEL

Underexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-18 and described in the following paragraphs.

UEL Settings, UEL Curve Type Selection. Selects either a user-configured or internally-configured underexcitation limiting curve. Selecting “Customized” enables the user to create a custom UEL curve that matches specific generator characteristics. When “Internal” is selected, the DECS-200 automatically


creates a UEL curve based on the first point setting of the absorbed, reactive power level. This function operates in all modes except FCR.

UEL Settings, Real Power. Up to five setting fields may be used to establish up to five real-power (kW) points of the underexcitation limiter curve. The UEL Curve Type Selection must be set to “Customized” in order for these setting fields to be enabled. Not all setting fields need be used. For example, entering kW values in three of the five setting fields produces a three-point UEL curve. The range for each setting field is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen.

UEL Settings, Reactive Power. When the UEL Curve Type Selection is set to “Customized”, these five setting fields establish the five reactive power points of the underexcitation limiter curve. Not all setting fields need be used. For example, entering kvar values in to of the five setting fields produces a two-point UEL curve. When the UEL curve Type Selection is set to “Internal”, only the first setting field is enabled and a UEL curve is internally generated based on the value entered in the field. The range for each setting field is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen.

Curve points are plotted in the UEL graph as values are entered through BESTCOMS. All kW and kvar settings can also be sent at the same time using the Send all UEL Settings to DECS button.

Internal Curve and Customized Curve Buttons. These buttons can be clicked and held to preview the corresponding UEL curve.

Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab

SCL

Stator Current Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-19 and described in the following paragraphs.

Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Level. Configures the high-level current setpoint for the stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1.0 Aac increments.

Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Time. Sets the time limit for high-level current limiting by the stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 60 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Stator Current Limiter, Low SCL Current Level. Configures the low-level current setpoint for the stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.


Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab

Control Gain

The Control Gain screen consists of a single tab labeled Control Gain. To view the Control Gain screen, click the Gain button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Control Gain.

Control Gain Tab

Control Gain tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-20 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen

Stability Range. Entering a value from 1 to 20 selects one of 20 predefined stability setting groups for exciter field applications. Table 5-1 lists the stability settings for each of the 20 predefined groups. Entering 21 enables the PID function and allows the user to optimize the stability settings. The PID


function provides reference gain settings for user-specified generator and/or exciter time constants. See PID Window for information about customizing stability settings.

Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups

Setting Group

Generator Open Circuit Time

Constant (T’do) Generator Exciter

Time Constant (Texc) Kp Ki Kd

1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.2 4.433

2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.0 8.750

3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.9 13.670

4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.8 18.960

5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.8 24.500

6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.4 30.220

7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.1 36.060

8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.8 42.000

9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.9 48.010

10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.7 54.080

11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.6 60.200

12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.5 66.350

13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.6 72.540

14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.9 78.750

15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.4 84.980

16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.1 91.230

17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.9 97.500

18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.1 103.800

19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.4 110.100

20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.8 116.400

AVR/FCR, Proportional Gain KP. Selects the proportional constant (KP) stability parameter. The DECS-200 provides an output value that is equivalent to KP multiplied by the error between the voltage setpoint and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KP range from 0 to 1,000. General guidelines for tuning KP are as follows: If the transient response has too much overshoot, decrease KP. If the transient response is too slow with little or no overshoot, increase KP. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

AVR/FCR, Integral Gain KI. Selects the integral constant (KI) stability parameter. The DECS-200 provides an output value that is equivalent to KI multi-plied by the integral of the error between the voltage setpoint and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KI range fro 0 to 1,000. Generally, if the time to reach steady state is deemed too long, then increase the value of KI. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain KD. Selects the derivative constant (KD) stability parameter. The DECS-200 provides an output value that is equivalent to KD multiplied by the derivative of the error between the voltage setpoint and the actual generator output voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments. Typical values of KD range from 1 to 10. If the transient response has too much ringing, then KD should be increased.

AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain TD. Removes the effects of noise on numerical differentiation. A setting of 0 to 1 may be entered in 0.01 increments. Typical TD values range from 0.01 to 0.03.

AVR/FCR, AVR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for AVR mode. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

_AVR/FCR, FCR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for FCR mode. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.


VAR/PF, var Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-200 dynamic response to a changed var setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01 increments.

VAR/PF, PF Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-200 dynamic response to a changed power factor setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

VAR/PF, var Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for var control. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01 increments.

VAR/PF, PF Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for power factor control. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

SCL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 limits stator current. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

SCL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

OEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an overexcitation condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

OEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

UEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an underexcitation condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

UEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the underexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments

Voltage Matching, Loop Gain Kg. Adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for matching the generator voltage to the bus voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.

Analysis

The Analysis screen consists of four tabs labeled AVR, FCR, var, and PF. To view the Analysis screen, click the Analysis button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Analysis.

Trigger Data Logging on Step Change. Checking this box causes an oscillography report to be triggered every time that a step change occurs.

AVR

AVR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-21 and described in the following paragraphs.

Voltage Step Response, Increment of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses when incrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1% increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is clicked. If the specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.

Voltage Step Response, AVR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the generator terminal voltage set-point that was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field is clicked to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.

Voltage Step Response, Decrement of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses when decrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1% increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is clicked.

Voltage Step Response, Vrms. This read-only field indicates the value of terminal voltage. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.

Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system alarms. The indicators annunciate the following conditions:

• Field overcurrent • Field overvoltage • Generator overvoltage • Generator undervoltage


• Loss of sensing • Overexcitation limiting • System frequency below 10 Hz • Underexcitation limiting • Underfrequency or volts per hertz

Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab

FCR

FCR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-22 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab


Field Current Step Response, Increment of FCR Setpoint. Sets the current step size that the DECS-200 uses when incrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1% increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the field current setpoint. A read-only field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is clicked. If the specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.

Field Current Step Response, FCR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the field current setpoint that was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field is clicked to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.

Field Current Step Response, Decrement of FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current step size that the DECS-200 uses when decrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1% increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the field current setpoint. A read-only field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is clicked.

Field Current Step Response, Ifd. This read-only field indicates the value of field current. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.

Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system alarms. A list of the indicators is provided under Analysis, AVR. Alarm annunciations are updated approximately once every second.

Var

Var tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-23 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab

Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Min. Changes the range indicated by the var Step Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the minimum dial value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.

Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Max. Changes the range indicated by the var Step Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the maximum dial value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.

Reactive Power Step Response, Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power setpoint established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step-response setpoint change has been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this read-only indication.

Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change var Value. Provides one of three methods for changing the kvar setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other two methods include


adjusting the var Step Settings dial or slide bar.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to the DECS-200 by clicking the Send var Value to DECS (OK) button. When clicked and held, the button color changes to red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new var value setting is sent to the DECS-200 as the reactive power setpoint for the var regulator. If the specified var value is outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step response. Changing the var setpoint through the var Value field does not change the dial or slide indicators.

The pointer of the var Step Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate, desired setting. As the pointer is dragged, the slide bar moves to show the relative percentage of the minimum or maximum var setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the var Value window.

Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three var step-response setpoints (indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add var Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send var Value to DECSbutton is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A third index is added n the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.

Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Add Var Step. Adds a setpoint index. A maximum of three setpoint indexes may be created. Refer to the previous paragraph for additional information on adding setpoint indexes (var Steps).

Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Remove Step. Removes the last setpoint index created.

Var, Var Step Response. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated var level. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.


PF

PF tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-24 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab

Power Factor Step Response, Add PF Step. Adds a power factor setpoint index. Up to three setpoint indexes can be created. The addition of indexes is discussed in the paragraphs describing the Step Value Change settings.


Power Factor Step Response, Remove Steps. Removes the last setpoint index created.

Power Factor Step Response, PF Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power setpoint established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step response setpoint change has been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this read-only indication.

Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change PF Value. Provides one of two methods for changing the power factor setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other method consists of adjusting the PF Step Response Settings dial.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to the DECS-200 by clicking the Send PF Value to DECS button. When clicked and held, the button color changes to red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new power factor value is sent to the DECS-200 and the PF setpoint for the power factor regulator. If the specified PF value is outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step response. Changing the var setpoint through the PF Value field does not change the dial indicator.

The pointer of the PF Step Response Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate, desired setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the PF Value window.

Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three power factor step-response setpoints (indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add PF Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red Index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send PF Value to DECSbutton is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A third index is added in the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.

Power Factor Step Response, PF. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated power factor level. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.


Protection/Relay

The Protection/Relay screen consists of five tabs labeled Options, Settings, Gain, Relay #1, #2 Logic, Relay #3 Logic, and Relay Settings. To view the Protection/Relay screen, click the Protection button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Protection/Relay.

Options

Options tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-25 and described in the following paragraphs.

Protection. DECS-200 protection functions are enabled and disabled using these settings. DECS-200 protection functions include generator overvoltage, exciter field overvoltage, open exciter diode, loss of field, generator undervoltage, exciter field overcurrent, and shorted exciter diode. When a protection function is enabled or disabled, the change is sent immediately to the DECS-200.

Loss of Sensing Voltage, LOS. Enables and disables the loss of sensing function.

Loss of Sensing Voltage, Time Delay. Sets the time delay between when the DECS-200 detects a loss of sensing voltage and when the alarm annunciates and the output relay actuates (if programmed). A setting of 0 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Loss of Sensing Voltage, Balanced Level. When all phases of sensing voltage decrease below this setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Loss of Sensing Voltage, Unbalanced Level. When any one of three phases of sensing voltage decreases below this setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. This setting applies to three-phase sensing applications only. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Loss of Sensing Voltage, Transfer to FCR Mode. Enables and disables a transfer from AVR mode to FCR mode when a loss of sensing voltage condition occurs.


Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab

Settings

Settings tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-26 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab

Generator Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint, in primary voltage, for generator overvoltage protection. This setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screens for the location of the specific alarm signal LEDs.) If programmed for the overvoltage function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.


Generator Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator overvoltage protection function. This setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.1 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Exciter Field Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overvoltage protection. This setting is active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm indicator lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If programmed for the field overvoltage function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 1 to 325 Vdc may be entered in 1 Vdc increments.

Exciter Field Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the field overvoltage protection function. This setting is active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.2 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Exciter Open Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter diode. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Exciter Open Diode, Inhibit Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that disables both open- and shorted-diode protection. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Exciter Open Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when an open exciter diode is detected and annunciated. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 10 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Generator Undervoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for generator undervoltage protection. This setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If programmed for the undervoltage function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.

Generator Undervoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator undervoltage protection function. This setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.5 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Exciter Field Overcurrent, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overcurrent protection. This setting is active only when field overcurrent protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field current exceeds the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If programmed for the field overcurrent function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 0.1 to 16.0 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

Exciter Field Overcurrent, Delay. Selects the time delay between when the field current reaches the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting and when the alarm annunciates. The time delay is initiated when the sensed current exceeds the overcurrent setpoint and is inversely proportional to the overcurrent level. The higher the current level, the less time delay before alarm annunciations. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Exciter Shorted Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter diode. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Exciter Shorted Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when a shorted exciter diode is detected and annunciated. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 5 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Loss of Field, Level. Configures the setpoint for loss of field protection. This setting is active only when loss of field protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the kvar value decreases below the negative value of this setting for the duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status tab of the Metering screen or the Analysis screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) Any of the three programmable DECS-200 output relays can be programmed to annunciate a loss of field condition. A setting of 0 to 3,000,000 kvar may be entered in1 kvar increments.

Loss of Field, Delay. Sets the loss of field protection time delay. This setting is active only when loss of field protection is enabled. A setting of 0 to 9.9 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.


Relay Logic

Logic settings for the three programmable relays are divided between two tabs labeled Relay #1, #2 Logic and Relay #3 Logic. Because the settings for each programmable relay are identical, only the Relay #1, #2 Logic tab is illustrated here (Figure 5-27).

Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab

Protection. A programmable relay can be configured to annunciate any of nine active protection functions. These protection functions include:

• Field overcurrent • Field overvoltage • Generator overvoltage • Generator undervoltage • Loss of field

• Loss of sensing voltage • Open exciter diode • Shorted exciter diode • System frequency below 10 Hz

Setpoint Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the active setpoint reaches the upper limit or lower limit.

FCR Mode. Enabling this setting closes the programmable output when the DECS-200 is operating in FCR (Manual) mode.

Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the following limits are reached: overexcitation, stator current, underfrequency or volts per hertz, and underexcitation.

Relay Setting

Contact settings for each of the three programmable relays are adjusted on the Relay Setting tab. Relay Setting tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-28 and described in the following paragraphs.

Contact Status. Configures the output contacts as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC). Normally closed, programmable relay outputs do not remain closed when control power is removed from the DECS-200.

Contact Type. Selects one of three contact types: Momentary, Maintained, or Latched. Selecting Momentary closes or opens the relay contacts for the duration determined by the Momentary Time setting. Selecting Maintained closes or opens the relay contact for the duration of the condition triggering the relay’s change of state. Selecting Latched latches the relay contacts closed or open until the relay is reset by the user.

Momentary Time. When Momentary is selected as the contact type, this setting controls the duration that the contact is open/closed when the relay output is active. A setting of 0.1 to 5 seconds may be entered in 0.05 second increments.


Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab

Data Log

The Data Log screen consists of three tabs labeled Log Setup/Sequence of Events, Logic Triggers, and Level Triggers/Logged Parameters. To view the Data Log screen, click the Data Log button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Data Log.

Log Setup/Sequence Of Events

Log Setup/Sequence of Events tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-29 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab


Data Logging Setup, Data Logging Enable. Enables and disables data logging.

Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trigger Points. Selects the number of data points that are recorded prior to a data log being triggered. A setting of 0 to 599 may be entered in increments of 1.

Data Logging Setup, Post Trigger Points. Displays the number of data points that are recorded after a data log is triggered. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.

Data Logging Setup, Sample Interval. Establishes the sample rate of the data points. When the Generator Frequency setting (System Configuration screen, System Options tab) is 60 hertz, a sample interval of 0.016 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu. When the Generator Frequency setting is 50 hertz, a sample interval of 0.004 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu.

Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that pre-trigger data points are recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.

Data Logging Setup, Post Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that post-trigger data points are recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.

Data Logging Setup, Total Log Duration. Displays the total recording time for a data log and equals the sum of the values in the Pre-Trig Duration and Post Trig Duration fields. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.

View Sequence Of Events Reporting. Clicking this button displays the Sequence of Events Reporting screen (Figure 5-30). Sequence of Events Reporting screen displays and controls are described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting

Report Summary. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events setting area.

Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events setting area.

Reset New Event List. Clicking this button clears all new events from the Event List.

Display the Following Events. The event type displayed in the Event List is controlled by selection made here. Available event-type selections are New, All New and Old, New Alarm, New I/O, and New Mode.

Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows the report to be saved as a text file or printed.


View and Download Data log. Clicking this button displays the Data Logging screen of Figure 5-31. Data Logging screen displays and controls are described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen

Report Summary. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information such as the time and date, station, device and user identification information, and the number of new and total records.

Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events setting area.

Selected Record Information. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information relating to the data log record selected in the Record List. Displayed information includes the number of pre-trigger points, number of post-trigger points, total number of points, the sample interval, and the number of parameters reported.

Data Record List Options, Reset New Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of new records reported in the Report Summary to zero.

Data Record List Options, Reset Total Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of total records reported in the Report Summary to zero.

Data Record List Options, Trigger a Record. Clicking this button manually triggers data record acquisition. A data log cannot be manually triggered unless data logging is enabled on the Log Setup/Sequence of Events tab.

Data Record List Options, Stop Record. Clicking this button ends acquisition of a manually triggered data record.

Data Record List Options, Refresh Summary and List. Clicking this button updates the Report Summary data and Record List with the latest available information.

Data Record List Options, Download Selected Record. Clicking this button downloads the selected record and allows it to be saved as either a text file or a COMTRADE file viewable in BESTwave.

Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows a report to be either saved as a text file or printed.

Print/Save Record. Clicking this button allows a record to be either saved as a text file or printed.

Logic Triggers

Logic Triggers tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-32 and described in the following paragraphs.


Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab

Contact Inputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available DECS-200 contact inputs that can be selected to trigger a data log report. The following contact inputs are available for triggering a data log report:

• 52J/K • 52L/M • Alarm Reset

• AVR • FCR • Pre-Position

• Secondary Enable • Start • Stop

Any combination of contact inputs may be selected.

Relay Outputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the DECS-200 contact outputs that can be selected to trigger a data log report. The following relay outputs are available for triggering a data log report:

• Relay 1 • Relay 2

• Relay 3 • Stop/Start

• Watchdog

Any combination of relay outputs may be selected.

Alarm States. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available alarm conditions that can be selected to trigger a data log report. The following alarm conditions are available for triggering a data log report:

• Exciter field overcurrent • Exciter field overvoltage • Exciter open diode • FCR mode • Generator overvoltage

• Generator sensing <10 Hz • Generator undervoltage • Loss of field • Loss of sensing • Overexcitation limit • Setpoint at lower limit

• Setpoint at upper limit • Shorted exciter diode • Stator current limit • Underexcitation limit • Underfrequency

Any combination of alarm states may be selected.

System Status, Start/Stop. Enables the Start or Stop mode to trigger a data log report. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a Start or Stop mode trigger.

System Status, Soft Start. Enables a data log report to be triggered when Underfrequency protection is active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a Soft Start trigger.

System Status, Underfrequency. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an Underfrequency trigger.

System Status, Control Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a control mode trigger.


System Status, Operating Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when power factor control is active or var control is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an operating mode trigger.

System Status, Load Compensation. Enables a data log report to be triggered when droop compensation is active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a load compensation trigger.

System Status, Limiter Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the underexcitation limiter, overexcitation limiter, or stator current limiter are active. Additionally, a data log report can be triggered when two of the limiters are active. The available limiter mode selections are listed below:

• No Trigger (disables a limiter mode trigger) • OEL (overexcitation limiter active) • Off (no limiters active) • SCL (stator current limiter active) • SCL, OEL (stator current limiter and overexcitation limiter active) • SCL, UEL (stator current limiter and underexcitation limiter active) • UEL (underexcitation limiter active) • UEL, OEL (underexcitation limiter and overexcitation limiter active)

System Status, Voltage Matching. Enables a data log report to be triggered when voltage matching is enabled (On) or disabled (Off). Selecting No Trigger disables a voltage matching trigger.

System Status, Auto Tracking. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the DECS-200 is functioning as the primary controller or the secondary controller in a redundant DECS-200 system. Selecting No Trigger disables an auto-tracking trigger.

Level Triggers/ Logged Parameters

The Level Triggers/Logged Parameters tab (Figure 5-33) consists of a list of parameters that can be selected to trigger a data log report. Up to six parameters can be selected as triggers. Each parameter has Level Trigger Enable buttons that are used to trigger a data log when the parameter increases above the upper threshold setting, decreases below the lower threshold setting, or either increases above or decreases below the upper or lower threshold setting. The available parameters that can be selected to trigger a data log report are listed in Table 5-2.

Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters


Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers Threshold

Parameter Unit of

Measure Lower Upper Increment

Auto Tracking Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1

Auxiliary Input Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Average Gen. Voltage, L-L PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

AVR Error Signal N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1

Bus Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01

Bus Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Control Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1

Cross-Current Input PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Field Current PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Field Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Gen. Apparent Power kVA PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Gen. Reactive Power kvar PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Gen. Real Power kW PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Generator Current Ib PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Generator Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01

Generator Power Factor PF –1 to 1 –1 to 1 0.01

Generator Voltage Vab PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Generator Voltage Vbc PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Generator Voltage Vca PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01

Phase Angle, V-I Degrees –180 to 180 –180 to 180 0.01

PID Integrator State N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1

Var/PF Controller Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1

Metering

The Metering screen consists of two tabs labeled Operation and Alarm/Status. To view the Metering screen, click the Metering button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Metering/Operation.

Operation

Operation tab parameters and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-34 and described in the following paragraphs.

DECS-200 BESTCOMS software provides real-time monitoring of the following data. This data is refreshed approximately once every second. Metering is enabled or disabled through the pull-down menu or by clicking the Metering button.

Real-time metering values on the Operation tab are refreshed approximately once per second. Metering is enabled or disabled through the Metering menu on the menu bar or by clicking the Metering button.

Gen Voltage. Displays three values of generator voltage: Vab, Vbc, and Vca.

Gen Current. Displays phase B generator current.

Field Voltage. Displays the level of field voltage.

Field Current. Displays the level of field current.

EDM SD/OD Ripple. Displays the percentage of ripple detected across the exciter diodes by the exciter diode monitor.

Bus Voltage. Displays the level of bus voltage.

Phase Angle. Displays the phase angle between the generator voltage and current.

Position Indication. Displays the relative position (in percent) of the current setpoint value to the programmed minimum or maximum setpoint.


Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab

Frequency. Displays the frequency of the generator voltage and bus voltage.

Aux DC Input. Displays a value of voltage that is relative to the accessory input voltage or current, depending on the mode selected.

Apparent Power. Displays the apparent power, in VA, being supplied by the generator.

Real Power. Displays the real power, in watts, being supplied by the generator.

Reactive Power. Displays the reactive power, in vars, being supplied by the generator.

Power Factor. Displays the operating power factor of the generator.

Tracking Error. Displays the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the nominal value of the tracking mode to the mode being tracked. For example, if operating in AVR mode with 100 Vac nominal generator voltage and a tracking error of –0.5%, a transfer to another operating mode would cause a decrease in generator output voltage to 99.5 Vac.

Control Mode. AVR and FCR mode status is reported by two indicators. When the DECS-200 is operating in AVR mode, the AVR indicator changes from gray to red. When operating in FCR mode, the FCR indicator changes from gray to green. A button is provided to toggle between AVR and FCR modes.

Operating Status. Three indicators report whether Var mode is active, Power Factor mode is active, or neither mode is active. An option button below each indicator is used to select the corresponding operating mode. When Var mode is active, the Var indicator changes from gray to green. When Power Factor mode is active, the PF indicator changes from gray to red. When neither mode is active, the Off indicator changes from gray to blue. If the control mode is FCR and Var of PF mode is selected, that selection will be ignored by the DECS-200. Even if the Var or PF indicator turns on, the system will not be in those modes unless the DECS-200 52J/K input is open. See Table 5-3 for additional information on 52J/K and 52L/M logic.

Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic DECS-200 Operating Mode 52 L/M 52 J/K Generator Operating Mode

AVR mode active, off-line OEL enabled, no droop, no var/PF

Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone

Droop mode active, on-line OEL enabled, no var/PF

Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or two or more generators islanded (droop or cross-current compensation)

Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL enabled

Open Open Paralleled to utility grid

NOTE: If neither var or power factor modes are selected via the operator interfaces, then the operating mode is droop.


System Operating Status. Two indicators show the start/stop mode status of the DECS-200. in Start mode, the START indicator changes from gray to red. In Stop mode, the STOP indicator changes from gray to green. A button is provided for toggling between Start and Stop modes.

Pre-position Set. Clicking this button adjusts the excitation setpoint to the pre-position value.

Fine Adjustment. Clicking the Raise button increases the active operating setpoint. Clicking the Lower button decreases the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate. The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate.

Alarm/Status

Alarm/Status tab indicators and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-35 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab

System Status. When any of the 15 conditions listed in Figure 5-35 exist, the corresponding indicator changes from gray to red. Clicking the Reset Alarms button resets the system status annunciations. Any condition that remains active will annunciate again after the Reset Alarms button is clicked.

Switch Status. Three indicators provide contact input status. The 52 JK indicator turns on when the 52J/K contact input is open. The 52 LM indicator turns on when the 52L/M contact is open. The Secondary DECS indicator turns on when the SECEN (secondary enable) contact input is closed.

Front Panel LED Signal Status. Six indicators provide remote indication of the front panel LEDs. Refer to Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for information regarding the function of the front panel indicators.

SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES BESTCOMS provides the ability to save DECS-200 settings in a file for reference or future use. Using a settings file can save setup time when configuring multiple units with the same configuration. Settings files may be opened and edited using any text editing application. A settings file can also be printed from BESTCOMS.

Saving Files

A DECS-200 settings file is saved through a Save As dialog box. The Save As dialog box is accessed by using any of three methods:


• Click the Save File button on the tool bar • Press Ctrl + A on the keyboard • Click File, Save As on the menu bar

The Save As dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired folder and save the DECS-200 settings file. DECS-200 setting files are saved with a .de2 extension.

Printing Files

A printed copy of DECS-200 settings can be made for record keeping or as a reference. Settings are printed by accessing the print preview screen. The print preview screen is accessed by using any of three methods:

• Click the Print Data button on the tool bar • Press Ctrl + P on the keyboard • Click File, Print on the menu bar

Executing a print command displays a user information box with fields for adding a title and comments to the printout. Clicking OK or Cancel displays a print preview of the settings. The print preview screen enables you to select a printer and configure the page layout (Print Setup button), print the settings list (printer icon button), and save the list of settings in a text file (Save button). The BESTCOMS software version, the DECS-200 firmware version, and the time and date are printed along with the settings.

Opening/Uploading Files

DECS-200 settings files can be opened by BESTCOMS and uploaded to a DECS-200 communicating with the PC running BESTCOMS. A DECS-200 settings file is retrieved through the BESTCOMS Open dialog box. The Open dialog box is accessed by using any of three methods:

• Click the File Open button on the tool bar • Press Ctrl + O on the keyboard • Click File, Open on the menu bar

The Open dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired settings file and retrieve the settings. Settings can be retrieved into BESTCOMS and uploaded to the DECS-200 or retrieved into BESTCOMS without uploading to the DECS-200. When you execute the Open command, a warning dialog box appears. This dialog box warns you that equipment damage may occur as a result of the changes that were made in the computer file. If you have confidence that no damage will occur, you may send the data to the DECS-200.

If you select Yes, then 17 blocks of DECS-200 setting data are sent to the DECS-200 block by block. Please wait until all 17 blocks of data have been transferred. When power is next applied to the DECS-200 unit, the previously saved settings will become the current settings.

PID WINDOW The PID window of BESTCOMS provides the ability to increase generator stability by changing the PID (proportional + integral + derivative) parameters. PID parameters are calculated automatically after the user selects the generator time constant (T’do) and/or exciter time constant (Texc).

The PID window is accessed by clicking the PID button on the tool bar. This button is enabled only when the Control Gain screen is being viewed and the Stability Range setting is 21.

PID window functions are shown in Figure 5-36 and described in the following paragraphs.

Field Input Data, Generator Information. This setting field is used to enter and display a descriptive name for the selected group of PID settings. The Generator Information field accepts up to 27 alphanumeric characters.

CAUTION

A file data transfer while the DECS-200 is on-line may result in poor system performance or equipment damage. Make sure that the new settings are safe to upload before you transfer the data file.


Field Input Data, Generator Time Constant T’do. The time constant of the generator is entered in this field. The generator time constant and exciter time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki, and Kd. A setting of 1 to 15 may be selected from the pull-down menu.

Field Input Data, Exciter Time Constant Texc. The time constant of the exciter is entered in this field. The exciter time constant and generator time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki, and Kd. The exciter time constant setting range varies according to the generator time constant value selected. The default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six.

Field Output Data, Gain Kp. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kp based on the generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).

Field Output Data, Gain Ki. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Ki based on the generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Te).

Field Output Data, Gain Kd. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kd based on the generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).

Figure 5-36. PID Window

Field Output Data – Gain Kg. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kg based on the generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).

Buttons below the Field Output Data fields enable existing PID records to be deleted (Remove Record), enable calculated setting to be saved in a record (Add to PID List), enable a set of PID parameters to be retrieved from the PID list and invoked, and update the PID settings displayed in the PID window and used by the DECS-200N (Update Setting Screen). Clicking the Close button exits the PID window and returns to the Control Gain screen.

PID List. This area of the PID window displays the groups of available PID settings.

PID Calculations Based On Input Values

The available exciter time constant range is determined by the generator time constant input value. (The default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six (T’do ÷ 6).) The generator time constant input value must be in the range of 1.0 to 15.0 seconds and in 0.05 second increments. When the generator time constant value is 1.00, the available exciter time constant range is 0.03 to 0.50 in 0.01 second increments. When the generator time constant value is 15.00, the available exciter time constant range is 0.30 to 3.00 in 0.01 second increments.

For example, when you set T’do = 2.0 seconds, Texc is 0.33. After specifying the input values, a set of PID parameters (Output Data) is generated automatically. If you set T’do = 5.00 seconds, then Texc will be 0.83 seconds. The calculated KP is 155.47, KI is 138.72, KD is 48, and Kg is 1.

PID parameters can be directly removed from, added to, or modified in the PID List Data. PID parameters may also be saved into a file (pidlist.dat).


Adding To PID List

PID parameters can be added to a list and recalled for operational use and comparison. To add to the list, type the name for the generator (or other appropriate information) in the generator information box. Choose the generator time constant and, if appropriate, the exciter time constant. Observe the PID gain parameters in the Field Output Data boxes. If these gain parameters are appropriate, select the Add to PID List button. To check for the new parameters, pull down the PID Parameters List (click on the down arrow). The new gain and time constant parameters will be displayed.

Removing A PID List Record

PID parameters can also be removed from the list. To remove a list (record), pull down the PID Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain and time constant parameters are displayed. Click the Remove Record button and the listed record is deleted.

Retrieving Existing Data From PID List

To retrieve existing data, pull down the PID Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain and time constant parameters are displayed and highlighted. Click the Get from a list button and the listed record input and output data displays in the text boxes.

TERMINATING COMMUNICATION Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 is terminated by clicking Communications on the menu bar and clicking Close Comm Port.

CAUTION

Improper PID numbers can result in poor system performance or equipment damage.

DECS-200 Setup i

SECTION 6 • SETUP TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 6 • SETUP ................................................................................................................................6-1INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................6-1

Equipment Required ...........................................................................................................................6-1System Data .......................................................................................................................................6-1

SETTINGS ENTRY ................................................................................................................................6-1System Configuration Screen.............................................................................................................6-1Setting Adjustments Screen ...............................................................................................................6-4Protection/Relay Screen...................................................................................................................6-10

OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING ..................................................................................6-13Start/Stop Tests ................................................................................................................................6-13Control Gain Settings........................................................................................................................6-14PID Settings......................................................................................................................................6-14

OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING...........................................................................................6-14FCR Mode ........................................................................................................................................6-14

EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION...................................................................................6-17Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation................................................................................................6-17Limit and Protection Check...............................................................................................................6-18Parallel Operation, Generator On Line .............................................................................................6-18Conclusion Of Testing ......................................................................................................................6-20

Figures Figure 6-1. System Options Tab................................................................................................................6-2Figure 6-2. System Data Tab.....................................................................................................................6-2Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab .......................................................................................................................6-3Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab...................................................................................................................6-4Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab..........................................................................................................................6-5Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab ..............................................................................................................................6-5Figure 6-7. Startup Tab..............................................................................................................................6-6Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab ..........................................................................6-7Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab..................................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab...............................................................6-8Figure 6-11. UEL Tab ................................................................................................................................6-9Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab..................................................................................6-9Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab........................................................................................................6-10Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab .......................................................................................................6-11Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab .......................................................................................................6-12Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab................................................................................................................6-13Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform ..........................................................................................6-15Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance..........................................................................6-16Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain ..............................................................................................6-16Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability ............................................................................................................6-16Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain..................................................................................................6-17Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response .............................................................................................6-17

Tables Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings ....................................................................................................6-1 Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments........................................................................6-12

ii Setup DECS-200


DECS-200 Setup 6-1

SECTION 6 • SETUP INTRODUCTIONThis section provides generic setup and operation procedures for excitation systems using the DECS-200. These procedures are provided only as a guide and are not intended as a replacement for the setup and operation procedures required by a specific system. In these procedures, DECS-200 settings are entered through the BESTCOMS interface. Therefore, a PC operating with BESTCOMS software will need to be connected to the DECS-200 being configured. For information about using BESTCOMS, refer to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.

Equipment Required

The following equipment is required to perform the procedures presented here:

• Two-channel chart recorder or the DECS-200’s oscillography. First channel measures the generator voltage at DECS-200 terminals A1 (E1) and A3 (E3). Second channel measures the field voltage at DECS-200 terminals C5 (F+) and C6 (F–).

• Oscilloscope • Personal computer (PC) running BESTCOMS. The minimum requirements for a PC running

BESTCOMS are provided in Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.• Nine-pin serial communication cable to connect the DECS-200 to the PC.

Basler Electric Application Note 126, while not required, provides helpful information about paralleling circuits. This application note is available for downloading (in PDF format) from the Basler Electric website at www.basler.com.

System Data

Record your system ratings in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings

Generator Ratings Exciter Field Ratings

Voltage: Vac No-Load Voltage: Vdc

Frequency: Hz No-Load Current: Adc

Reactive Power: kvar Full-Load Voltage: Vdc

Rotational Speed: rpm Full-Load Current: Adc

SETTINGS ENTRY The DECS-200 settings entered on each BESTCOMS screen should be evaluated to ensure that they are appropriate for the application. When entering settings, remember to press the Enter key to save individual settings or click the SendToDECS button to save all of the settings on a screen.

System Configuration Screen

As shown in the following paragraphs, enter the desired settings on each tab of the Configuration screen. Review those settings and enable the functions that apply.

System Options

Select the desired system options illustrated in Figure 6-1.

Select the limiter mode ................................................................................................................. ________

Select the sensing configuration................................................................................................... ________

Select the underfrequency mode.................................................................................................. ________

Select the nominal generator frequency ....................................................................................... ________

Enable or disable voltage matching.............................................................................................. ________

6-2 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-1. System Options Tab

System Data

Enter the system PT and CT ratings and configure the internal and external tracking settings illustrated in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2. System Data Tab

Enter the generator PT primary voltage rating.............................................................................. ________

Enter the generator PT secondary voltage rating ......................................................................... ________

Enter the generator CT primary current rating.............................................................................. ________

DECS-200 Setup 6-3

Enter the generator CT secondary current rating ......................................................................... ________

Enter the bus PT primary voltage rating (if applicable)................................................................. ________

Enter the bus PT secondary voltage rating (if applicable) ............................................................ ________

Enable or disable internal tracking................................................................................................ ________

Set the internal tracking delay (1 second is suggested) ............................................................... ________

Set the internal tracking traverse rate (10 seconds is suggested)................................................ ________

Enable or disable external tracking (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) .................. ________

Set the external tracking delay (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ......................... ________

Set the external tracking traverse rate (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ............. ________

Rated Data

Enter the generator and exciter field ratings and exciter-to-generator pole ratio settings illustrated in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab

Enter the rated generator terminal voltage ................................................................................... ________

Enter the rated generator current ................................................................................................. ________

Enter the rated generator power factor......................................................................................... ________

Enter the exciter-to-generator pole ratio ....................................................................................... ________

Enter the rated exciter field voltage ............................................................................................. ________

Enter the rated exciter field current............................................................................................... ________

Auxiliary Input

Configure the accessory input selections and settings illustrated in Figure 6-4.

Select either voltage or current as the accessory input type ........................................................ ________

Select either inner loop (AVR/FCR) or outer loop (var/PF) as the summing type ........................ ________

Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for AVR mode ................................................ ________

Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for FCR mode ................................................ ________

6-4 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab

Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for var mode................................................... ________

Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for Power Factor mode .................................. ________

Enter the droop compensation level for paralleled generators or line-drop compensation .......... ________

Enter the cross-current compensation (reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators ........ ________

Setting Adjustments Screen

Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS Setting Adjustments screen. Figures 6-5 through 6-9 illustrate the settings of each System Configuration screen tab.

AVR/FCR

Configure the AVR mode and FCR mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-5. During commissioning, review setpoints unique for starting; especially review those for the FCR (manual) mode where the system would be started at the no-load excitation value or less. If pre-position is used, set the pre-position values as required.

Enter the AVR setpoint based on the generator terminal voltage ................................................ ________

Enter the minimum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________

Enter the maximum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________

Enter the AVR mode traverse rate................................................................................................ ________

Enter the AVR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... ________

Select either maintain or release as the AVR pre-position mode ................................................. ________

Enter the field current setpoint for FCR mode .............................................................................. ________

Enter the minimum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________

Enter the maximum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________

Enter the FCR mode traverse rate................................................................................................ ________

DECS-200 Setup 6-5

Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab

Enter the FCR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... ________

Select either maintain or release as the FCR pre-position mode ................................................. ________

Var/PF

Configure the var mode and power factor mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-7. If var or PF mode is enabled, the setpoint will be active only after transfer occurs into the specific mode because autotracking always forces a null condition to any operating mode.

Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab

6-6 Setup DECS-200

Enter the var mode setpoint.......................................................................................................... ________

Enter the minimum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal.................... ________

Enter the maximum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal................... ________

Enter the var mode traverse rate .................................................................................................. ________

Enter the var mode pre-position setpoint ...................................................................................... ________

Select either maintain or release as the var pre-position mode ................................................... ________

Set the voltage correction band for var and PF modes ................................................................ ________

Enter the PF mode setpoint .......................................................................................................... ________

Enter the limit for leading power factor ......................................................................................... ________

Enter the limit for lagging power factor ......................................................................................... ________

Enter the PF mode traverse rate................................................................................................... ________

Enter the PF mode pre-position setpoint ...................................................................................... ________

Select either maintain or release as the PF pre-position mode.................................................... ________

Startup

Configure the startup control, underfrequency, and voltage matching settings illustrated in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7. Startup Tab

Enter the soft-start voltage offset used during startup .................................................................. ________

Enter the soft-start time limit used during startup ......................................................................... ________

Enter the corner frequency for generator underfrequency protection........................................... ________

Enter the generator frequency slope for underfrequency protection ............................................ ________

Enter the voltage matching band, expressed as a percent of the rated generator voltage .......... ________

Enter the ratio (percentage) of the generator PT output to the bus PT output ............................. ________

DECS-200 Setup 6-7

OEL Type

Select either Summing Point or Takeover as the overexcitation limiter style. Select the desired OEL setting selection option. OEL Type tab selections are illustrated in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab

Summing-Point OEL

If summing-point overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab

6-8 Setup DECS-200

Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________

Enter the duration for high-level, off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................... ________

Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________

Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________

Enter the duration for high-level, on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................... ________

Enter the medium-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting .................................. ________

Enter the duration for medium-level, on-line overexcitation limiting ............................................. ________

Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________

Takeover OEL

If takeover style overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab

Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________

Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________

Enter the time delay for off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________

Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________

Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________

Enter the time delay for on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________

UEL

Set the underexcitation limiter values based on the generator capability curve. Either internal or customized UEL settings can be applied. When internal UEL settings are used, only one data point is required. When customized UEL settings are used, up to five data coordinates may be entered to match a specific generator curve. Figure 6-11 illustrates the settings of the UEL tab.

DECS-200 Setup 6-9

Figure 6-11. UEL Tab

SCL

Configure the stator current limiter settings illustrated in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab

Enter the high-level current setpoint for stator current limiting ..................................................... ________

Enter the duration for high-level stator current limiting ................................................................. ________

Enter the low-level current setpoint for stator current limiting....................................................... ________

6-10 Setup DECS-200

Protection/Relay Screen

Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS Protection/Relay screen. Figures 6-13 through 6-16 illustrate the settings of each Protection/Relay screen tab.

Options

Enable/disable the protection functions and configure the loss of sensing voltage settings illustrated in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab

Enable or disable generator overvoltage protection ..................................................................... ________

Enable or disable field overvoltage protection .............................................................................. ________

Enable or disable open exciter diode protection........................................................................... ________

Enable or disable generator undervoltage protection ................................................................... ________

Enable or disable field overcurrent protection .............................................................................. ________

Enable or disable shorted exciter diode protection....................................................................... ________

Enable or disable loss of field protection ...................................................................................... ________

Enable or disable loss of sensing voltage protection.................................................................... ________

Enter the time delay for loss of sensing annunciation .................................................................. ________

Enter the balanced loss of sensing threshold ............................................................................... ________

Enter the unbalanced loss of sensing threshold ........................................................................... ________

Enable or disable a transfer to FCR mode when loss of sensing is detected .............................. ________

Settings

Enter the protection settings illustrated in Figure 6-14. Only protection functions enabled on the Options tab need to be configured here.

Enter the threshold for generator overvoltage protection ............................................................. ________

Enter the time delay for generator overvoltage protection............................................................ ________

DECS-200 Setup 6-11

Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab

Enter the threshold for field overvoltage protection ...................................................................... ________

Enter the time delay for field overvoltage protection..................................................................... ________

Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter diode ............................... ________

Enter the percent of rated field current that disables open- and shorted-diode protection .......... ________

Enter the annunciation time delay for open exciter diode protection............................................ ________

Enter the threshold for generator undervoltage protection ........................................................... ________

Enter the time delay for generator undervoltage protection ......................................................... ________

Enter the threshold for field overcurrent protection ...................................................................... ________

Enter the time delay for field overcurrent protection ..................................................................... ________

Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter diode ............................. ________

Enter the annunciation time delay for shorted exciter diode protection........................................ ________

Enter the threshold for loss of field protection .............................................................................. ________

Enter the time delay for loss of field protection............................................................................. ________

Relay Logic

Review the excitation system interconnection drawings and verify the relay configurations. Relay logic settings for each of the three DECS-200 programmable outputs are contained on two tabs with identical configuration options. Only the tab for Relays 1 and 2 is illustrated here (Figure 6-15). Table 6-2 lists all of the available functions that can be assigned to the programmable outputs. Checkmarks may be placed in Table 6-2 to identify the functions assigned to each relay output.

6-12 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab

Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments

RelayFunction 1 2 3

Generator overvoltage

Generator undervoltage

Loss of sensing voltage

Open exciter diode

Loss of field

Field overvoltage

Field overcurrent

Sensing input below 10 Hz

Shorted exciter diode

FCR mode

Upper setpoint limit

Lower setpoint limit

Overexcitation limit

Underexcitation limit

Underfrequency or V/Hz limit

Stator current limit

DECS-200 Setup 6-13

Relay Setting

Configure the contact status and type settings illustrated in Figure 6-16.

Select the Relay #1 contact status as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) ................... ________

Configure the Relay #1 contact type as momentary, maintained, or latched ............................... ________

If the Relay #2 contact type is momentary, enter the open/closed contact duration .................... ________







Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab

OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING In the following tests, control of the machine is demonstrated via BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and user-supplied, remote switches. These tests ensure that the machine is not stressed because of incorrect wiring or faulty components. The parameters listed here are only temporary, initial settings.

Start/Stop Tests

Check the operation of the following start and stop controls.

BESTCOMS Metering Screen, Operation tab .............................................................................. ________

DECS-200 front panel................................................................................................................... ________

Remote switches........................................................................................................................... ________

With excitation off, check AVR/FCR transfer from the BESTCOMS, the front panel, and remote switches ............................................................................................................................ ________

6-14 Setup DECS-200

Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI, or BESTCOMS interface ................................................................................................................... ________

Check the raise and lower limits ................................................................................................... ________

Verify raise/lower limit indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI, or BESTCOMS interface............................................................................................................... ________

Control Gain Settings

Configure the initial gain settings.

Set the generator no-load setpoint in FCR mode (20% of exciter rated current recommended). ________

On the Control Gain screen, enter 200 in the FCR loop gain settings field.................................. ________

Enter the following recommended gain settings for OEL, UEL, and Var/PF.

Set OEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________

Set OEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________

Set UEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________

Set UEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________

Set var/PF KI at 3.......................................................................................................................... ________

Set var/PF Kg at 5......................................................................................................................... ________

PID Settings

On the Control Gain screen, click the tool bar PID button to open the PID window. (The Control Gain screen Stability Range setting must be 21.) Use the PID window to select the correct PID values based on generator time constant T’do and exciter time constant Te. For more information about PID settings, refer to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software, PID Window.

The following suggested settings may be used for AVR and FCR modes when the generator and exciter time constants are unknown.

Set KP at 80 .................................................................................................................................. ________

Set KI at 20 ................................................................................................................................... ________

Set KD at 15.................................................................................................................................. ________

Set AVR Kg at 7 ............................................................................................................................ ________

Set TD at 0.01 ............................................................................................................................... ________

Set FCR Kg at 400........................................................................................................................ ________

Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI or BESTCOMS

OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING For off-line tests with the turbine spinning, the generator circuit breaker is open.

FCR Mode

Initial testing should be conducted in FCR (manual) mode and minimum generated voltage.

Place the DECS-200 in FCR mode............................................................................................... ________

Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position ........................................................................... ________

NOTE

If proper startup is not achieved, increase the value of loop gain (Kg) for AVR and FCR modes.

DECS-200 Setup 6-15

Generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage. (The FCR setpoint was set at 20% of the no-load excitation current in a previous step.)............................................................ ________

Increase the exciter field rated current to 75% of current............................................................. ________

The generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage ......................... ________

Use an oscilloscope to check the field voltage for proper output (see Figure 6-17)..................... ________

Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform

Use a voltmeter to check for correct voltage at generator sensing voltage terminals A1 (E1), A2 (E2), and A3 (E3)..................................................................................................................... ________

Measure the PT secondary voltages ............................................................................................ ________

Use the Raise/Lower control to raise the terminal voltage to the rated generator level ............... ________

Place the Start/Stop switch in the Stop position and let the generator voltage decrease to the residual level ........................................................................................................................... ________

Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position to initiate buildup again in FCR mode .............. ________

Record the voltage buildup characteristic as it reaches full, rated output .................................... ________

Using the BESTCOMS Analysis Screen, perform 5% step change in FCR mode....................... ________

Decrease value, then increase the value. Observe stable performance with chart recorder. ...... ________

Note the Overshoot and settling time. (The FCR output should be very stable.) ......................... ________ Verify that the AVR setpoint tracks the FCR setpoint, then transfer. During this test, use the

Verify that FCR autotracking follows, and is nulled to AVR, then transfer ................................... ________

Use a chart recorder or BESTCOMS oscillography to perform a step response in AVR mode... ________

Review the PID numbers .............................................................................................................. ________

On the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen, turn all limiters off...................................................................................................................................... ________

Perform a 2% voltage step response and record performance to verify stability ......................... ________

Adjust the PID values until desired performance is achieved. If performance appears stable, repeat step change at 5%.. ........................................................................................................... ________

NOTE

In the following steps, verify that, if the pre-position setpoint is enabled, the setpoint changes to the assigned value.

NOTE Assuming Te (exciter field) is known (as applicable for exciter field voltage regulator applications), increasing Kg will decrease the response time of the generator. See Figure 6-21.

6-16 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance

When individual adjustment is needed to further refine performance, Figures 6-22 through 6-25 demonstrate the effect that PID changes have for additional control. These figures have a one second major division.

In Figure 6-22, the generator voltage exhibits one under-damp (overshoot) and one over-damp (undershoot) before settling. The total time (five seconds) is too long. Here KP (proportional gain) needs to be increased.

Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain

Figure 6-23 demonstrates that the terminal voltage has prolonged instability after a voltage step change because there is too much integral gain (I). Integral gain value needs to be decreased.

Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability

DECS-200 Setup 6-17

In Figure 6-24, less overshoot is desired, KD (derivative gain) is increased.

Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain

Figure 6-25 illustrates the final solution. Increased KD (derivative gain) decreases voltage overshoot.

Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response

Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Stop position........................................................................... ________

Place the system in AVR mode .................................................................................................... ________

Monitor the generator voltage soft start time ................................................................................ ________

Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Start position .......................................................................... ________

Use the Raise/Lower control to increase the terminal voltage to the setpoint.............................. ________

EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION In this performance evaluation, temporarily settings will be used to enable the testing of excitation performance without stressing the machine or exceeding ancillary protection device settings. Procedures are provided that will allow you to set your final operating values. This evaluation is a continuation of the previous tests.

Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation

In this test, with the generator set below the rated voltage output, the AVR setpoint will be set above the maximum setting and the system should annunciate an alarm. If an alarm is not annuciated, the OEL gain (KI and Kg) may be set too low. If an alarm is annunciated and the system oscillates, the OEL gain, (KI and Kg) may be set too high.

Enable the Off-Line Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ........................................................................ ________

Determine the field current required to reach 105% of the rated generator voltage. ................... ________

Set the off-line OEL for a value equal to the no load field current ................................................ ________

Lower the terminal voltage to 10% below rated............................................................................ ________

To speed performance in the following test, you may increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms).

On the AVR/FCR tab of the BESTCOMS Setting Adjustments screen, adjust the AVR setpoint to 110% of the rated output. (the AVR Max setting should remain at 105%.) .............................. ________

6-18 Setup DECS-200

If an output relay is programmed to alarm, the output, BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and any remote indicator should annunciate the alarm. ...................................................................... ________

Reset the AVR setpoint to the rated output .................................................................................. ________

Limit and Protection Check

In this test, operation of generator overvoltage protection, generator undervoltage protection, field overvoltage protection, and field overcurrent protection will be verified.

Review the overvoltage protection settings in BESTCOMS ......................................................... ________

Reduce the Generator Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold..................................... ________

Verify that all alarms and annunciation function as programmed................................................. ________

Reset the generator Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value............................................ ________

Raise the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold...................................... ________

Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ............................................... ________

Reset the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the desired value ......................................... ________

Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold ................................. ________

Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ............................................... ________

Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value .................................... ________

Reduce the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the alarm threshold ................................. ________

Verify all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ...................................................... ________

Reset the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the desired value........................................ ________

Parallel Operation, Generator On Line

In this test, the generator is connected to the bus and the phase relationship between the current and sensed voltage is checked. If the polarity of the CT is incorrect, a shorting terminal block can be used to reverse the CT polarity. If sensed voltage has the wrong phasing, the generator breaker must be opened, and the wiring corrected. In the following procedures, overexcitation and underexcitation protection is exercised, and var and power factor performance evaluations are conducted at levels that will not stress the machine. For more information about paralleling circuits, download Application Note 126 from the Basler Electric website at www.basler.com.

Phase Relationship Test

Transfer to FCR mode .................................................................................................................. ________

Parallel the generator with the bus ............................................................................................... ________

Set the machine kilowatt level at approximately 25% of the machine rating at 0 vars ................. ________

Check for phase shift at the voltage and current sensing inputs of the DECS-200. The B-phase current should lag the sensed voltage (between E1 and E3) by 90°. If the phase relationship is correct, proceed with testing. If the phase relationship is incorrect, troubleshoot the system, resolve the problem, and retest as appropriate before transferring to AVR mode................................................................................................................................. ________

Verify that the AVR setpoint is nulled to the FCR setpoint ........................................................... ________

Verify that all null status indicators provide the null indication...................................................... ________

Verify that AVR Pre-position mode is disabled or that the external pre-position contacts are open. ....................................................................................................................................... ________

In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to Manual mode if the excitation voltage increases suddenly.

Transfer to AVR ............................................................................................................................ ________

DECS-200 Setup 6-19

OEL Test

Disable overexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen..................................................................................................................... ________

Set the three on-line, OEL current limits at 15% above the no-load field current, with a 5 second time delay ................................................................................................................... ________

Using a chart recorder, prepare to check the OEL response time. If the response time is too slow, increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test.

Increase field excitation until the field current reaches 125% of the no load field current setting ________

Enable OEL................................................................................................................................... ________

Verify that the response time is within specified limits.................................................................. ________

Enter final OEL values .................................................................................................................. ________

UEL Test

Disable underexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen..................................................................................................................... ________

Set the UEL var limit for 5% vars into the generator..................................................................... ________

Adjust the var level into the generator for 15% at 25% load......................................................... ________

Perform a step response into the UEL limit by enabling underexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen..................................................... ________

Verify stable performance and speed of response ....................................................................... ________

If the response time is too slow, increase the UEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test .. ________

Verify stable performance of the UEL by testing the machine from 25 through 100% real-power loading, underexcited.................................................................................................. ________

Increase the excitation above the UEL limit.................................................................................. ________

Enter the final UEL values ............................................................................................................ ________

Var Test (If Applicable)

Verify that the var setpoint is nulled to the AVR setpoint.............................................................. ________

Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication......................................................... ________

Verify that the var Pre-Position mode is disabled or the external pre-position contacts are open ________

In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR if the excitation voltage increases suddenly.

Transfer to var mode..................................................................................................................... ________

Set the kilowatt level for 25% output............................................................................................. ________

Adjust the var level to 30% of rated .............................................................................................. ________

Monitor the exciter field voltage to determine performance while performing the following step.

Using BESTCOMS, perform 5% step response stability test ....................................................... ________

If necessary, increase the var gain, (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time. Repeat the test..............................................................................................................................

Power Factor Test (If Applicable)

Verify that the PF mode setpoint is nulled to the var mode setpoint ............................................ ________

Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication......................................................... ________

Verify that PF Pre-Position mode is disabled or external pre-position contacts are open............ ________

In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR mode if the excitation voltage increases suddenly.

Transfer to PF ............................................................................................................................... ________

6-20 Setup DECS-200

Adjust PF for 0.9, lagging.............................................................................................................. ________

Perform a step response by changing PF setpoint to 0.85, lagging to determine stability........... ________

If necessary, increase the PF gain (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time. Repeat the test.............................................................................................................................. ________

Conclusion Of Testing

Configure the excitation system with the required parameters. Once satisfactory performance is achieved, save all information to EEPROM.

DECS-200 ModbusTM Communication i

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 7 • MODBUSã COMMUNICATION .........................................................................................7-1

INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................7-1DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................7-1MESSAGE STRUCTURE.......................................................................................................................7-1

Device Address Field..........................................................................................................................7-1Function Code Field............................................................................................................................7-2Data Block Field..................................................................................................................................7-2Error Check Field................................................................................................................................7-2

SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS ......................................................................................................7-2Message Framing and Timing Considerations...................................................................................7-3Error Handling and Exception Responses..........................................................................................7-3

COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................7-3DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE ................................................................................7-4

Read Holding Registers......................................................................................................................7-4Preset Multiple Registers....................................................................................................................7-4Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register) .....................................................................7-5Error Response...................................................................................................................................7-5Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data ....................7-6Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option.............7-6Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode............7-6

DATA FORMATS ...................................................................................................................................7-6Generic Types UI8 and I8...................................................................................................................7-7Generic Types UI16 and I16...............................................................................................................7-7Generic Types UI32 and I32...............................................................................................................7-7Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format.................................................................................................7-8

CRC ERROR CHECK ............................................................................................................................7-9DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE .............................................................................................7-9DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE.............................................................................................................7-10

Holding Registers for Information Category C1................................................................................7-10Holding Registers for Information Category C2................................................................................7-12Holding Registers for Information Category C3................................................................................7-14Holding Registers for Information Category C4................................................................................7-14Holding Registers for Information Category C5................................................................................7-15Holding Registers for Information Category C6................................................................................7-17Holding Registers for Information Category C7................................................................................7-19Holding Registers for Information Category C8................................................................................7-20Holding Registers for Information Category C9................................................................................7-21Holding Registers for Information Category C10..............................................................................7-22Holding Registers for Information Category C11..............................................................................7-23Holding Registers for Information Category C12..............................................................................7-23Holding Registers for Information Category C13..............................................................................7-26Holding Registers for Information Category C14..............................................................................7-27Holding Registers for Information Category C15..............................................................................7-27

Tables Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings ........................................................................................ 7-2 Table 7-2. Timing Considerations For 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit) ............. 7-3 Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes.................................................................................... 7-3 Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description........................................................................................ 7-7 Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents .................................................................................................................. 7-7 Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping................................................................................................................... 7-7

ModbusTM Communication DECS-200ii

Table 7-7. Typical Mapping........................................................................................................................ 7-8 Table 7-8. Floating Point Format ............................................................................................................... 7-8 Table 7-9. Number 123 In Floating Point Format ...................................................................................... 7-8 Table 7-10. Information Category Summary.............................................................................................. 7-9 Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information) ................................................................... 7-10Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering) ..................................................................................... 7-12 Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting) ................................................................................... 7-14 Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters) ................................ 7-14 Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters) ..................................................... 7-15 Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters) .................................................................. 7-17Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Start-up Parameters) .................................................................. 7-19Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters) .................................................................... 7-20Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters) .................................................. 7-21 Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters)............................................. 7-22 Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters) ................................................ 7-23 Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters) .................................................................... 7-23Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters) .................................................. 7-26 Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters) ..................... 7-27 Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II) ................ 7-27

DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-1

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION INTRODUCTIONThis section describes the Modbus™ communication protocol employed by the DECS-200 and how to exchange information with the DECS-200 over a Modbus™ network. The DECS-200 communicates by emulating a subset of the ModiconTM 984 Programmable Controller.

DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL Modbus communications use a master-slave technique in which only the master can initiate a transaction called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS-200 ) responds to the query. When a Modbus master communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master.

Information residing in the DECS-200 is grouped characteristically in categories. The following information categories are maintained by the DECS-200:

C1 - Product Information Registers C2 - Metering Registers C3 - Reporting Registers C4 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 1 C5 - Operating Mode Parameter Registers C6 - Setpoints Parameter Registers C7 - Startup Parameter Registers C8 - Limiter Parameter Registers C9 - Gains Registers C10 - Protective Functions Parameter Registers C11 - Calibration Parameter Registers C12 - Relay Parameter Registers C13 - Communications Parameter Registers C14 - Front Panel Metering Configuration Registers C15 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 2

All supported data can be read or written as specified in the register table. Abbreviations are used in the register table to indicate the register access type. Register access types are read/write (RW) and read only (R -).

All categories except Product Information (C1), Metering (C2), Reporting (C3) and Calibration (C11) can generally be written via a Modbus message as well as read. Categories C1 and C2 are strictly read-only. (Categories C3 and C11 are currently not supported and therefore cannot be read or written.)

When a slave receives a query, the slave responds by either supplying the requested data to the master or performing the requested action. A slave device never initiates communications on the Modbus network and will always generate a response to the query unless certain error conditions occur. The DECS-200 is designed to communicate on the Modbus network only as a slave device.

A master can only query slaves individually. If a query requests actions unable to be performed by the slave, the slave response message contains an exception response code defining the error detected.

MESSAGE STRUCTURE Master initiated queries and DECS-200 (slave) responses share the same message structure. Each message is comprised of four message fields. They are:

• Device Address (1 byte) • Function Code (1 byte) • Data Block (n bytes) • Error Check field (2 bytes)

Device Address Field

The device address field contains the unique Modbus address of the slave being queried. The addressed slave repeats the address in the device address field of the response message. This field is one byte.

Modbus™ Communication DECS-200 7-2

Modbus protocol limits a device address from 1 to 247. The address is user-selectable at installation, and can be altered during real-time operation.

Function Code Field

The function code field in the query message defines the action to be taken by the addressed slave. This field is echoed in the response message and is altered by setting the most significant bit (MSB) of the field to 1 if the response is an error response. This field is 1 byte.

The DECS-200 maps all registers into the ModiconTM 984 holding register address space (4XXXX) and supports the following function codes:

- READ OUTPUT REGISTERS (function code 3), - PRESET SINGLE REGISTER WRITE (function code 6) - PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS (function code 16), and - LOOPBACK DIAGNOSTIC TEST (function code 8) with diagnostic sub-functions:

- Return Query Data (diagnostic code 0), - Restart Comm. option (diagnostic code 1), and - Force Slave To Listen Only Mode (LOM, diagnostic code 4).

DECS-200 Modbus performs all of the above functions when a Modbus message has its unique address which is numbered from 1 to 247. DECS-200 also recognizes a broadcast (group) address of 0. Only functions 16 and 8 are recognized as valid for broadcast. The DECS-200 does not send a response message for a broadcast query.

In listen-only mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The only query that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command (function code 8, diagnostic code 1).

Data Block Field

The query data block contains additional information needed by the slave to perform the requested function. The response data block contains data collected by the slave for the queried function. An error response will substitute an exception response code for the data block. The length of this field varies with each query. See the paragraphs on Register Definitions in this manual for interpretation of register data.

Error Check Field

The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the integrity of the query message contents and allows the master to confirm there validity. This field is 2 bytes.

SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS A standard Modbus network offers two transmission modes for communication: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). The DECS-200 supports only the RTU mode via rear RS-485 serial interface.

Communication settings for the DECS-200 Rear RS-485 port are listed in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings

Setting Programmable Y(Yes) / N(No) Default Value Value Range

Baud Rate Y 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200

Data Size in Bits N 8 N/A

Parity Y None ‘N’=None, ‘O’=Odd, ‘E’=Even

Stop Bits Y 2 1 or 2

Modbus Slave Address

Y 247 0 for broadcast, 1 to 247 for slave

Modbus Response Delay

Time in ms

Y 10 ms From 0 to 200 ms in increments of 10 ms

Communication settings are user-selectable and can be set at installation and altered during real-time operation.


Message Framing and Timing Considerations

When receiving a message, the DECS-200 requires an inter-byte latency of 3.5 character times before considering the message complete.

Once a valid query is received, the DECS-200 waits a specified amount of time as specified in the Modbus Response Delay Time Register (48108) before responding. This Register contains a value from 0 to 200 milliseconds. The default value is 10 milliseconds. The user may set the remote delay time parameter to 0 to minimize response latency.

Table 7-2 provides the response message transmission time (in milliseconds) and 3.5 character times (in milliseconds) for the maximum response message length (225 characters), response to a read query for 125 points and various baud rates.

Table 7-2. Timing Considerations For 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit)

Baud Rate 1 Character Time (ms)

3.5 Characters Time (ms)

Max. Read Register Response Message (255 characters) Transmission Time (ms)

1,200 8.33 29.17 2,124.15

2,400 4.17 14.58 1,063.35

4,800 2.083 7.292 531.165

9,600 1.0417 3.645 265.6335

19,200 0.52083 1.823 132.812

Error Handling and Exception Responses

Any query received that contains a nonexistent device address, a framing error, or CRC error is ignored. No response is transmitted. Queries addressed to a DECS-200 with an unsupported function code, unsupported register references or illegal values in the data block result in an error response message with an exception response code.

Each error response message consists of a slave (DECS-200) address, function code with the high order bit set, error code and error check (CRC) field.

The exception response error codes supported by the DECS-200 are provided in Table 7-3.

Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes

Code Name Meaning

01 Illegal Function The query Function/Sub-function Code is unsupported; query read of more than 125 registers; query “preset multiple registers” of more than 100 registers

02 Illegal Data Address

A register referenced in the data block does not support queried read/write;

For Function Codes 3 and 16 additionally:

1. Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus address space but is not referenced to the highest order 16 bits of the assigned application data (see explanation in 2.7 Data Formats), and

2. The number of registers is too small to hold entire value of all data (variables) assigned to those registers (see explanation in 2.7 Data Formats).

03 Illegal Data Value

A preset register data block contains an incorrect number of bytes or one or more data values out of range.

COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The DECS-200 RS-485 physical interface consists of three positions of a terminal strip with locations for Send/Receive A (A), Send/Receive B (B) and Signal Ground (C).


DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE A detailed description of DECS-200 supported message queries and responses are provided in the following paragraphs.

Read Holding Registers

Query

This query message requests a register or block of registers to be read. The data block contains the starting register address and the quantity of registers to be read. A register address of N will read holding register N+1.

Device Address

Function Code =

03

Starting Address

High

Starting Address

Low

No. of Registers

High

No. of Registers

Low

CRCLow

CRCHigh

The number of registers cannot exceed 125 without causing an error response with the exception code for an illegal function.

Response

The response message contains the data queried. The data block contains the block length in bytes followed by the data for each requested register. For each requested register, there is one Data Hi and one Data Lo. Attempting to read an unused register or a register that does not support a read results in an error response with the exception code for an illegal data address. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.

Maximum response message length obtained for query of 125 registers is 5 + (125 x 2) = 255 bytes.

Device Address

Function Code = 03

Byte Count

DataHigh

DataLow

For each requested register

DataHigh

DataLow

CRCLow

CRCHigh

250 max.

First queried register

High

First queried register

Low

Data High and data

Low

Last queried register

High

Last queried register

Low

Preset Multiple Registers

A preset multiple registers query could address multiple registers in one slave or multiple slaves. If the query is broadcast (device address = 0), no response is required.

Query

A Preset Multiple Registers query message requests a register or block of registers to be written. The data block contains the starting address and the quantity of registers to be written, followed by the Data Block byte count and data. The DECS-200 will perform the write when the device address is the same as the DECS-200 remote address or when the device address is 0. A device address is 0 for a broadcast query.

A register address of N will write Holding Register N+1.

All Modbus Generic Data Formats can be loaded by this function (see Data Formats).

No data will be written if any of the following exceptions occur:

• Queries to write to Read Only or unsupported registers result in an error response with an exception code of Illegal Data Address.

• Queries attempting to write more than 100 registers cause an error response with an exception code of Illegal Function.

• An incorrect Byte Count will result in an error response with an exception code of “Illegal Function.” • A query to write an illegal value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with an

exception code of Illegal Data Value. • Query Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus address space but is not

referenced to the lower order 16 bits of the assigned application data. (See explanation in Data Formats.)


• The number of query registers is too small to hold entire value of all data (variables) assigned to those registers. (See explanation in Data Formats.)

Query message format is:

Device Address Function Code = 10 (hex) Starting Address High Starting Address Low Number of Registers High (total number of registers to be loaded) Number of Registers Low Byte Count (total number of registers to be loaded times 2) Data High Data Low ...Data High Data Low CRC Error Check (Lo, Hi)

Note: The maximum length of a Preset Multiple Registers Query is 9 + (100 x 2) = 209 bytes.

Response

The response message echoes the starting address and the number of registers. There is no response message when the query is a broadcast (device address of 0).

Device Address

Function Code =

10 (hex)

Starting Address

High

Starting Address

Low

Number of Registers

High

Number of

Registers

Low

CRC

Low

CRC

High

Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register)

A Preset Single Register query message requests a single register to be written. The DECS-200 will perform the write when the device address is the same as the DECS-200’s remote address.

QueryDevice Address Function Code = 06 (hex) Address Hi Address Lo Data Hi Data Lo CRC Hi error check CRC Lo error check

The response message echoes the Query message after the register has been altered.

Error Response

Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.

• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data Address.”

• A query to write an out of range value to a register results in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data Value.”

There are several instances of registers that are grouped together to collectively represent a single numerical DECS-200 data value (i.e., floating point data and 32-bit integer data). A query to write a subset of such a register group will result in an error response with Exception Code “Illegal Data Address”.


NOTE Variables changed by this function will not be directly saved to nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). If specific categories (one or more) of data have to be saved to EEPROM, then Holding Register 48161 (Data Id=13001, variable “SaveCommand”) has to be preset after a category has been changed. The exceptions to this rule are only those Holding Registers dealing with communication port RS-485. They will be changed and immediately saved to EEPROM with the function FC16.

Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data

This query contains data to be returned (looped back) in the response. The response and query messages should be identical. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.

Device Address

Function Code =

08 (hex)

Sub-function High

00

Sub-function Low

00

Data High

XX

(don’t care)

Data Low

XX

(don’t care)

CRC

Low

CRC

High

Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option

This query causes the remote communications function of the DECS-200 to restart, terminating an active listen only mode of operation. No effect is made upon primary relay operations. Only the remote communications function is affected. If the query is a broadcast (device address of 0), no response message is returned.

If the DECS-200 receives this query while in the listen only mode (LOM), no response message is generated. Otherwise, a response message identical to the query message is transmitted prior to the communications restart.

Device Address

Function Code =

08 (hex)

Sub-function High

00

Sub-function Low

01

Data High

XX

(don’t care)

Data Low

XX

(don’t care)

CRC

Low

CRC

High

Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode

This query forces the addressed DECS-200 to the listen only mode for Modbus communications, isolating it from other devices on the network.

While in Listen Only Mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The only query that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command (function Code 8, diagnostic code 1).

When the DECS-200 receives the restart communications query, the Listen Only mode is terminated.

Device Address

Function Code =

08 (hex)

Sub-function High

00

Sub-function Low

04

Data High

XX

(don’t care)

Data Low

XX

(don’t care)

CRC

Low

CRC

High

DATA FORMATS DECS-200 data does not need to be converted into any special format for transmission over a Modbus network.

Modbus Registers hold original DECS-200 data of the generic (built-in) data types listed in Table 7-4.


Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description

Generic Data Types

Corresponding built-in data type (Storage Format) Data Range

DataSize in

bytes

Total number of Modbus

Registers to hold data

UI8 UCHAR: unsigned character 0 to 255 1 1

UI6 UINT16: unsigned short integer 0 to 65,535 2 1

UI32 UINT32: unsigned long integer 0 to 4,294,967,295 4 2

I8 CHAR: signed character -128 to 127 1 1

I16 INT16: signed short integer -32,768 to 32,767 2 1

I32 INT32: signed long integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 4 2

R32_23 FLOAT: floating point number From approximately 8.43 x 10-37

to 3.38 x 10384 2

It should be noted that an ASCII string is not a DECS-200 generic data type. An ASCII string will be considered as a sequence of “(string length + 1)” data of I8 type, and for its transmission via a Modbus network “(string length + 1)” holding registers are needed.

DECS-200 data is copied to assigned Holding Register(s) [HR] by the rules presented in the following paragraphs.

Generic Types UI8 and I8

Data of type UI8 or I8 is copied to one holding register (HR). The high (first) HR byte always contains 0, and second (low) HR byte contains the data.

Example:

Assume that the value of UI8 type data is 0x56, and that the data is mapped to HR 44005. The content of HR 44005 will be as listed in Table 7-5.

Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents

HR 44004 Low Byte

HR 44005 High Byte

HR 44005 Low Byte

HR 44006 High Byte

... 0x00 0x56 ...


Data of type UINT16 or INT16 is saved in 1 one holding register. The high data byte is copied to the high HR byte and the low data byte to the low HR byte.

Example:

Assume that the DECS-200 UINT16 or INT16 type data value of 0xF067 is mapped to HR 47003. Data is copied to HR 47003 as shown in Table 7-6.

Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping

HR 47002 Low Byte

HR 47003 High Byte

HR 47003 Low Byte

HR 47004 High Byte

... 0xF0 0x67 ...


Data of type UI32 or I32 is 4 bytes long. The Modbus 4-byte long data generic types use two consecutive registers to represent a data value. The lower numbered holding register contains the low order 16 bits, Low Order word [LO w] and the higher numbered holding register contains the higher order 16 bits, Higher Order word [HO w].


Example:

The UI32 data type, value is 0xE0234567 and is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45003 and 45004) as shown in Table 7-7.

Table 7-7. Typical Mapping

Register 45003 45004

Hexadecimal 4567 E023

Binary 0100 0101 0110 0111 1110 0000 0010 0011

HR 45002 LO byte

HR 45003 HO byte

HR 45003 LO byte

HR 45004 HO byte

HR 45004 LO byte

HR 45005 HO byte

... 45 67 E0 23 ...

Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format

The specific floating-point format matches the floating-point format used for Modicon 984-8 family of programmable controllers.

Its representation in bit format is:

S EEE EEEE E MMM MMMM

MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM

byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 Byte 0

where the “S” is the sign bit for the floating point value: 1 if negative and 0 if positive; The “E” field is the two’s complement exponent biased by 127 decimal; The “M” field is the 23-bit normalized mantissa. The most-significant bit of the mantissa is always assumed to be 1 and is not explicitly stored yielding an effective precision of 24 bits.

The value of the floating-point number is obtained by multiplying the binary mantissa times two raised to the power of the unbiased exponent. The assumed bit of the binary mantissa has the value of 1.0 with the remaining 23 bits providing a fractional value.

Table 7-8 shows the floating-point format.

Table 7-8. Floating Point Format Sign 2's Complement Of (Exponent + 127) Mantissa

1 bit 8 bits 23 bits

The floating point format allows a maximum value of 3.38 x 1038.

Note that bytes 0 and 1 of the floating-point value are stored in the lower numbered register and bytes 2 and 3 are contained in the higher numbered register.

For example: Number 123 in floating point format is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45005 and 45006) as shown in Table 7-9.

Table 7-9. Number 123 in Floating Point Format

Register 45005 45006

Hexadecimal 0000 42F6

Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0010 1111 0110

CAUTION

For DECS-200 Modbus, two consecutive holding registers which are mapped to any of the 4-byte generic data types, are considered to be linked together as one atomic, indivisible unit of information which can be read or written by Modbus message only as one entity (that is, one cannot be read or written without the other).


CRC ERROR CHECK This field contains a two-byte CRC value for transmission error detection. The master first calculates the CRC and appends it to the query message. The DECS-200 recalculates the CRC value for the received query and performs a comparison to the query CRC value to determine if a transmission error has occurred. If so, no response message is generated. If no transmission error has occurred, the slave calculates a new CRC value for the response message and appends it to the message for transmission.

The CRC calculation is performed using all bytes of the device address, function code and data block fields. A 16-bit CRC register is initialized to all 1's. Then, each eight-bit byte of the message is used in the following algorithm.

First, exclusive-OR the message byte with the low-order byte of the CRC-register. The result, stored in the CRC-register, will then be right-shifted eight times. The CRC-register MSB is zero-filled with each shift. After each shift, the CRC-register LSB is examined. If the LSB a 1, the CRC-register is then exclusive-ORed with the fixed polynomial value A001 (hex) prior to the next shift. Once all bytes of the message have undergone the above algorithm, the CRC-register will contain the message CRC value to be placed in the error check field.

DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE Modbus Address space from 40000 to 49999 refers to Functions Code 3, 6 and 16. The DECS-200 uses address space from 47001 to 48250 (1250 registers). This address space is divided into 14 areas referred to as information categories. Table 7-10 provides a statistical summary for each information category.

Table 7-10. Information Category Summary

Information Category ID

Information Category

Total # of Reserved Holding

Registers

HoldingRegister Address Space

NumberOf Used

Registers Access Right

Data Types Mapped To

Registers (Total # Of Variables)

C1 Product Information

250 47001 to

47250

63 R UCHAR: 63

C2 Metering 125 47251 to

47375

55 R FLOAT: 24

UINT16: 7

C3 Reporting

(Status)

125 47376 to

47500

None R None

(for future use)

C4

Control System Configuration

Group 1 60

47501 to

47560 59

58 RW

1 R

FLOAT: 26

UINT16: 7

C5 Operating Modes

60 47561 to

47620

23 16 RW

7 R

UINT16: 23

C6 Setpoints 120 47621 to

47740

94 48 R

46 RW

FLOAT: 45

UINT16: 4

C7 Start-up 60 47741 to

47800

16 RW FLOAT: 8

C8 Limiters 60 47801 to

47860

38 RW FLOAT: 19

C9 Control Loop

Gains

60 47861 to

47920

30 RW FLOAT: 15

C10 Protective Functions

60 47921 to

47980

37 RW FLOAT: 15

UINT16: 7

C11 Calibration 60

47981 to

48040

None

(for future use)

RW

None

(for future use)


Information Category ID

Information Category

Total # of Reserved Holding

Registers

HoldingRegister Address Space

NumberOf Used

Registers Access Right

Data Types Mapped To

Registers (Total # Of Variables)

C12 Relays 120 48041 to 48160

83 RW UINT16: 83

C13 General System

60 48161 to

48220

8 2 R

6 RW

UINT16: 6

UCHAR: 2

C14 FP Metering

Configuration

30 48221 to

48250

3 3 RW UINT16: 3

C15

Control System Configuration

Group II

50 48501 to

48550

10 RW FLOAT: 4

DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE Each data to be transmitted via Modbus network is identified by its holding register(s). The following tables provide the complete list of holding register assignments and descriptions for the DECS-200. There is a separate table for each information category.

Holding Registers for Information Category C1

Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information)

Registers Data Description Access Data

Format

47001 1st character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8

47002 2nd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8

47003 3rd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8

47004 4th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8





47009 Last character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8

47010 1st character of the ASCII string of application program version number

R- UI8

47011 2nd character of the ASCII string of application program version number

R- UI8

47012 3rd character of the ASCII string of application program version number

R- UI8

47013 4th character of the ASCII string of application program version number

R- UI8


R- UI8


R- UI8




Format


R- UI8

47017 Last character of the ASCII string of application program version number

R- UI8

47018 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8

47019 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8

47020 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8

47021 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8





47026 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8

47027 1st character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8

47028 2nd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8

47029 3rd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8

47030 4th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8




47034 Last character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8

47035 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8

47036 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8

47037 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8

47038 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8





47043 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8

47044 1st character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8

47045 2nd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8

47046 3rd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8

47047 4th character of the ASCII string of Boot Program version number R- UI8




Format

47048 5th character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8



47051 Last character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8

47052 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8

47053 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8

47054 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8

47055 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8





47060 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8

47061 1st character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8

47062 2nd character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8

47063 Last character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8

47064 to 47250

Reserved for future C1 data Not supported

Notdefined


Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering)


Format

47251-52 Phase A to B rms generator voltage R - R32_23

47253-54 Phase B to C rms generator voltage R- R32_23

47255-56 Phase C to A rms generator voltage R- R32_23

47257-58 Average of the 3 rms line-to-line voltages R- R32_23

47259-60 Phase B generator current in amps R- R32_23

47261-62 Generator apparent power in kVA R- R32_23

47263-64 Generator real power in kW R- R32_23

47265-66 Generator reactive power in kvar R- R32_23

47267-68 Power factor R- R32_23

47269-70 Generator frequency in hertz R- R32_23

47271-72 Bus frequency in Hz R- R32_23




Format

47273-74 RMS bus voltage in volts R- R32_23

47275-76 Field voltage in volts R- R32_23

47277-78 Field current in amps R- R32_23

47279-80 Var/PF controller output in volts R- R32_23

47281-82 Phase angle between phase B voltage and current in degrees R- R32_23

47283-84 Auxiliary input in volts (PSS input) R- R32_23

47285-86 Current input for load compensation R- R32_23

47287-88 Null balance (tracking error) in percent R- R32_23

47289-90 Error signal to autotracking loop R- R32_23

47291-92 Active controller output R- R32_23

47293 PF state: 0 = leading / 1 = lagging R- UI16

47294 Generator state: 0 = generating / 1 = motoring R- UI16

47295 Status of the Front panel LEDs (bit flags, where 0=off, 1=on for all LEDs except Null Balance and Internal Tracking which are reversed): b0=Null Balance, b1=Tracking, b2=Pre-position, b3=Upper Limit, b4=Lower Limit, b5=Edit, b6-b15=unassigned

R- UI16

47296 Voltage matching status: 0=off / 1=on R- UI16

47297 Protection status bit flags (0=clear, 1=condition present):

b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. Undervoltage, b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL, b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12= gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open, b15=exciter diode shorted.

R- UI16

47298-99 Reserved for future C2 data R- R32_23

47300-01 The active operating setpoint expressed as a percent of its present adjustment range.

R- R32_23

47302 The state of some contact inputs: b0 = 52JK, b1 = 52LM, b2 = Automatic transfer, b3 = External Tracking Enable

R- UI16

47303 Annunciation status bit flags (0=clear, 1=annunciation present):

b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. undervoltage, b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL, b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12= gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open, b15=exciter diode shorted..

R- UI16

47304-05 Reserved R- R32_23

47306 Protection status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present)

b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 – b15 are unassigned

R- UI16

47307 Annunciation status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16




Formatb0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 – b15 are unassigned

47308 to

47375

Reserved for C2 data


Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting)


Format

47376 to 47500


Notdefined


Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)


Format

47501-02 Generator rated frequency, selectable to be 50 or 60 Hz RW R32_23

47503-04 Generator PT primary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 30,000 Vac in 1 volt increments

RW R32_23

47505-06 Generator PT secondary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 Vac in 1 volt increments

RW R32_23

47507-08 Generator CT primary current rating, adjustable from 1 to 60,000 Aac in 1 amp increments

RW R32_23

47509-10 Generator CT secondary current rating, selectable to be 1 or 5 Aac RW R32_23

47511-12 Field current rating, adjustable from 1 to 18 Adc, in 0.1 amp increments

RW R32_23

47513-14 Field voltage connections to isolation box, selectable to be 32V, 63V, 125V, 250V or 375V

RW R32_23

47515-16 Bus sensing PT primary rating, adjustable from 1 to 500,000 Vac in 1 volt increments

RW R32_23

47517-18 Bus sensing PT secondary rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 Vac in 1 volt increments

RW R32_23

47519-20 Reserved RW R32_23


47523-24 Generator rated voltage, adjustable from 85 to 30,000 Vac in 1 volt increments

RW R32_23

47525-26 Generator rated output current, adjustable from 10 to 60,000 Aac in 0.1 amp increments

RW R32_23

47527-28 Generator rated field voltage, adjustable from 1 to 400 Vdc in 1 volt increments

RW R32_23

47529-30 Generator rated field current, adjustable from 0.1 to 9999.0 Adc in 0.1 amp increments

RW R32_23

47531-32 Nominal bus voltage, adjustable from 85 to 500,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23


Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)


Formatincrements

47533-34 Auxiliary input gain for AVR mode, adjustable from 0 to 99 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47535-36 Internal tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1-second increments

RW R32_23

47537-38 Internal tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in 0.1 second increments

RW R32_23

47539-40 Null balance level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 in 0.01 increments RW R32_23

47541-42 Gain for cross current compensation, adjustable from 0 to 30 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47543 Voltage sensing configuration: 0 = 1 phase (A-C) / 1 = 3 phase RW UI16

47544 Auxiliary input summing mode: 0 = Inner Loop for AVR and FCR modes / 1 = Outer Loop for var and PF modes

RW UI16

47545 Control signal output range: 0 or 1 = 0+10V / 2 = -10+10V / 3 = 4-20 mA

RW UI16

47546 Reserved RW UI16

47547 Auxiliary input selection: 0 = voltage input / 1 = current input RW UI16

47548 PSS input mode – reserved for future C4 data RW UI16

47549-50 External tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1 second increments

RW R32_23

47551-52 External tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in 0.1-second increments

RW R32_23

47553 Voltage sensing hardware gain control signal: 0 = gen. PT secondary <= 160 Vac / 1 = gen. PT secondary > 160 Vac

R- UI16

47554-55 Auxiliary input gain for FCR mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47556-57 Auxiliary input gain for var mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47558-59 Auxiliary input gain for PF mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23



Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)


Format

47561 Virtual toggle switch for Start or Stop: 0 = no change / 1 = change state. Holding register 47572 contains unit mode status.

Note: Read value of register 47561 is always 0.

RW UI16

47562 Virtual toggle switch for changing control mode from comm. port between AVR and FCR: 0 = no change / 1 = change state. Holding register 47573 contains Control mode status.

RW UI16


Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)


FormatNote: Read value of register 47562 is always 0.

47563 Switch for changing operating mode via comm. port, to one of three modes, 0=OFF / 1=PF / 2=var. Holding register 47571 contains Operating mode status. Note: Read value of register 47563 is always 4.

RW UI16

47564 Internal tracking status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

47565 Preposition enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

47566 Raise input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

47567 Lower input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

47568 External tracking enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

47569 Limiter Mode options: 0 = both off / 1 = UEL on / 2 = OEL on / 3 = both on / 4 = SCL / 5 = SCL/UEL / 6 = SCL/OEL / 7 = OEL/UEL/SCL

RW UI16

47570 Voltage matching mode: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16

47571 Operating mode: 0 = Off / 1 = PF Control / 2 = var Control R- UI16

47572 Unit mode status: 0 = Stop / 1 = Start R- UI16

47573 Control mode status: 1 = FCR / 2 = AVR R- UI16

47574 Internal (mode-to-mode) tracking status: 0 = Off / 1 = On R- UI16

47575 Reserved for future C5 data R- UI16

47576 Secondary unit enable status: 0 = primary unit / 1 = secondary unit R- UI16

47577 Load compensation mode status: 0 = Off / 1 = Droop / 2 = Line Drop R- UI16

47578 Load compensation mode selection via comm. ports: 0 = Off/1 = Droop / 2 = Line Drop. Holding register 47577 contains Load compensation mode status. Note: Read value of register 47578 is always 0.

RW UI16

47579 Input for resetting front panel annunciations and latched relay annunciations: 0 = no change / 1 = reset. Note: Read value of register 47579 is always 0.

RW UI16

47580 Loss-of-sensing detection enable: 0 = disable / 1 = enable RW UI16

47581 Loss of sensing triggered transfer-to-FCR-mode enable. RW UI16

47582 Under frequency or volts per hertz mode enable. RW UI16

47583 External Tracking enabled: 0 = disabled /1 = enabled RW UI16

47584 Virtual toggle switch for OEL style: 0 = no change, 1 = change

Read back: 0 = summing point, 1 = takeover

RW UI16

47585 OEL option: 0 = Option 1, 1 = Option 2, 3 = Option 3 RW UI16

47586 PF/var option status: 0 = Off, 1 = PF, 2 = var R- UI16

47587 to 47620


Notdefined



Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)


Format

47621-22 FCR (field current regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range is determined by registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)

RW R32_23

47623-24 AVR (automatic voltage regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range is determined by registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)

RW R32_23

47625-26 Var mode setpoint (in kvar); adjustment range is determined by registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)

RW R32_23

47627-28 PF mode setpoint; adjustment range is determined by registers (47705-06) and (47713-14)

RW R32_23

47629-30 Droop setting in percent (of rated generator voltage), adjustable from -30 to 30% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47631-32 FCR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47633-34 AVR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47635-36 Var mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47637-38 PF mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47639-40 FCR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)

RW R32_23

47641-42 AVR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)

RW R32_23

47643-44 Var mode setpoint preposition (in kvar); adjustment range is determined by registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)

RW R32_23

47645-46 PF mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by registers (47705-06) and (47713-14)

RW R32_23

47647-48 FCR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): [ (regs. 47707-08) - (regs. 47699-700) ] / [ (regs. 47631-32) x 10 ]

R R32_23

47649-50 AVR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): [ (regs. 47709-10) - (regs. 47701-02) ] / [ (regs. 47633-34) x 10 ]

R R32_23

47651-52 Var mode setpoint step size (in kvar) = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): [ (regs. 47711-12) - (regs. 47703-04) ] / [ (regs. 47635-36) x 10 ]

R R32_23

47653-54 PF mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10):[ 2 + (regs.47713-14) - (regs.47705-06) ] / [ (regs.47635-36) x 10 ]

R R32_23

47655-56 FCR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated field current), adjustable from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47657-58 AVR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator output voltage), adjustable from 70 to 100% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47659-60 Var mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator VA), adjustable from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23




Format

47661-62 PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum, adjustable from 0.5 to 1.0 in 0.005 increments

RW R32_23

47663-64 FCR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated field current), adjustable from 100 to 120% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47665-66 AVR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator output voltage), adjustable from 100 to 110% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47667-68 Var mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator VA), adjustable from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47669-70 PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum, adjustable from -1.0 to -0.5 in 0.005 increments

RW R32_23

47671-72 Minimum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of rated field current) = 0%

R R32_23

47673-74 Minimum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of rated generator output voltage) = 80%

R R32_23

47675-76 Minimum value for var mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of rated generator VA) = -100%

R R32_23

47677-78 Minimum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum R R32_23

47679-80 Maximum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated field current) = 120%

R R32_23

47681-82 Maximum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum in (in % of rated generator output voltage) = 110%

R R32_23

47683-84 Maximum value for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated generator VA) = 100%

R R32_23

47685-86 Maximum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum R R32_23

47687-88 Step size for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated field current) = 0.1%

R R32_23

47689-90 Step size for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated generator output voltage) = 0.1%

R R32_23

47691-92 Step size for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum in % of rated generator VA) = 0.1%

R R32_23

47693-94 Step size for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum = 0.005 R R32_23

47695 FCR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16

47696 AVR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16

47697 Var preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16

47698 PF preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16

47699-700 FCR minimum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field current:(regs. 47655-56) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100

R- R32_23

47701-02 AVR minimum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. voltage:(regs. 47657-58) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100

R- R32_23

47703-04 Var minimum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated generator R- R32_23




FormatVA:(regs. 47659-60) x rated VA / 100

47705-06 PF minimum setpoint = registers 47661-62 R- R32_23

47707-08 FCR maximum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field current:(regs. 47663-64) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100

R- R32_23

47709-10 AVR maximum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. Voltage:(regs. 47665-66) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100

R- R32_23

47711-12 Var maximum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated gen. VA:(regs. 47667-68) x rated VA / 100

R- R32_23

47713-14 PF maximum setpoint = registers 47669-70 R- R32_23

47715 to 47740


Notdefined


Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Startup Parameters)


Format

47741-42 Soft start level, adjustable from 0 to 90 % (of rated generator voltage) in 1% increments

RW R32_23

47743-44 Soft start duration, adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second increments

RW R32_23

47745-46 Underfrequency corner frequency, adjustable from 15 to 90 Hz in 0.1 Hz increments

RW R32_23

47747-48 Slope of underfrequency curve, adjustable from 0.00 to 3.00 V/Hz in 0.01 V/Hz increments

RW R32_23

47749-50 Width of voltage matching window, adjustable from 0 to 20 % (of rated generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments

RW R32_23

47751-52 Voltage matching reference, adjustable from 90 to 120 % (of rated generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments

RW R32_23

47753-54 Fine voltage adjust band, adjustable from 0 to 30 % (of rated generator voltage) in 0.1 % increments

RW R32_23

47755-56 Time delay for loss of sensing, adjustable from 0 to 3 seconds in 0.1-second increments

RW R32_23

47757-58 Loss of sensing level under balanced conditions, adjustable from 0% to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47759-60 Loss of sensing level under unbalanced conditions, adjustable from 0% to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments

RW R32_23

47761 to 47800


Notdefined



Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)


Format

47801-02 On-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 30 Adc in 0.1-amp increments

RW R32_23

47803-04 Time allowed at on-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47805-06 On-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 Adc in 0.1-amp increments

RW R32_23

47807-08 Time allowed at on-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47809-10 On-line low OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 15 Adc in 0.1-amp increments

RW R32_23

47811-12 Internal UEL curve’s starting point (reactive power level at 0 kW). This should be 0 to allow the programmable UEL curve to be used.

RW R32_23

47813-14 Time allowed at off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 seconds in 1-second increments

RW R32_23

47815-16 Off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 30 Adc in 0.1-amp increments

RW R32_23

47817-18 Off-line OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 15 Adc in 0.1-amp increments

RW R32_23

47819-20 1st UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kW)

RW R32_23

47821-22 2nd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kW)

RW R32_23

47823-24 3rd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kW)

RW R32_23

47825-26 4th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kW)

RW R32_23

47827-28 5th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kW)

RW R32_23

47829-30 1st UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kvar)

RW R32_23

47831-32 2nd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kvar)

RW R32_23

47833-34 3rd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kvar)

RW R32_23

47835-36 4th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kvar)

RW R32_23

47837-38 5th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full rating (in kvar)

RW R32_23

47839-40 SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A in 0.1 A increments

RW R32_23


Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)


Format

47841-42 Time allowed at SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds in 0.1 second increments.

RW R32_23

47843-44 SCL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A, in 0.1 A increments

RW R32_23

47845-46 Takeover OEL offline high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in 0.1 A increments

RW R32_23

47847-48 Takeover OEL offline low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in 0.1 A increments.

RW R32_23

47849-50 Takeover OEL offline time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20, in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47851-52 Takeover OEL online high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in 0.1 A increments.

RW R32_23

47853-54 Takeover OEL online low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in 0.1 a increments.

RW R32_23

47855-56 Takeover OEL online time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47857 to 47860


Notdefined


Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters)


Format

47861-62 Stability setting group number: 1 to 21, where groups 1 to 20 are preprogrammed values and group 21 is user programmable

RW R32_23

47863-64 AVR/FCR mode proportional gain (Kp), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47865-66 AVR/FCR mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47867-68 AVR/FCR mode derivative gain (Kd), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47869-70 OEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47871-72 PF mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47873-74 Var mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47875-76 FCR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47877-78 AVR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47879-80 Var mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47881-82 PF mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23


47883-84 OEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47885-86 UEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47887-88 UEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47889-90 Voltage matching loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47891-92 AVR mode derivative time constant, adjustable from 0 to 1 in 0.01 increments

RW R32_23

47893 to 47905


Notdefined

47906-07 SCL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47908-09 SCL loop gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47910-20 Reserved for future C9 data Not supported

Notdefined


Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters)


Format

47921-22 Field overvoltage level, adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1-volt increments

RW R32_23

47923-24 Field overcurrent base level, adjustable from 0.1 to 16 Adc in 0.1-amp increments

RW R32_23

47925-26 Stator undervoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt increments

RW R32_23

47927-28 Stator overvoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt increments

RW R32_23

47929-30 Field overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 seconds in 0.1-second increments

RW R32_23

47931-32 Field overcurrent time dial multiplier, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 increments

RW R32_23

47933-34 Stator undervoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.5 to 60 seconds in 0.1-second increments

RW R32_23

47935-36 Stator overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 seconds in 0.1-second increments

RW R32_23

47937 Field overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47938 Field overcurrent alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47939 Stator undervoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47940 Stator overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16






Format

47946-47 Exciter open diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments.

RW R32-23

47948-49 Exciter open diode time delay, adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds in 0.1 second increments.

RW R32-23

47950 Exciter open diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47951-52 Exciter shorted diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments.

RW R32-23

47953-54 Exciter shorted diode time delay, adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds in 0.1 second increments.

RW R32-23

47955 Exciter shorted diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47956-57 Exciter diode protection disable level, adjustable from 0% to 100% of rated exciter field current in 0.1% increments.

RW R32_23

47958 Loss of field alarm enable: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16

47959-60 Loss of field level, adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar increments

RW R32_23

47961-62 Loss of field delay (in seconds): adjustable from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds RW R32_23

47963 to 47980


Notdefined


Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters)


Format

47981 to 48040


Notdefined


Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)


Format

48041 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled

b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, b3 = gen. Overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 = gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14, b15 are unassigned.

RW UI16

48042 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned

RW UI16







Format











48056 16th annunciation enable for Relay 1 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16

48057 Output for Relay 1: 0 = contact open / 1 = contact closed R UI16

48058 Relay 1 annunciation: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = latched RW UI16

48059 Relay 1 contact sense: 0 = closed for normal operation, open for annunciation; 1 = open for normal operation, closed for annunciation

RW UI16

48060 Relay 1 output duration for momentary type, adjustable 2 to 100 in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05-second increments)

RW UI16

48061 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 = gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are unassigned.

RW UI16

48062 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16
















Format


48076 16th annunciation enable for Relay 2 – Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16


48078 Relay 2 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = latched

RW UI16


RW UI16

48080 Relay 2 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05 second increments)

RW UI16

48081 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 = gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are unassigned.

RW UI16

48082 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16














48096 16th annunciation enable for Relay 3 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16


48098 Relay 3 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = latched

RW UI16


RW UI16

48100 Relay 3 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 s in 0.05 s increments)

RW UI16




Format
























48124 to 48160


Notdefined


Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters)


Format

48161 Save data to EEPROM flags:

0x0001 saves C4 and C6; 0x0002 saves C5 and C7; 0x0004 saves C6; 0x0008 saves C5 and C7; 0x0010 saves C8; 0x0020 saves C9; 0x0040 saves C10; 0x0080 saves C11; 0x0100 saves C12; 0x0800 saves C14. (Changes in C13 are automatically saved.)

RW UI16

48162 Comm. Port 0, front RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200

R UI16



Format

48163 Comm. port 1, rear RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

R UI16

48164 Comm. port 2, rear RS-485, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

RW UI16

48165 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, Parity: ‘O’ = 79 = 0x4F for Odd Parity,‘E’ = 69 = 0x45 for Even Parity, and ‘N’ = 78 = 0x4E for No Parity

RW UI8

48166 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, stop bits, selectable to be 1 or 2 RW UI8

48167 DECS-200 polling address (Modbus slave address), selectable from 1 to 247 (slave address)

RW UI16

48168 Modbus Response Time Delay, adjustable from 10 to 200 ms in 10 ms increments

RW UI16

48169 to 48220

Reserved for future C13 Not supported

Notdefined


Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters)


Format

48221 1st metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16

48222 2nd metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16

48223 3rd metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16

48224 to 48250


Notdefined


Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II)


Format




48505-07 Reserved RW UI16

48505-08 Reserved RW UI16

48505-09, 10

EDM Pole Ratio (1 to 10 in steps of 0.01, Enter 0 if unknown) RW R32_23

DECS-200 Maintenance 8-1

SECTION 8 • MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE The only preventive maintenance required for the DECS-200 is the periodic checking of DECS-200 connections to ensure that they are clean and tight.

WARRANTY AND REPAIR SERVICE DECS-200 units are manufactured using state-of-the-art, surface-mount technology. As such, Basler Electric recommends that no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric.

The DECS-200 is warranted against defective material and workmanship for 18 months from the date of shipment from Basler Electric. Units submitted for warranty repair should be returned to Basler Electric’s Highland, Illinois facility, freight prepaid, with a complete description of the application and the reported problem. Prearrangement with either the nearest Basler Electric sales office or with the Technical Sales Support department at Basler Electric will assure the fastest possible turnaround time.

TROUBLESHOOTINGThe following troubleshooting procedures assume the excitation system components are properly matched, fully operational, and correctly connected. If you do not obtain the results that you expect from the DECS-200, first check the programmable settings for the appropriate function.

DECS-200 Appears Inoperative

If the DECS-200 does not power up (no backlighting on front panel display), ensure that the control power applied to the unit is at the correct level. If dc control power is being used, verify that the polarity is correct. Units with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number XC have an input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz). If the correct control power is being applied, return the unit to Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.

Display Blank or Frozen

If the front panel display (LCD) is blank or frozen (does not scroll), remove control power for about 60 seconds and then reapply control power. If the problem occurred during software uploading, repeat the upload procedures as described in the associated instructions. If the problem persists, return the unit to Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.

Generator Voltage Does Not Build

Check the DECS-200 settings and system voltages for the following:

a. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage b. Generator PT secondary voltage c. AC voltage on the DECS-200 operating (bridge) power terminals (C5 (A), C6 (B), and C7 (C))

Check the DECS-200 soft start bias and soft start time settings. If necessary, increase the generator soft start bias and decrease the generator soft start time.

If the generator voltage still does not build, increase the value of Kg.

Temporarily disable the overexcitation limiter.

Low Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:

a. AVR voltage setpoint b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage

NOTE

When both ac and dc control power is used, an isolation transformer must be connected between the ac voltage source and the ac control power terminals of the DECS-200.

8-2 Maintenance DECS-200

c. Generator PT secondary voltage d. Overexcitation limiter (not activated) e. Accessory inputs (should be zero) f. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled) g. Cut-in underfrequency setting (should be below the generator operating frequency)

If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

High Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:

a. AVR voltage setpoint b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage c. Generator PT secondary voltage d. Accessory inputs (should be zero) e. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)


Generator Voltage Unstable (Hunting)

Verify that the exciter power converter is working correctly by substituting the appropriate battery voltage in place of the DECS-200 drive voltage. If the problem is caused by the DECS-200, check the gain settings for the specific mode of operation selected.


Protection or Limit Annunciation

If a protection function or limiting function is annunciated, check the associated setting values.


HMI Meter Readings Incorrect

If your PF, var, or watt readings are significantly different from the expected readings for a known load, verify that the B-phase current sensing input of the DECS-200 is connected to a CT on phase B and not phases A or C.

No Communication

If communication with the DECS-200 cannot be initiated, check the connections at the communication ports, the baud rate, and supporting software.

DECS-200 Reboots Frequently

If a single DECS-200 control power source is used and the power source is supplying less than the minimum required voltage or is fluctuating below the minimum required voltage, the DECS-200 will reboot. Increase the control power source voltage so that it is within the specified operating range. Units with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number XC have an input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz).

VISA Written by: Mathieu Pierson 6-1103-91-297 Checked by: Mathias Remy Page 1 sur 18 Revision: C DATE: 31/08/2005

P.A.E. LES PINS 67319 WASSELONNE Cedex – France

Tel.: +33 3 88 87 10 10 Fax: +33 3 88 87 08 08

Email: [email protected]

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

FOR

GENERATOR EXCITATION SYSTEM

Equipment specification for:

Standard dual DECS 200 Mounting plate

BASLER ELECTRIC PART NUMBER:

6-1103-00-297


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 PICTURE ...................................................................................................................................................3

2 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................3

3 OTHER COMPONENTS AND THEIR MAIN FUNCTIONS.......................................................................5

4 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM: ...........................................................................................................6

4.1 Flow chart: .............................................................................................................................................7

4.2 How to start the system:........................................................................................................................8

4.3 Other functions: .....................................................................................................................................9

4.4 Voltage Sensing circuit ........................................................................................................................11

4.5 Short-circuit support ............................................................................................................................11

4.6 Parallel operation and cross current compensation circuit:.................................................................124.6.1 Voltage droop control ......................................................................................................................134.6.2 Cross current compensation ...........................................................................................................134.6.3 VAR/PF Regulation Mode...............................................................................................................14

4.7 Voltage matching circuit ......................................................................................................................14

5 OUTPUT CONTACTS .............................................................................................................................14

5.1 Output relays #2 and #3 ......................................................................................................................14

6 COMMISSIONING...................................................................................................................................16

7 TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................................................16

8 OPTION: PMG.........................................................................................................................................18

8.1 Example of a three phase PMG connection:.......................................................................................18

8.2 Modifications that have to be made.....................................................................................................18

9 SUMMARY OF MODIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................18


1 Picture

2 Introduction

This specification describes a complete regulation system delivered on a mounting plate, which includes: 2 A.V.R. (Automatic Voltage Regulator) DECS 200 1 over voltage relay type BE3-59T 1 contactor K1 (for the control of the excitation) 1 contactor K2 (for the control of the boost system) 2 relays K3 and K4 (for the operating modes of the DECS 200) 1 set of relays for the logic control


2 contactors with mechanical latching coils (KM = Master AVR and KB = Back-up AVR) 1 discharge resistor R1 1 excitation circuit-breaker QF1 and its associated emission trigger 2 Inrush current reduction modules RE3 & RE4

All the necessary documents (electrical and mechanical drawings and the equipment list) are listed hereunder (drawing number 6-1103-91-297):

I - Cover sheet II - Summary 11 - Definition of symbols 12 - Customer sensing connections 13 - Customer power connections & cross current compensation 20 - DECS 200 custom mounting plate 40 - Equipment list 45- Name plates and name tags 50 - Power circuit 51 - Control circuit 52 - Control circuit 53 - Information report 54 - Master AVR control circuit 55 - Back-up AVR control circuit 56 - Auxiliary terminals 57 - Auxiliary terminals

For this system, the mounting plate has to be powered with an external 24Vdc source for the relays, contactors and A.V.R. DECS 200.

The main component used on this application is the Automatic Voltage Regulator (A.V.R.) DECS 200 (Digital Excitation Control System). Major features of this controller are listed below: - Micro-processor based design - PWM power stage with an output current of up to 15 A, forcing of 20 A for 1 min. and 30A 10s - Output voltage of up to 180 Vdc nominal and 300 Vdc forcing for 10 sec. (max .values based on 277Vac

power input). - Power input voltage range of up to 277 Vac, single or 3 phase - Voltage sensing inputs (60 to 660) Vac with 0.5 V resolution:

- 1 single or 3 phase voltage input for Generator voltage - 1 single phase voltage input for Bus voltage - Current sensing inputs single phase for metering and reactive load sharing:

- 1 CT input (1A or 5A) for metering & Reactive Droop Compensation - 1 CT input (1A or 5A) for Cross Current Compensation - ± 0.25 % steady voltage regulation. True RMS sensing

(100 or 200 V -15/+20% @ 50 Hz & 120 or 240 V ± 20 % @ 60 Hz) 10V and 10Hz minimum sensing voltage and frequency.

- Soft start, Voltage build up with an adjustable ramp - Voltage matching (Single phase bus voltage sensing) - There are four modes of regulation:

- AVR mode - VAR regulation mode - Power Factor regulation mode - Field Current Regulation mode - Generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation ± 10 % and reactive differential compensation

(cross-current function). - 4 control modes (Automatic voltage regulation (AVR), manual or field current regulation (FCR), power

factor (PF) regulation, and reactive power (VAR) regulation.


- OEL (Over-Excitation Limiter) and UEL (Under-Excitation Limiter) and V/Hz limitations with UF (Under-Frequency) alarm

- Set-point control: Raise / Lower controls with adjustable set-point range of 85 – 110% for automatic channels and 0 – 110% for the manual channel. 4 – 20mA, 0 – 10V, or ±10V control with programmable range of adjustment and better than 0.1% resolution Pre-position setpoint for each regulation mode.

- Internal Auto-tracking of manual mode to automatic mode and dual unit auto-tracking - External Auto-tracking, in back-up mode, of a redundant DECS200. - Protection functions (Field Over-voltage, field over-current, Generator over-voltage, Generator under-

voltage, and loss of sensing). - Metering from front panel or PC for 3 x V, Ib, kVA, kVAR, kW, PF, DC volt and amps, Frequency (Gen

& Bus), A-B bus voltage - Front panel or PC programming/set-up and system control. PC programming is made via a front panel

RS232 port. Software is Windows 95 compatible. - 3 programmable output contacts and serial communications via rear mounted RS232 and RS 485 ports.

Modbus protocole, and 3 contacts dedicated. - Operates from a 24Vdc power source.

3 Other components and their main functions

In addition, there are also other main components that are listed hereunder:

K1 (on page 52, column 5): This contactor controls the excitation On and Off on this system. K1 is a 4x28A contactor, with a 24Vdc coil. Three poles are used to control the power of the voltage regulators DECS 200 (contacts 1 to 6, on page 50, column 19). The fourth pole (contact 7-8, on the same page, column 13), is used to bypass the discharge resistor R1. If this contactor is energized (please go to the section 4 for further information), the voltage regulator will be powered, the discharge resistor R1 is bypassed and the boost circuit is enabled (on page 50, column 05).

R1 (on page 50, column 15): This resistor is used for the fast de-excitation of the system. When the excitation is ON, this resistor is not included in the field circuit (no effect). When the AVR is off, R1 is inserted in the DC output circuit of AVR DECS 200: the excitation is totally disconnected and the excitation current of the exciter is dissipated in the discharge resistor via the free wheel diode, which is inside the DECS 200. This will cause a faster de-excitation.

QF1 (on page 50, column 19): This circuit-breaker (C-Curve) is used to protect the system against over current. The output contact, which gives the status of this MCB, is connected to terminals XC/09_XC/10 and XC/13_XC/14 (please refer to the page 53, columns 20 and 25). There is also one emission trigger connected on this MCB (see below for the explanations).

QF1 (on page 50, column 19): This emission trigger (labeled QF1) is connected on the circuit-breaker QF1 (on the side). When there is an over voltage detected by the relay RP3 (BE3-59T), the above mentioned circuit-breaker QF1 will open -> The excitation will be OFF. If QF1 opens during operation (either by an over voltage or by an over current), the Generator Circuit Breaker has to open thus preventing the generator from pole slipping (under reactance).

RP1 / RP2 (on page 50, columns 9-11-12): This over excitation relay (BE3-74SH-7G5E1), which is connected to the shunt 15A/100mV, senses the excitation current on the field exciter. On this application, the 100mV signal is fed to the BE3-74SH. If the current goes above the preset point (between 40 and 120% of 15Adc), the millivolt sensing alarm relay will be energized. A red LED indicates the state of the relay and a green LED indicates the condition of the power supply. The two output contacts are connected respectively to the logic circuit and to the terminals XC/19_XC20 and XC/21_XC22.


RS1 (on page 50, column 15): This shunt gives an indication of the excitation current to the over excitation relays RP1 and RP2. The output (voltage in mVdc) is directly proportional to the current, which flows through it. For 15Adc, the output will be 100mV. For 7.5Adc, the output will be 50mVdc.

RP3 (on page 50, column 28): This over voltage relay is connected to the sensing circuit (same circuit as for the A.V.R. DECS 200). This BE3 ac relay operates when the externally adjustable trip point is reached. There is also a time delay control with an adjustment from 200ms to 10 seconds. When the input signal exceeds the trip point (adjusted from 120 to 150Vac), the relays energized. A red LED indicates the state of the relay and a green LED indicates the condition of the power supply. The two output contacts are connected respectively in series with the emission trigger QF1, and to the terminals XC/1_XC/2 (on page 53, column 3). When there is an over voltage detected by this BE3 relay, the emission trigger will be energized and the circuit-breaker QF1 will be OFF.

During commissioning, the time delay on this relay could be set near 0 second, especially when starting up for the first time. When the generator has been successfully commissioned, the time delay can be adjusted for from 2 or 5 seconds. The other external protection will take over and the BE3-59T relay will still remain as a back-up device.

G1 / G2 (on page 50, columns 03 and 14): The three rectifier bridge G1 is used to convert the amount of the AC current into a DC current, in order to be used on the exciter field (DC current and voltage). The single phase rectifier bridge G2 is used as an OR gate between DECS and compound outputs.

K2 (on page 52, column 12): This contactor controls the short circuit excitation conditions. K2 is rated at 4x28A, with a 24Vdc coil. It is controlled by the DECS 200 voltage regulators (first output relay 1). Please see the section 4.5 to see how to calibrate the output relay#1 on the DECS 200 voltage regulators.

K3 / K4 (on page 51, columns 35 and 37): Those relays control the regulation mode of the voltage regulator DECS 200. K3 is monitoring by the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) (one auxiliary contact has to be connected on terminal XB/07_XB/08, on page 51, column 35). When this contact is closed, K3 will be energized. K4 is monitoring by the Utility Circuit-Breaker (one auxiliary contact has to be connected on terminal XB/09_XB/10, on page 51, column 37). When this contact is closed, K4 will be energized.

KM / KB (on page 51, columns 11 and 19): Those two contactors are controlling the use of either the Master or the Back-up AVR DECS 200.

o By closing the external contact (connected to terminals XB/01_XB/02), the contactor KM is energized and contactor KB is de-energized -> Master DECS 200 is ON and Back-up DECS 200 is OFF. If this mounting plate is energized for the very first time and before closing the excitation contactor K1, the external push button “Master” has to be active -> the contactor KM is now selected and the Master AVR is ready to operate. The information status of this contactor is reported on terminals XC/23_XC/24.

o By closing the external contact (connected to terminals XB/03_XB/04), the contactor KB is energized and contactor KM is de-energized -> Back-up DECS 200 is ON and Master DECS 200 is OFF. The information status of this contactor is reported on terminals XC/17_XC/18.

RE3 & RE4 (on page 50, column 19 to 23): This device is an inrush current reduction module (ICRM). It avoids all undesired trip of the circuit breaker when the excitation contactor is closed. When the excitation is engaged, there will be an inrush current, with an overcurrent that may cause a circuit breaker trip.

4 Description of the system:


4.1 Flow chart:

BACK-UP AVR DECS-200 SELECTED

A'

OVEREXCITATION 1st LEVEL DETECTED

BY RP1

YES

FAULT CONDITION

ALARM CONDITION

NORMAL CONDITION

B

ALARM

NO

MASTER AVRWATCHDOG ON

NO

THE SYSTEM

WORK PROPERLY?

DOES

MASTER AVRSELECTED?

C'

NO

YES

BACK-UP AVR?

MANUAL CHANGE OVER TO

EXCITATION ON

YES

NO

MASTER AVR

SELECT THE

ON THE PLATE

APPLY 24Vdc

SYSTEM START

T=10s

RESET


RESET

SOLVE THE PROBLEM

1) REPLACE THE MASTER AVR2) BACK-UP AVR=ABNORMAL CONDITION

THE GENERATOR IS RUNNING

OVER TOBACK-UP AVR?

MANUAL CHANGE

OR OVEREXCITATION

WATCHDOGON BACK-UP AVR

2nd LEVEL?

OPEN DJA

"EXCITATION OFF"

SELECT MASTER AVR

A

NO

B'

YES

YES

NO

OR OVEREXCITATION1st LEVEL?

YES

WATCHDOGON MASTER AVR NO

C

4.2 How to start the system:

When the first start-up is made, the generator protection relays must be already connected and tested with the secondary injection test. If there is a problem in the excitation circuitry, these relays will protect the generator and the AVR from faults.


At first, some details have to be checked. You will find hereunder some details: - Check if the external control voltage is applied on terminals XD08_XD09 (the DC voltage has to be

24Vdc). The both DECS 200 will be energized and the green LEDS on the BE3-59T has to be illuminated.

- Check all the connections (please refer to the electrical drawings 6-1103-91-297 sent with the equipment).

- Check if there is a voltage present between the terminals XD/03 and XD/04 (or between XD/04 and XD/05). This can be done by adding a voltmeter and connect it on the above mentioned terminals. The power supply of the mounting plate comes from the power transformer labeled T1 (or from the PMG or the auxiliary windings).

- The excitation of the generator has to be OFF (either by opening the circuit-breaker QF1 or by closing the external contact (momentary) connected on terminal XB/25 (on page 55, column 31). The excitation ON push button, connected on terminal XB/26 (same page, column 32) must not be activated. For safety reason, when the excitation circuit-breaker is open (QF1), there is no possibility to start the system (excitation ON). When the circuit-breaker (QF1) is closed, the operator can excite the generator (excitation ON).

- Start the engine and make sure the speed control is working properly. - Measure the voltage from the voltage sensing circuit, between terminals XA/06 and XA/07, and between

XA/07 and XA/08, as well as the DECS 200 A.V.R. power supply circuit on terminal XD/03-04 and XD/04-05. The residual voltage developed by the generator should be approximately 5-10% of the nominal voltage in each circuit. If this is not the case, the DG must be shut down and all the sensing and power circuits must be checked.

- Close the excitation circuit-breaker (QF1), close the external contact (Master AVR) connected on terminal XB/1_XB2 and the external contact (Excitation ON) connected on terminal XB/26. The voltage will start to build-up. If the voltage does not stabilize at nominal level or if it overshoots excessively, the protection relays should shut the excitation down. If this does not happen within seconds, use the excitation circuit-breaker (QF1) to shut down the excitation.

4.3 Other functions:

If the operator wants to: - Change the setpoint of the Master voltage regulator DECS 200 (RE1):

o Either close the contact on terminal XB/16 (raise regulator setpoint), or on XB/17 (lower regulation setpoint) can change the setpoint.

o An analog input signal can be applied on terminals XF/9 and XF/10. Please note that this setpoint can be adjusted either with a +/-10Vdc or a 4-20mA signal (be careful: only one of those 2 types of signals has to be used at the same time). More, the +/- 10Vdc can be connected to some other protective devices, like the PSS-100 (Power System Stabilizer). If this is the case, there is no possibility to change the setpoints of the AVR’s via another external +/-10 Vdc control voltage or 4-20mA circuit. By default, this mounting plate is connected in order to work with a 4-20mA signal.

- Transfer from the automatic to the manual channel (FCR mode) or vice versa, the contact on terminals XB/14 (transfer to the FCR mode – Field Current Regulation or Manual mode), or on XB/15 (transfer to the automatic channel) has to be closed. In this mode, the generator field excitation current will be maintained constant at the set-point in the DECS-200.

Please note that the voltage regulators DECS 200 has an internal auto-tracking between all modes (the non active mode are tracking the active mode) and between each other.

- Change the regulation mode (voltage, droop, power factor or var control), the status of the contacts connected between terminals XB/07_XB/08 and XB/09_XB/10 have to be changed. As explained before, there are different modes of regulation. Four of them (voltage, droop, power factor or VAR control) can act on the above mentioned contacts. This changeover between all modes can be automatically chosen by connecting the auxiliary contact from the Generator (DJA) and Utility circuit-breakers (DJU).

o If DJU is open and DJA is closed, the A.V.R.’s DECS 200 will work in droop mode (droop mode active while the On-Line over excitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are


exceeded. There is no VAR/PF regulation). This mounting plate is designed so that if for any reason, the auxiliary relays K3 and K4 are out of order, the system will work in droop mode, which is the safe method in all operations.

o If both DJA and DJU are open, the generator can work in voltage mode in the case if the droop is set at zero (AV.R. mode active while the Off-Line over excitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. There is No Droop and No VAR/PF regulation).

o If both DJA and DJU are closed, both of the A.V.R. DECS 200 will work either in VAR or Power Factor mode (VAR/PF mode active while the On-Line over excitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded).

- To excite the generator, the contact connected to terminal XB/25 has to be closed. There is an external contact (wired on terminals XC/11_XC/12), which indicates the status of the excitation control (the contact is closed when the excitation is ON and is open when the excitation is OFF). If the excitation circuit-breaker (QF1) is open, there is no possibility to excite the generator (QF1 has to be closed).

- To de-excite the generator, the contact connected to terminal XB/25 has to be closed (please refer to the page 53, column 23). There is an external contact (wired on terminals XC/11_X1/12), which indicates the status of the excitation control (the contact is closed when the excitation is ON and is open when the excitation is OFF). Please note that if there is an over current detected by the excitation circuit-breaker (QF1), the system will stop automatically. For this reason, 2 auxiliary contacts from QF1 are connected to terminals XC/09_XC/10 and XC/13_XC/14, in order to indicate the status of this excitation circuit-breaker. If QF1 opens, the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) has to open immediately.

- Active the pre-position of the AVR : By closing the both contacts on terminal XB/12 and XB/19, all the setpoints will be changed to the predefined value. Typically, this input is connected to one auxiliary contact on the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA). When the generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) opens, all setpoints are forced to the pre-position settings. This is especially helpful if FCR mode is active and the generator is under a load. Utilizing a auxiliary contact from DJA will force the FCR setpoint to its Pre-position setting, which could be preset to the generators nominal voltage.

- Reset the alarm indications annunciated on both A.V.R. DECS 200 screens, the contacts connected to the both terminals XB/11 and XB/18 have to be closed. By using the pushbuttons (left-arrow or right-arrow) on the front panel of the DECS 200, some annunciations will appear. The following messages may appear as annunciations on the alarm message screen :

o Field Overvoltage (maintained until Reset) o Field Overcurrent (maintained until Reset) o Generator Undervoltage (maintained until Reset) o Generator Overvoltage (maintained until Reset) o Lost voltage sensing (maintained until Reset) o System below 10Hz (maintained until Reset) o Underfrequency (clears 2 seconds after end of event) o Overexcitation limit (clears 2 seconds after end of event) o Underexcitation limit (clears 2 seconds after end of event)

Once the list of annunciation messages has been viewed, it may be cleared by pressing the Reset pushbutton (or by closing the external contacts on terminal XC/11 and XC/18). - Use the Modbus communication employed by both DECS-200, connections on terminals XF/1 to XF/4 have to be made. The Modbus communication uses a master-slave technique in which only the master can

52J / 52K 52L / 52M

VOLTAGE MODE (No droop, no VAR/PF)

CLOSED CLOSED

DROOP MODE CLOSED OPEN

POWER FACTOR /VAR MODE

OPEN OPEN

Droop set at zero


initiate a transaction. This translation is called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS 200) responds to the query. When a Modbus master communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master. Information residing in the DECS 200 is grouped characteristically in categories. Those categories are mentioned inside the DECS 200 instruction manual (at the section Modbus Communication). - To switch from the Master to the Back-up DECS 200, close the contact between terminals XB/.. and XB/... .- To switch from the Back-up to the Master DECS 200, close the contact between terminals XB/.. and

XB/... . Please note that the system will allow the operator to do this operation as long as there is no fault on the Master DECS 200. The system will not allow to switch back to the Master DECS 200 in the case if :

o There is a watchdog on the Master AVR DECS 200 o There is an overexcitation first level detected by the BE3-74SHn labeled RP1.

4.4 Voltage Sensing circuit

The sensing voltage is provided by the transformer T1 (secondary 2). This three phase transformer supplies the voltage to both A.V.R. DECS 200 through the terminals XA/06 to XA/08. The phase order is very important in this circuit and if the connections are incorrect, both A.V.R. DECS 200 will sense a wrong phase rotation. If the generator direction of rotation is in reverse, phases A and C must be flipped in the sensing circuit to obtain the correct phase rotation (please refer to the main electrical drawing 6-1103-91-297, on page 50).

As explained before, there is an over voltage relay connected on the same circuit (RP3, relay BE3-59T, on page 50, column 29). This relay senses the generator voltage. If the voltage goes above the settings (from 120 to 150V) after a predetermined period of time (from 0 to 10 seconds), the relay will close its contact -> the excitation will shut down -> the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) has to open immediately.

4.5 Short-circuit support

The booster circuit is not needed during normal operation. It is only needed during a network short-circuit situation, when the line collapse and the normal A.V.R. DECS 200 power circuit cannot supply sufficient excitation. Booster power is supplied by the current transformers that give all the necessary current on the exciter field, through the terminals XA/03 to XA/05. When the excitation contactor K1 is not energized (excitation OFF), the current transformers T3 are short-circuited. If K1 is energized (excitation ON), the auxiliary contacts from K1 (contacts 21-22 and 31-32) are open, which will allow to the boost circuit to operate properly. Even if the contactor K1 is active, the boost circuit will be activated only if the contactor K2 is de-energized. K2 is controlled by one of the three output relay from the DECS 200 (Output Relay 1). By using the Bestcoms of the A.V.R. DECS 200 on a computer, the output relay #1 can be set. In order to valid this output relay #1, please install the Bestcoms software on your computer (please refer to the section 6 inside the DECS 200 instruction manual).

After the installation, select the group “Protection”, then the screen “Protection options”. To enable the protection options, select (click) on the ENABLE button (for the protection function desired, which is “Generator Undervoltage”).


Select the second screen labeled “Protection Settings” and enter the settings on the Generator Undervoltage.

Select the third screen labeled “Relay #1 logic” and select (click) the Protection “Generator undervoltage”.

Fourth and last screen: “Relay Settings”. On this screen, select the tape of the “Contact Status” : Normally Closed, and the “Contact Type” : Maintained.

4.6 Parallel operation and cross current compensation circuit:


Generator sets are operated in parallel to improve fuel economy and reliability of the power supply. Economy is improved with multiple paralleled generators by selecting only sufficient generators to carry the load demand at any given time. By operating each generator near its full capacity, fuel is utilized efficiently.

In order to be able to run in parallel with other units (generators), the voltage regulator DECS 200 needs to sense the reactive load of the generator. The A.V.R. DECS 200 calculates this information by using the current transformer and the voltage sensing circuit (connected to terminals XA/06 to XA/08). This current transformer is connected to terminals XA/1_XA/2. Please refer to the electrical drawing for the proper connections. If the current transformer is not correctly wired, the voltage regulators DECS 200 will sense reactive power flowing in the reverse direction: it will sense negative reactive power when in reality the reactive power flow is in positive direction. An attempt to parallel two generators when one has correct polarity and the other has reverse polarity results in a situation where the correctly connected generator will go to a very low excitation and will probably trip due to under reactance, the other will pick-up a heavy reactive over current in the lagging power factor.

4.6.1 Voltage droop control

When reactive droop compensation is used to parallel two or more generators, each parallel droop circuit is independent of the other. A typical parallel droop circuit is made up of a current transformer and a paralleling circuit (already inside the DECS 200).

Voltage droop control mode can be used either in single unit operation, in parallel operation with other units in an island system, or in parallel operation with the utility. If, for any reason, the relay K4 becomes out of order, the system will work into the droop mode, which is the safe method in all operations.

The function is the same manner as the AVR mode but adds a "droop" function to the regulation loop in order to reduce the regulated voltage by a programmable percentage based on the reactive current demanded by the generator's load. This aids in reactive load sharing between parallel connected generators. If this mode is not desired, the droop percentage set-point in the DECS-200 can be set to zero percent (0%.)

4.6.2 Cross current compensation By only using the current transformer, which is connected on the b-phase on the primary side and to terminals XA/01_XA/02 for the secondary side, some values which available via the voltage regulator, will not be correct (current, power factor, active and reactive powers). However, voltage, frequency and field amps displays will remain in tact. In order to read correct

values,another

current input has been added on both DECS 200 voltage

regulators:another current transformer (exactly the same as for the current transformer) will be connected either on the a-phase or on the c-phase. This feature is very useful. The current transformer has to be connected on terminals XA/11_XA/12.

The cross current mode (called sometimes reactive differential compensation) can be used in an island system when there are several generators running in parallel and they all have DECS 200 type AVR (also single unit operation in island is applicable). Interconnection of the current transformers can be seen. On generator one, the current transformer (CT1) terminal with the polarity mark is connected to the current transformer (CT2) on generator number two at the terminal with no polarity


mark. On generator number two, the current transformer (CT2) terminal with polarity mark is connected to the current transformer (CT1) on generator number one at the terminal with no mark. For the reactive differential compensation (cross current compensation) to perform properly, all of the paralleling current transformers on all of the generators delivering power to the bus must be connected into the cross current loop. The current transformer connected in the loop must have the same ratios so that each current transformer supplies the same amount of current to properly cancel the voltage across the burden resistor (rated at 1 ohm / 50 or 100 watts). In the case where different size generators are paralleled, current transformer ratios must be changed to give approximately the same secondary current as the other current transformer(s). Otherwise, cancellation of the currents in the cross current loop will not occur, and the imbalance of current will force the generators to have circulating currents between them. If several generators are connected in parallel, the following system can be used (see drawing on the page before).

4.6.3 VAR/PF Regulation Mode

This mode works to maintain constant either the reactive power or the ratio of the reactive power to the active power exported by the generator, compared to the regulation set-point in the DECS-200. This mode is activated when both generator (DJA) and utility (DJU) breakers are closed.

Changing between VAR and Power Factor Regulation:

The DECS-200 can regulate a constant VAR production or a constant Power Factor. This selection is made either directly on the front panel of the DECS-200 (on page 2-16 on the DECS 200 instruction manual) or via the computer with the Basler software Bestcoms (see beside).

4.7 Voltage matching circuit

The K3 contact 11-12 is used as a safety feature to control voltage matching. DECS AVR has automatic voltage matching feature for synchronizing built-in. If the DECS 200 sees a different voltage at sensing terminals E1-E2-E3 (terminals XA/06 to XA/08) than in bus bars terminals B1-B3 (terminals XA/9_XA/10) it will try to match both voltages. However the AVR is designed so that it will not try to match zero voltage and it requires the bus voltage to be within certain adjustable area before it starts matching. The normal area is ±10% of rated voltage. When the generator breaker is closed, K3 is energized, K3 contacts 11-12 are open and the voltage matching is disabled. A resistor R2 is placed between the terminals BUS1 and BUS3 of the regulator to limit the interference caused by the DECS.

5 Output contacts

5.1 Output relays #2 and #3

Those outputs are available from terminals XC/03 to XC/06. The settings of the 2 relays are described hereunder:


After the installation, select the group “Protection”, then the screen “Protection options”. To enable the protection options, select (click) on the ENABLE button (for the protection function desired).

Select the second screen labeled “Protection Settings” and enter the settings on the requested option.

Select the third screen labeled “Relay #2,3 logic” and select (click) the Protection desired.


Fourth and last screen: “Relay Settings”. On this screen, select the tape of the “Contact Status” and the “Contact Type”.

6 COMMISSIONING

The serial link allows the user to set additional alarm or shutdown parameters. It also provides access and allows storing or saving all the DECS 200 functional parameters.

The DECS 200 are supplied with standard program described in the Instruction Manual.

The first operation is the configuration of DECS 200. It is mandatory to enter the right values in DECS before any operation of the generator. Configuration of DECS 200 can be made on the mounting plate as follows:

Apply the 24Vdc voltage between terminals XD/06_XD07. Select the proper operating parameters of DECS as per Instruction Manual of DECS. Do not forget to save them in the DECS and to record them on the commissioning report. proceed with normal starting procedure of generator/AVR

7 TROUBLESHOOTING

SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION Generator voltage does not rise

Generator output shorted or overloaded

Remove load or short circuit

Connections between voltage transformer and AVR are poor

During the start up, measure voltage from AVR’s voltage actual value terminals, excitation power supply terminals and auxiliary voltage supply terminals. Phase to phase voltage should be greater than 10V in all terminals. If voltages appear, skip the next three probable causes and solution

Circuit breakers in voltage transformer are open or damaged

Close the circuit breakers and measure that circuit breakers switches are in order

Contactor K1 in AVR unit plate Check that contactor K1 has voltage that is


is not acting needed for excitation on function, measure that K1’s switches are in order.

Circuit breaker QF1 in AVR unit plate is open

Push the button in QF1 to set circuit breaker ready check that QF1’s switches are in order

Excitation wires are not connected from AVR to generator

Connect terminals XD/01 and XD/02 from AVR unit to generator’s auxiliary terminal box. Make sure by measuring the voltage that the AVR is feeding exciter field winding. Check that switches inside terminals XD/01 and XD/02 are closed

Settings in AVR are incorrect Adjust settings in AVR so that they are according to AVR test sheet

Generator voltage rises but falls down again at once or

Circuit breaker QF1 in AVR unit plate is acting during start up

Check that overcurrent setting in QF1 is about 14A and overvoltage setting in overvoltage relay is about 125%

voltage variation is between 60-100% at rated voltage

Voltage transformer T4 in AVR unit plate is incorrectly connected

Check that voltage transformer is correctly connected according to AVR connection diagram

Contactor K2 in AVR unit plate switches off the start excitation too early

Measure that K2’s switches are in order

Settings in AVR are incorrect Adjust settings in AVR so that they match AVR test sheet

Generator voltage too low or too high.

Running speed not up to rated speed

Adjust speed rated

Voltage adjusting scale smthg else

AVR is in P.F. mode Change AVR to voltage mode. Refer to AVR connection diagram

than ± 10% from rated voltage or adjusting has no effect

Poor connection of voltage actual value measurement

Measure voltage from AVRs voltage actual value terminals. If phase to phase voltage is not 110V, check the wiring from voltage transformer to AVR’s terminals

Settings in AVR are incorrect Adjust settings in AVR so that they are according to AVR test sheet

No-load voltage correct, but voltage rises when generator is loaded in droop mode

Voltage phase order in AVR’s terminals is incorrect or current transformer for droop sensing is incorrectly wired

Check by measuring that voltages are connected to AVR’s terminals in order L1, L2 and L3. The current is measured by transformer from phase L2 and is connected to terminals XA/01 and XA/02 in order S1, S2

Reactive load no equally shared between generators

Rated voltage setting different between parallel operating generators

Change voltage setting to be the same for all parallel operating generators

in droop mode Droop setting different between parallel operating generators

Change droop setting to be the same for all parallel operating generators

Cross current loop operating incorrectly.

Check wiring, operation of K3-K4.

Generator is not able to supply enough reactive power

Voltage phase order in AVR’s terminals is incorrect or current transformer for droop sensing is incorrectly wired

Check by measuring that voltages are connected to AVR’s terminals in order L1, L2 and L3, the current is measured by transformer from phase L2 and is connected to terminals XA/01 and XA/02 in order S1, S2.

Fault in exciter’s rotating rectifier

Check diodes in rectifier

Settings in AVR are incorrect Adjust settings in AVR so that they are according


to AVR test sheet Generator voltage is unstable

Improper settings in AVR for existing network

Check that settings in AVR are according to AVR test sheet. Refer to stability adjustment procedure in Instruction Manual

Fault in exciter’s rectifier Check diodes in rectifier

8 OPTION: PMG

8.1 Example of a three phase PMG connection:

8.2 Modifications that have to be made

Connect the three phase PMG to the terminals XD/3 to XD/5. Nothing has to be connected to the terminals XA/3 to XA/5. It is not necessary to program the output relay#1 of the DECS-200 (under voltage function 27) as described in the section 4-5 page 15.

9 Summary of modifications

- Revision A : First issue. - Revision B : Inrush current reducer module added. - Revision C : Inrush current reducer modules added in § 8.1

TE

CH

NIC

AL

DR

AW

ING

S

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

EFGH

14/0

4/20

05

16/0

5/20

05

31/0

8/20

05

18/1

0/20

05

UPD

ATE

ICR

M-1

5

UPD

ATE

ASBU

ILT

AB

DRA

WIN

GS

BY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:A

COVE

RSH

EET

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:

ThisdocumentisBASLERELECTRICCOMPANYpropertyandcannotbeduplicated,communicatedormodifiedwithoutitsagreement.

BASLER

R

R

75

0(L

EN

GH

T)

x7

50

(HE

IGH

T)

x1

75

(WID

TH

)m

m

GA

LV

AN

IZE

DM

OU

NT

ING

CH

AS

SIS

PO

WE

RR

EQ

UIR

EM

EN

TS

:

VO

LT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

G:

CU

RR

EN

TS

EN

SIN

G:

EX

CIT

AT

ION

PO

WE

R:

CO

NT

RO

LP

OW

ER

:

BU

ILD

-UP

PO

WE

R:

GE

NE

RA

TO

RD

AT

A:

PO

WE

R:

VO

LT

AG

E:

CU

RR

EN

T:

FR

EQ

UE

NC

Y:

PO

WE

RF

AC

TO

R:

WIR

ING

:

AL

LW

IRIN

GC

ON

FO

RM

TO

TH

EF

OL

LO

WIN

GU

NL

ES

S

OT

HE

RW

ISE

SP

EC

IFIE

DO

NS

CH

EM

AT

ICS

:

PT

WIR

ES

IZE

:

CT

WIR

ES

IZE

:

CO

NT

RO

LW

IRE

SIZ

E:

MU

LT

ICO

LO

RW

IRE

MA

RK

ER

SO

NE

AC

HE

ND

OF

WIR

E

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

:

3x_

__

kV/1

20

Va

c(Y

-Y)

In/1

or

5A

3x_

__

V@

__

_kV

A

24

Vd

cIN

TE

RN

AL

__

_V

dc

NO

MIN

AL

VO

LT

AG

E:

NO

MIN

AL

CU

RR

EN

T:

FO

RC

ING

VO

LT

AG

E:

FO

RC

ING

CU

RR

EN

T:

__

_V

dc

(12

5V

dc

ma

x)

__

_A

dc

(15

Ad

cm

ax)

__

_V

dc

__

_A

dc

PO

WE

RO

UT

PU

TG

EN

ER

AT

OR

FIE

LD

:

1.5

mm

²

2.5

mm

²

1.5

mm

²

__

__

_kV

A

__

__

_V

__

__

A

__

Hz

__

_

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

EFGH

14/0

4/20

05

16/0

5/20

05

31/0

8/20

05

18/1

0/20

05

UPD

ATE

ICR

M-1

5

UPD

ATE

ASBU

ILT

DRA

WIN

GS

BY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:B

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:

ThisdocumentisBASLERELECTRICCOMPANYpropertyandcannotbeduplicated,communicatedormodifiedwithoutitsagreement.ThecustomerpartisdrawnforINFORMATIONONLY

SUM

MA

RY

05

AR

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

05

SIN

GL

EL

INE

DIA

GR

AM

CGR

23-1

2-20

04E

GR14

-04-

2005

GGR

31-0

8-20

05H

FJ18

-10-

2005

11

DE

FIN

ITIO

NO

FS

YM

BO

LS

AAT

04-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

12

CU

ST

OM

ER

SE

NS

ING

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

AAT

04-1

1-20

04B

GR16

-11-

2004

CGR

23-1

2-20

04G

GR31

-08-

2005

13

CU

ST

OM

ER

PO

WE

RC

ON

NE

CT

ION

S&

CR

OS

SC

UR

RE

NT

CO

MP

EN

SA

TIO

NA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

DGR

04-0

2-20

05G

GR31

-08-

2005

20

FR

ON

TV

IEW

CU

BIC

LE

AAT

04-1

1-20

04B

GR16

-11-

2004

CGR

23-1

2-20

04E

GR14

-04-

2005

FAK

O16-0

5-20

05G

GR31

-08-

2005

HFJ

18-1

0-20

05

40

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

LIS

TA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

EGR

14-0

4-20

05F

AKO

16-0

5-20

05G

GR31

-08-

2005

45

NA

ME

PL

AT

ES

AN

DN

AM

ET

AG

SA

AT04

-11-

2004

CGR

23-1

2-20

04G

GR31

-08-

2005

50

PO

WE

RC

IRC

UIT

AAT

04-1

1-20

04B

GR16

-11-

2004

CGR

23-1

2-20

04F

AKO

16-0

5-20

05G

GR31

-08-

2005

51

CO

NT

RO

LC

IRC

UIT

AAT

04-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

EGR

14-0

4-20

05

52

CO

NT

RO

LC

IRC

UIT

AAT

04-1

1-20

04B

GR16

-11-

2004

CGR

23-1

2-20

04

53

INF

OR

MA

TIO

NR

EP

OR

TA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

GGR

31-0

8-20

05

54

MA

ST

ER

AV

RC

ON

TR

OL

CIR

CU

ITA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

55

BA

CK

-UP

AV

RC

ON

TR

OL

CIR

CU

ITA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

GGR

31-0

8-20

05

56

AU

XIL

IAR

YT

ER

MIN

AL

SA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

GGR

31-0

8-20

05

57

AU

XIL

IAR

YT

ER

MIN

AL

SA

AT04

-11-

2004

BGR

16-1

1-20

04C

GR23

-12-

2004

GGR

31-0

8-20

05

SUMM

ARY

MODI

FICA

TION

FOLI

OTI

TLE1

TITL

E2

REV.

DATE

VISA

REV.

REV.

REV.

REV.

REV.

REV.

REV.

REV.

REV.

DATE

DATE

DATE

DATE

DATE

DATE

DATE

DATE

DATE

VISA

VISA

VISA

VISA

VISA

VISA

VISA

VISA

VISA

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

AC

04/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:11

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


DEFI

NIT

ION

OF

SYM

BO

LS

12

05

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

ALT

ER

NA

TE

UR

SY

NC

HR

ON

E,T

RIP

HA

SE

TH

RE

EP

HA

SE

SY

NC

HR

ON

OU

SG

EN

ER

AT

OR

EN

RO

ULE

ME

NT

D'E

XC

ITA

TIO

N

EX

CIT

AT

ION

WIN

DIN

G

TR

AN

SF

OR

MA

TE

UR

MO

NO

PH

AS

E

SIN

GLE

PH

AS

ET

RA

NS

FO

RM

ER

TR

AN

SF

OR

MA

TE

UR

TR

IPH

AS

E

TH

RE

EP

HA

SE

TR

AN

SF

OR

ME

R

CO

UP

LA

GE

ET

OIL

E/S

TA

RC

OU

PLIN

G

CO

UP

LA

GE

TR

IAN

GLE

/D

ELT

AC

OU

PLIN

G

TR

AN

SF

OR

MA

TE

UR

DE

CO

UR

AN

T

CU

RR

EN

TT

RA

NS

FO

RM

ER

PR

ISE

DE

CO

UR

AN

T

OU

TLE

T

CA

BLE

BLIN

DE

SH

IELD

ED

WIR

E

VO

YA

NT

LIG

HT

VA

RIS

TA

NC

E

VA

RIS

TO

R

CO

NN

EX

ION

BA

RR

ED

EC

UIV

RE

BU

SB

AR

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

AP

PA

RE

ILD

EM

ES

UR

E/M

ET

ER

Hz

-F

RE

QU

EN

CE

/F

RE

QU

EN

CY

DIO

DE

DE

PU

ISS

AN

CE

PO

WE

RD

IOD

E

BO

UT

ON

PO

US

SO

IR

PU

SH

BU

TT

ON

RE

SIS

TA

NC

E

RE

SIS

TO

R

TE

RR

E

GR

OU

ND

TE

RM

INA

LB

LO

CK

BO

RN

E

FO

LIO

-CO

LO

NN

E(C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N)

PA

GE

-CO

LU

MN

(CO

NT

INU

AT

ION

)

V-

TE

NS

ION

/V

OLT

AG

E

A-

CO

UR

AN

T/C

UR

RE

NT

P-

PO

SIT

ION

/P

OS

ITIO

N

NL

-D

IFF

ER

EN

TIE

L/N

ULL

PF

-co

sP

HI/P

OW

ER

FA

CT

OR

W-

PU

ISS

AN

CE

AC

TIV

E/A

CT

IVE

PO

WE

R

VA

R-

PU

ISS

AN

CE

RE

AC

TIV

E/R

EA

CT

IVE

PO

WE

R

*:

PO

WE

RC

ON

TA

CT

CO

NT

AC

TD

EP

UIS

SA

NC

E

RE

LA

YC

ON

TA

CT

CO

NT

AC

TD

ER

ELA

IS

CIR

CU

ITB

RE

AK

ER

DIS

JON

CT

EU

R

CO

NT

AC

TO

RC

OIL

CO

NT

AC

TE

UR

RE

LA

YC

OIL

RE

LA

IS

XX

00

00

NU

ME

RO

D'O

RD

RE

DU

SY

MB

OLE

/S

YM

BO

LS

EQ

UE

NC

EN

UM

BE

R

NU

ME

RO

DE

PA

GE

/S

HE

ET

NU

MB

ER

RA

CIN

ED

US

YM

BO

LE

/S

YM

BO

LR

OO

T

4.0

WH

-5006 N

UM

ER

OD

UF

IL/W

IRE

NU

MB

ER

CO

ULE

UR

DU

FIL

/W

IRE

CO

LO

R

SE

CT

ION

DU

FIL

/W

IRE

SE

CT

ION

BK

=B

LA

CK

WH

=W

HIT

E

RD

=R

ED

DB

=D

AR

KB

LU

E

LB

=LIG

HT

BLU

E

GR

=G

RE

Y

PK

=P

INK

OR

=O

RA

NG

E

BR

=B

RO

WN

EX

CIT

AT

RIC

ET

OU

RN

AN

TE

RO

TA

RY

EX

CIT

ER

*

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABCG

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

31/0

8/20

05

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:12

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


CUST

OM

ERSE

NSI

NG

CO

NN

ECTI

ON

S

13

11

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

CT

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)

VO

LT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

G VT

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

XA

1

XA

2

XA

6

XA

7

XA

8

CT

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)

VO

LT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

G VT

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

CT

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)

VO

LT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

G VT

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

CT

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

VT

SE

NS

ING

VO

LT

AG

E

CT

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

CT

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

VT

SE

NS

ING

VO

LT

AG

E

AP

HA

SE

CU

RR

EN

TS

EN

SIN

GT

HR

EE

-PH

AS

EV

OLT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

GB

PH

AS

EC

UR

RE

NT

SE

NS

ING

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

VO

LT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

GC

PH

AS

EC

UR

RE

NT

SE

NS

ING

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

VO

LT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

G

AP

HA

SE

CU

RR

EN

TS

EN

SIN

GS

ING

LE

-PH

AS

EV

OLT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

GB

PH

AS

EC

UR

RE

NT

SE

NS

ING

SIN

GLE

-PH

AS

EV

OLT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

GC

PH

AS

EC

UR

RE

NT

SE

NS

ING

SIN

GLE

-PH

AS

EV

OLT

AG

ES

EN

SIN

G

VT

SE

NS

ING

VO

LT

AG

E

ISU

SE

D,

DO

NO

TC

ON

NE

CT

TH

EE

AR

TH

IFC

RO

SS

CU

RR

EN

TIS

US

ED

,D

ON

OT

CO

NN

EC

TT

HE

EA

RT

H

IFC

RO

SS

CU

RR

EN

TIS

US

ED

,D

ON

OT

CO

NN

EC

TT

HE

EA

RT

H

IFC

RO

SS

CU

RR

EN

T

ISU

SE

D,

DO

NO

TC

ON

NE

CT

TH

EE

AR

TH

IFC

RO

SS

CU

RR

EN

TIF

CR

OS

SC

UR

RE

NT

TH

EE

AR

TH

DO

NO

TC

ON

NE

CT

ISU

SE

D,

IFC

RO

SS

CU

RR

EN

T

TH

EE

AR

TH

DO

NO

TC

ON

NE

CT

ISU

SE

D,

In/1

or

5A

3xU

n

In/1

or

5A

3xU

n

In/1

or

5A

3xU

n

In/1

or

5A

Un

In/1

or

5A

Un

In/1

or

5A

Un

B C

A B C

A B C

A B CA

B CA

B CA

PH

AS

ER

OT

AT

ION

:A

,B

and

CP

HA

SE

RO

TA

TIO

N:A

,B

and

CP

HA

SE

RO

TA

TIO

N:A

,B

and

C

PH

AS

ER

OT

AT

ION

:A

,B

and

CP

HA

SE

RO

TA

TIO

N:A

,B

and

CP

HA

SE

RO

TA

TIO

N:A

,B

and

C

XA

1XA

2

XA

67X

A

8

XA

XA

1XA

2

XA

67X

A

8

XA

XA

1XA

2

XA

67X

A

8

XA

XA

1XA

2

XA

67X

A

8

XA

XA

1XA

2

XA

67X

A

8

XA

12

0V

12

0V

12

0V

12

0V

12

0V

12

0V

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

BCDG

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

04/0

2/20

05

31/0

8/20

05

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

CRO

SSC

UR

REN

TC

OM

PEN

SATI

ON

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:13

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


&C

RO

SSC

UR

REN

TCO

MPE

NSA

TIO

N

CUST

OM

ERPO

WER

CON

NEC

TIO

NS

20

12

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

XA

3

XA

4

XA

5

SIN

GL

E-P

HA

SE

BO

OS

TC

UR

RE

NT

(AN

YP

HA

SE

)(E

ITH

ER

PH

AS

Eor

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)(E

ITH

ER

PH

AS

Eor

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)(A

NY

PH

AS

E)

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)(A

NY

PH

AS

E)

BO

OS

TC

TB

OO

ST

CT

sB

OO

ST

CT

s

TW

O-P

HA

SE

BO

OS

TC

UR

RE

NT

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

BO

OS

TC

UR

RE

NT

34

5

XD

XD

XD

L1

L2

L3

(FO

RS

ING

LE

PH

AS

E,D

ON

OT

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

AU

XIL

IAR

YW

IND

ING

PO

WE

RC

ON

NE

CT

ION

S

CO

NN

EC

TL2)

(FO

RS

ING

LE

PH

AS

E,D

ON

OT

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

PM

GP

OW

ER

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

CO

NN

EC

TL2)

(FO

RS

ING

LE

PH

AS

E,D

ON

OT

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

EX

TE

RN

AL

PO

WE

RS

OU

RC

EP

OW

ER

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

CO

NN

EC

TL2)

(FO

RS

ING

LE

PH

AS

E,D

ON

OT

TH

RE

E-P

HA

SE

"SH

UN

T"

TR

AN

SF

OR

ME

RP

OW

ER

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

CO

NN

EC

TL2)

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

EX

TE

RN

AL

PO

WE

R

SO

UR

CE

(AN

YP

HA

SE

OR

DE

R)

(AN

YP

HA

SE

OR

DE

R)

(AN

YP

HA

SE

OR

DE

R)

(AN

YP

HA

SE

OR

DE

R)

(AS

KF

OR

INR

US

HC

UR

RE

NT

LIM

ITE

RN

EC

ES

SIT

Y)

(AS

KF

OR

INR

US

HC

UR

RE

NT

LIM

ITE

RN

EC

ES

SIT

Y)

XA

3XA

4XA

5

XA

3

XA

4

XA

5

34

5

XD

XD

XD

34

5

XD

XD

XD

34

5

XD

XD

XD

CR

OS

SC

UR

RE

NT

CO

MP

EN

SA

TIO

N

(EIT

HE

RP

HA

SE

or

NE

UT

RA

LS

IDE

)(A

NY

PH

AS

E)

CR

OS

SC

UR

RE

NT

CO

MP

EN

SA

TIO

N

XA

12

XA

XA

12

XA

11

GE

N1

R

XA

12

XA

11

R

*C

CC

EN

AB

LE

CO

NT

AC

TGE

N2

GE

Nn

+1

MO

UN

TIN

G

PLA

TE

1

MO

UN

TIN

G

PLA

TE

2

MO

UN

TIN

G

PLA

TE

n+

1

**

**

GE

Nn

XA

12

XA

11

R

MO

UN

TIN

G

PLA

TE

n

11

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

R

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

P1

P2

S1

S2

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

CEFG

23/1

2/20

04

14/0

4/20

05

16/0

5/20

05

31/0

8/20

05

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

ICR

M-1

5

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:40

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


EQU

IPM

ENT

LIST

45

20

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

D(9

-29)

Term

inalb

lock

equip

ed

with

afr

ee

wheeld

iode,sp

ring

connect

or,

type

ST

2.5

-quattro

-DIO

/L-R

PH

OE

NIX

CO

NT

AC

T3036233

6620900314

21

QS

1S

T10

Fuse

hold

er,

single

,fo

r13/3

2"

x1

1/2

"fe

rrule

styl

efu

ses,

690

Volt

FE

RR

AZ

G081219

6611600101*

2

GS

1P

ow

er

supply

DC

,85-2

64V

ac

(45-6

5H

z)or

90-3

50V

dc/

24V

dc-

5A

PH

OE

NIX

CO

NT

AC

T2938581

37235

1

KT

1T

imer

0.1

s/100h,12-2

40V

ac/

dc,

multi

fonct

ion

(A-A

t-B

-C-H

-Ht-

Di-D

-Ac-

Bw

)C

RO

UZ

ET

88865103

35097

1

K(3

-4)\

K(7

-9)

Rela

y,in

dust

rial,

min

iatu

re,4P

DT

,5

Am

p@

250V

AC

/30V

DC

rate

d,24V

DC

coil,

with

free

wheeld

iode.

FIN

DE

R553490240090

6611200250

5

K(3

-4)\

K(7

-9)

Support

for

rela

y(4

form

-c),

5A

(max

300V

ac)

,se

rie

58

FIN

DE

R/S

CH

RA

CK

9474.1

/ZG

78700

6611200059*

5

KB

Conta

ctor

4x3

2A

AC

1,4

pole

s(2

NO

+2N

C),

coil

24V

dc

ALLE

N-B

RA

DLE

Y100-C

23Z

J200

6611200139

1

KB

\KM

Rela

yA

ccess

ory

,m

ech

anic

all

atc

h,1

N.O

.and

1N

.C.co

nta

ct,48V

AC

@50/6

0H

Zco

il100-F

L11K

Y6611200145

2

K(1

-2)

Auxi

liary

conta

cts

2N

O+

2N

C,C

A5-2

2E

AB

B212110

6611200218*

2

K(1

-2)\

K10

Conta

ctor

4x2

8A

,B

C16-4

0-0

0,24V

dc

coil,

4xN

Oco

nta

ts55791

6611200027*

3

KM

Conta

ctor

4x3

2A

AC

1,4

pole

s(4

NO

),co

il24V

dc

ALLE

N-B

RA

DLE

Y100-C

23Z

J400

6611200138

1

KB

\KM

Rela

yA

ccess

ory

,dio

de

module

,su

rge

suppre

ssor

DC

,12-2

50V

DC

100-F

SD

250

34169

2

KB

\KM

Auxi

liary

conta

cts

1N

O+

1N

F100-S

B11(L

EF

T)

6611200121

2

KM

100-S

B11(R

IGH

T)

1

KB

Auxi

liary

conta

cts

2N

O100-S

B20(R

IGH

T)

6611200147

1

M-P

LA

TE

Mountin

gpla

te,750

x750

x2.5

mm

SA

RE

L55745

35462

1

QF

2C

ircu

itbre

ake

rA

ccess

ory

,auxi

liary

conta

cts,

1C

-form

conta

ctA

BB

359600-1

6611200330

1

QF

1A

uxi

liary

conta

cts

1N

O+

1N

F(left)

SIE

ME

NS

5S

T3010(L

)6611400308

1

QF

1A

uxi

liary

conta

cts

1N

O+

1N

F(r

ight)

5S

T3010(R

)1

QF

1E

mis

sion

trig

ger

(trip

coil)

24-4

8V

dc

5S

T3031

6611400316

1

QF

1C

ircu

itbre

ake

r,3pole

,20

am

p,C

curv

e,50/6

0H

z5S

Y6

320-7

6611400309

1

QF

2C

ircu

itB

reake

r,2x4

A,C

curv

e,U

max

=400V

AC

.A

BB

352232

6611400029

1

QS

1F

use

6A

aM

500V

10x3

8F

ER

RA

ZF

222208

6611600078

2

R1

Rési

stor

10

ohm

/100W

,ty

pe

HS

100

AR

CO

L188-1

22

33921

1

R2

Resi

stor,

fixed,ca

rbon

film

,100K

ohm

s+

/-5%

,1/2

watt,axi

all

eads

NE

OH

M132-9

77

6610900073

1

R3

Resi

stor

mountin

gbra

cketse

t,fo

ruse

with

pow

er

resi

stor

size

20

x117m

mS

FE

RN

ICE

2E

KN

6611700082

1

R3

Resi

stor,

adju

stable

,w

irew

ound,10

ohm

s+

/-10%

,100

Watt,-2

5/+

80ppm

/Deg

Cte

mp.c

oeff.,

20

x117

size

,panelm

ount

RS

SD

100-1

0R

35338

1

RS

1S

hunt,

15

Am

p,100m

V,C

lass

1,m

ounte

din

ate

rmin

al.

SP

MS

HM

O-1

5/1

00

35255

1

RE

2D

EC

Sre

dundance

com

munic

atio

nca

ble

BA

SLE

R9310300032

9310300032

1

RE

(1-2

)A

uto

matic

volta

ge

regula

tor,

24/4

8V

dc

pow

er

supply

Inte

rnal/E

xtern

alA

uto

track

ing

DE

CS

200-2

L9360100103

2

RE

(3-4

)In

rush

curr

entre

duct

ion

module

,18A

,90-2

77V

,50-4

00H

zIC

RM

-15

9387900104

2

RP

3R

ela

y,ove

rvolta

ge

sensi

ng,3

phase

,3

wire,120V

input,

50/6

0H

zB

E3-5

9T

-3A

1N

19319600104

1

RP

(1-2

)R

ela

y,D

CO

verv

olta

ge

Sensi

ng,100m

Vin

put,

24V

dc

pow

er

supply

BE

3-7

4S

H-7

G5E

19320900104

2

D1-D

2\D

3-D

4\D

5-D

6\D

7-D

8R

ect

ifier

bridge,si

ngle

phase

,35A

,600V

G.I.

GB

PC

-3506

24982

4

G(1

-2)

Sem

iconduct

or,

rect

ifier

bridge,th

ree

phase

,1200

Volt,

30

Am

ps

@94°C

SE

MIK

RO

NS

KD

30/1

26620900001

2

R2

Term

inalB

lock

,co

mponenthold

er,

inte

rnals

old

er

connect

ors

EN

TR

ELE

C011517714

33795

1

X+

/X-

Pote

ntia

ldis

trib

uto

r+

/-,250V

ac/

dc

max,

30A

max,

spring

connect

or,

type

:UM

K.P

VB

-2/2

4/Z

FK

DS

PH

OE

NIX

CO

NT

AC

T2302366

6611000307

1

GN

D-\

GN

D-\

GN

D-

Term

inalb

loc,

spring

connect

ion

for

3w

ires,

wire

sect

ion

0.2

-2.5

mm

²,G

RE

EN

/YE

LLO

Wco

lor,

800V

/28A

,U

L/C

SA

cert

ified

30

31

26

76621300336

3

XC

-(1-2

4)

Term

inalb

loc,

spring

connect

ion

for

3w

ires,

wire

sect

ion

0.2

-2.5

mm

²,O

RA

NG

Eco

lor,

800V

/28A

,U

L/C

SA

cert

ified

30

31

98

26621300335

24

XA

-(1-1

2)\

XB

-(1-2

7)\

XD

-(1-9

)\X

F-(

1-1

1)

Term

inalb

loc,

spring

connect

ion

for

3w

ires,

wire

sect

ion

0.5

-6m

m²,

GR

EE

N/Y

ELLO

Wco

lor,

800V

/28A

,U

L/C

SA

cert

ified

30

36

48

26621300339

59

QTY

ITEM

DESC

RIPT

ION

MANU

FACT

URER

REFE

RENC

EPA

RT-N

UMBE

R

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

BCFG

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

16/0

5/20

05

31/0

8/20

05

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

ICR

M-1

5

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:50

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


POW

ERC

IRC

UIT

51

45

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

CR

OS

SC

UR

EN

T

CO

MP

EN

SA

TIO

N

CIR

CU

IT

24V

dc

NO

TE

1

NO

TE

1

NO

TE

1:

PLE

AS

ES

ELE

CT

EIT

HE

RT

HE

5A

OR

TH

E1A

INP

UT

CU

RR

EN

T

NO

TE

1NO

TE

1

(SE

EP

AG

E13)

MA

TC

HIN

G

VO

LT

AG

E

CIR

CU

IT

(SE

EP

AG

E12)

CIR

CU

IT

SE

NS

ING

VO

LT

AG

E

(SE

EP

AG

E12)

CIR

CU

IT

SE

NS

ING

CU

RR

EN

T

(SE

EP

AG

E13)

PO

WE

RC

IRC

UIT

AC

INP

UT

F+

F-

EX

CIT

AT

ION

CIR

CU

IT

DC

OU

TP

UT

(SE

EP

AG

E13)

BO

OS

TC

IRC

UIT

S2

S1

L1

L3

L1

L2

L3

S1

S2

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

NO

TE

2

NO

TE

2:D

EF

AU

TS

ET

TIN

G:S

ET

TH

EV

ALU

ET

OM

AX

IMU

MP

OS

ITIO

N.

(CO

NN

EC

TE

DT

OT

HE

FIE

LD

WIN

DIN

G)

1o

r5

A3

x12

0V

1o

r5

A

2.5BK-5014

2.5BK-5053

2.5BK-5024

2.5

BK

-5016

1.5

DB

-12.5

BK

-5011

1.5

DB

-2

2.5

BK

-5019

2.5BK-5001

2.5BK-5002

2.5BK-5003

2.5

BK

-5050

2.5BK-5006

1.5

PK

-5045

2.5BK-5005

1.5

PK

-5044

1.5GR-5022

2.5BK-5010

2.5BK-5004

2.5BK-5028

2.5

BK

-5051

2.5BK-5021

2.5BK-5007

2.5BK-5033

2.5BK-5020

2.5

BK

-5013

2.5BK-5015

2.5BK-5008

2.5

BK

-5052

2.5BK-5030

2.5BK-5029

2.5BK-5032

2.5BK-5009

2.5BK-5031

2.5BK-5046

2.5BK-5047

2.5

BK

-5026

2.5BK-5048

2.5WH-5039

1.5

GR

-5023

2.5

WH

-5037

2.5

BK

-5027

2.5BK-5025

2.5WH-5038

2.5BK-5012

2.5BK-5017

2.5BK-5018

2.5WH-5035

2.5

WH

-5036

2.5WH-5034

1.5GR-5040

1.5GR-5041

1.5GR-5042

1.5GR-5043

3

XA

K212

34

52

-11

K1

21

22

52

-5

G1

-+

4

XA

D5-D

6

-

K25 6

7 8

52

-11

K1

31

32

52

-5

+

5

XA

1.5

DB

-15

1-9

1.5

DB

-25

1-9

D3-D

4

-

A

QS

1

6

+

BE

3-7

4S

H

-+

2nd

leve

l(4

0to

120%

ofIn

)

RP

2

52-2

7

10

Oh

ms

R3

D1-D

2

-

BE

3-7

4S

H

-+

1st

leve

l(4

0to

120%

ofIn

)

RP

1

52-2

3 +

K10

12

34

52

-9

K1

7 85

2-5

1

XD

AmV

RS

1

15

10

0

10

Oh

ms

10

0W

R1

G2

+-

2

XD

KB

R3

R4

51

-19

DE

CS

-200

G

F-

AB

CIN

PU

TP

OW

ER

DC

FIE

LD

OU

TP

UT

F+

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

52-1

7

KM

1 2

3 4

5 65

1-1

1

3

XD

AQ

F1

1 2

3 4

5 62

0.0

0N

O/5

3-2

5N

F/5

3-1

9N

O/5

5-3

1N

F/5

5-3

3

K1

1 2

3 4

5 65

2-5

IN OU

T

RE

3

AB

C

AB

C

4

XD

5

XD

KB

R5

R6

51

-19

GN

D KB

1 25

1-1

9

DE

CS

-200

G

F-

AB

CIN

PU

TP

OW

ER

DC

FIE

LD

OU

TP

UT

F+

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

52-1

9

GN

D

IN OU

T

RE

4

AB

C

AB

C

GN

D

KB

7 85

1-1

9

1

XA

2

XA

RP

3

L1

L2

L3

BE

3-5

9T

-3A

1N

152-3

153-1

DE

CS

-200

E1

50/6

0H

z

GE

NE

RA

TO

Rb-P

HA

SE

SE

NS

ING

CR

OS

SC

UR

RE

NT

CC

CT

CO

M5A

1A

E2

1A

5A

CO

M

E3

B1

B3

GE

NE

RA

TO

RB

US

100/1

20V

A1

B5

B6

A2

A3

A4

A5

B3

B2

B1

B4

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

52-1

9

6

XA

78

9

XA

10

0kO

hm

s

0.5

W

R2

10

XA

DE

CS

-200

E1

50/6

0H

z

GE

NE

RA

TO

Rb-P

HA

SE

SE

NS

ING

CR

OS

SC

UR

RE

NT

CC

CT

CO

M5A

1A

E2

1A

5A

CO

M

E3

B1

B3

GE

NE

RA

TO

RB

US

100/1

20V

A1

B5

B6

A2

A3

A4

A5

B3

B2

B1

B4

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

52-1

7

K3

11

12

14

51

-35

11

XA

12X

A

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ACE

04/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

14/0

4/20

05

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:51

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


CONT

ROL

CIR

CUIT

52

50

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

+C

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

or

90

to350V

dc

85

to264V

ac

(45-6

5H

z)

+C

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

24V

dc

RE

SE

T

MA

ST

ER

AV

R

BA

CK

-UP

AV

R

MA

CH

INE

C.B

.

GR

ID

C.B

.

TO

FIE

LD

FLA

SH

ING

CIR

CU

IT

MA

ST

ER

AV

R

CO

NT

AC

TO

R

BA

CK

-UP

AV

R

CO

NT

AC

TO

R

WA

TC

HD

OG

MA

ST

ER

AV

R

OV

ER

-EX

CIT

AT

ION

1st

LE

VE

L

OV

ER

-EX

CIT

AT

ION

2nd

LE

VE

L

MA

CH

INE

CIR

CU

ITB

RE

AK

ER

GR

ID

CIR

CU

ITB

RE

AK

ER

(NO

TE

)N

OT

E:T

HIS

INP

UT

ISN

OT

FU

SE

D

1.5DB-1

1.5DB-5111 1.5DB-5112

1.5DB-51131.5DB-5114

1.5DB-5101

1.5DB-5104

1.5DB-5115

1.5DB-5116

1.5

DB

-5107

1.5DB-5105

1.5DB-5103

1.5DB-51021.5DB-5102(1)

1.5DB-5117

1.5DB-5106

1.5DB-5121

1.5DB-5122

1.5DB-2

1.5DB-5118

1.5DB-5110

1.5DB-5108

1.5DB-5109

1.5DB-5120

1.5DB-5119

6

XD

GN

D

85-2

64V

ac

90-3

50V

dc

24V

dc

/5A

GS

1

LN

+ -

AQ

F2

1 2

3 44

.00 -

-O

F/5

3-2

7

PE

7

XD

8

XD

9

XD

D7

-D8

-+

X-

1.5

DB

-15

0-7

1.5

DB

-25

0-7

X+

2

XB

1

XB

K7

31

32

34

51

-25

MAS

TER

VK

M

A1

A2

24K

8

21

22

24

51

-29 KM

65

66

51

-11

E1

E2

KM

13

14

51

-11

KB

23

24

51

-19

K7

21

22

24

51

-25

K8

31

32

34

51

-29

BAC

K-U

P

VK

B

A1

A2

24

4

XB

3

XB

KB

65

66

51

-19

E1

E2

KB

13

14

51

-19

KM

43

44

51

-11

WD

MAS

TER

VK

7

A1

A2

24

DE

CS

-200

WA

TC

HD

OG

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

A13

A14

52-1

7

K7

11

12

14

51

-25

5

XB

6

XB

BE

3-7

4S

H1st

leve

l

RP

112

14

11

52-2

3

1stl

evel

VK

8

A1

A2

24

K8

11

12

14

51

-29

BE

3-7

4S

H2nd

leve

l

RP

212

14

11

52-2

7

2nd

leve

l

VK

9

A1

A2

24

K9

11

12

14

51

-33

52G

VK

3

A1

A2

24

8

XB

7

XB

52L

VK

4

A1

A2

24

10

XB

9

XB

1.5

DB

-25

2-1

1.5

DB

-15

2-1

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABC

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:52

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


CONT

ROL

CIR

CUIT

53

51

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

QF

1

EX

CIT

AT

ION

CO

NT

AC

TO

R

FIE

LD

FLA

SH

ING

SH

OR

TC

IRC

UIT

CO

NT

AC

TO

R

FIE

LD

FLA

SH

ING

TIM

ER

OV

ER

VO

LT

AG

E

PR

OT

EC

TIO

N

1.5DB-1

1.5DB-2

1.5DB-5204

1.5DB-5203

1.5DB-5201

1.5DB-5205

1.5DB-5202

1.5DB-5206

1.5DB-5207

1.5

DB

-25

1-3

9

1.5

DB

-15

1-3

9

2s (H)

VK

T1

A1

A2

24

K1

13

14

52

-5

CEXV

K1

A1

A2

24

DE

CS

-200

EX

CIT

AT

ION

CO

NT

AC

TO

R

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

A11

A12

52-1

7

KB

31

32

51

-19

D20

DE

CS

-200

EX

CIT

AT

ION

CO

NT

AC

TO

R

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

A11

A12

52-1

9 KM

21

22

51

-11

D21

F.FL

ASH

VK

10

A1

A2

24KT

1

15

16

18

52

-3

BOO

STVK

2

A1

A2

DE

CS

-200

OU

TP

UT

RE

LA

Y1

(27T

)

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

A15

A16

52-1

7

D22

DE

CS

-200

OU

TP

UT

RE

LA

Y1

(27T

)

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

A15

A16

52-1

9

+ -

DE

CS

200

24V

dc

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

B7

B8

52-5

51-2

552-1

153-7

50-1

953-1

150-3

753-1

554-7

+ -

DE

CS

200

24V

dc

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

B7

B8

52-7

53-1

552-1

553-5

50-3

153-9

53-1

955-9

50-2

3

+ -

BE

3-7

4S

H

24V

dc

1st

leve

l

RP

1

A1

A2

51-2

9-

-50-1

1

+ -

BE

3-7

4S

H

24V

dc

2nd

leve

l

RP

2

A1

A2

51-3

1-

-50-9

BE

3-5

9T

RP

312

14

11

50-2

7

C1

C2

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABCG

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

31/0

8/20

05

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:53

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


INFO

RM

ATI

ON

REP

ORT

54

52

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

A B C

MO

DB

US

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

OVERVOLTAGE

(MOMENTARY)

PROGRAMMABLE

AVRFAIL(BACK-UP)

"WATCHDOGALARM"

->TRIPEXCITATION

MASTERAVR

SELECTED

EXCITATIONBREAKER

TRIP

EXCITATIONON

EXCITATIONBREAKER

TRIP

24VdcBATTERY

BREAKERTRIP

BACK-UPAVR

SELECTED(ALARM)

OVER-EXCITATION

1stLEVEL(ALARM)

OVER-EXCITATION

2ndLEVEL(TRIP)

PROGRAMMABLE

1.5OR-5302

1.5OR-5301

1.5OR-5304

1.5OR-5324

1.5OR-5305

1.5OR-5306

1.5OR-5308

1.5OR-5307

1.5OR-5310

1.5OR-5309

1.5OR-5311

1.5OR-5314

1.5OR-5313

1.5OR-5312

1.5OR-5316

1.5OR-5315

1.5OR-5317

1.5OR-5318

1.5OR-5319

1.5OR-5320

1.5OR-5322

1.5OR-5321

5357

5358

5359

1.5

OR

-5303

1.5

OR

-5323

BE

3-5

9T

RP

322

24

21

50-2

7

1

XC

2

XC

3

XC

DE

CS

-200

OU

TP

UT

RE

LA

Y2

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

A17

A18

52-1

9

DE

CS

-200

OU

TP

UT

RE

LA

Y2

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

A17

A18

52-1

7

4

XC

DE

CS

-200

OU

TP

UT

RE

LA

Y3

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

A19

A20

52-1

9

5

XC

DE

CS

-200

OU

TP

UT

RE

LA

Y3

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

A19

A20

52-1

7

6

XC

DE

CS

-200

WA

TC

HD

OG

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

A13

A14

52-1

9

7

XC

AB

C

DE

CS

-200

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

52-1

7

8

XC

KM

57

58

51

-11

23

XC

24

XC

QF

1

21

(L)

22

(L)

50

-19

9

XC

AB

C

DE

CS

-200

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

52-1

9

10

XC

11

XC

K1

43

44

52

-5

12

XC

QF

1

13

(L)

14

(L)

50

-19

13

XC

1

XF

2

XF

3

XF

4

XF

14

XC

15

XC

QF

2

11

1

11

21

14

51

-3

16

XC

17

XC

KB

43

44

51

-19

18

XC

K8

41

42

44

51

-29

19

XC

20

XC

21

XC

K9

21

22

24

51

-33

22

XC

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABC

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:54

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


MA

STER

AVR

CO

NTR

OL

CIR

CU

IT

55

53

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

CO

NN

EC

TE

DU

SE

DIF

PS

S-1

00

IST

HIS

INP

UT

CA

NN

OT

BE

(4-2

0m

A)

SE

TP

OIN

TC

ON

TR

OL

AN

ALO

G

CU

ST

OM

ER

'SS

HIE

DE

DW

IRE

GR

OU

ND

ED

ON

CU

ST

OM

ER

INP

UT

(+/-

10V

dc)

AN

ALO

GC

ON

TR

OL

US

ED

FO

RT

HE

CO

NT

RO

LS

IGN

ALS

FR

OM

PS

S-1

00

(IF

US

ED

)

TO

TH

EB

AC

K-U

P

AV

R(D

EC

S-2

00)

TO

TH

EB

AC

K-U

P

AV

R(D

EC

S-2

00)

VO

LT

AG

EM

OD

EA

CT

IVE

NO

DR

OO

PN

OV

AR

/PF

1C

LO

SE

CLO

SE

1

VA

R/P

FM

OD

EA

CT

IVE

DR

OO

PM

OD

EA

CT

IVE

1C

LO

SE

OP

EN

0 0O

PE

NO

PE

N0

52J-

K52L-M

NO

TE

3:

NO

TE

3

RESET

PREPOSITION

DROOPINHIBIT

FIELDCURENT

TRANSFERTO

REGULATION

TRANSFERTO

AUTOMATIC

(VOLTAGE-VAR/PF)

REGULATION

REGULATION

REGULATION

SET-POINT

SET-POINT

RAISE

LOWER

5425

5431

5433

5432

5430

5434

1.5DB-5401

1.5DB-5402

1.5DB-5403

1.5DB-5404

1.5DB-5405

1.5DB-5406

1.5DB-5407

1.5DB-5408

1.5DB-5420

1.5DB-5421

1.5DB-5418

1.5DB-5419

1.5DB-5409

1.5DB-5410

1.5DB-5414

1.5DB-5415

1.5DB-5417

1.5DB-5416

1.5DB-5413

1.5DB-5412

1.5DB-5411

1.5

DB

-5435

1.5

DB

-54231.5

DB

-5424

D9

11

XB

D10

KB

57

58

51

-19

12

XB

D11

13

XB

K3

21

22

24

51

-35

K4

11

12

14

51

-37

AU

TO

/MA

NU

AL

CO

NT

RO

LS

ET

PO

INT

CO

NT

RO

LE

XC

ITA

TIO

NS

TA

RT

/ST

OP

CO

NT

RO

L

AN

ALO

GA

CC

INP

UT

RE

DU

ND

AN

TD

EC

S200

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

CO

M1

CO

M2

RS

485

DE

CS

-200

ALARMRESET

(52L/M)

COM

VAR/PFENABLE

COM

MANUAL(FCR)

COM

(52J/K)

AUTO(AVR)

COM

RAISE

COM

LOWER

COM

STOP

COM

START

COM

COM

V+

V-

GND

I+

I-

SECONDARYUNIT

A B C

COM

PREPOSITION

COM

PARALLEL

A27

A24

A21

A22

A36

A35

A41

A42

A39

A40

A43

A28

A44

A45

A9

A10

A8

A6

A7

A33

A34

A25

A37

A38

A26

A29

A30

A31

A32

A23

MA

ST

ER

RE

1

52-1

7

5425

55

-7

D12

14

XB

D13

15

XB

D14

16

XB

8

XF

5 6 7

D15

17

XB

9

XF

10

11

D16

5433

55

-25

5432

55

-25

5430

55

-25

5431

55

-25

D17

1.5

DB

-5435

55

-1

1.5

DB

-5435

55

-27

1.5

DB

-5423

55

-27

1.5

DB

-5424

55

-27

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABCG

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

31/0

8/20

05

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:55

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


BACK

-UP

AVR

CONT

ROL

CIRC

UIT

56

54

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

TO

TH

EM

AS

TE

R

AV

R(D

EC

S-2

00)

VO

LT

AG

EM

OD

EA

CT

IVE

NO

DR

OO

PN

OV

AR

/PF

1C

LO

SE

CLO

SE

1

VA

R/P

FM

OD

EA

CT

IVE

DR

OO

PM

OD

EA

CT

IVE

1C

LO

SE

OP

EN

0 0O

PE

NO

PE

N0

52J-

K52L-M

NO

TE

3:

NO

TE

3

RESET

PREPOSITION

DROOPINHIBIT

FIELDCURENT

TRANSFERTO

REGULATION

TRANSFERTO

AUTOMATIC

(VOLTAGE-VAR/PF)

REGULATION

REGULATION

REGULATION

SET-POINT

SET-POINT

RAISE

LOWER

EXCITATIONOFF

("FIELDBREAKERTRIP")

COMMAND

EXCITATIONON

COMMAND

CONTROLCOMMON

5425

5430 5433

5432

5431

1.5DB-5504

1.5DB-5505

1.5DB-5506

1.5DB-5508

1.5DB-5516

1.5DB-5507

1.5DB-5509

1.5

DB

-5423

1.5DB-5515

1.5

DB

-5424

1.5DB-5503

1.5DB-5510

1.5DB-55011.5DB-5521

1.5DB-5517

1.5

DB

-5435

1.5DB-5518

1.5DB-5519

1.5DB-5512

1.5DB-5513

1.5DB-5511

1.5DB-5520 1.5DB-5502

1.5DB-5523

1.5DB-5522

1.5

DB

-5435

54

-33

18

XB

D23

19

XB

KM

7 85

1-1

1

D24

20

XB

D25

K3

31

32

34

51

-35

5425

54

-9

K4

21

22

24

51

-37

AU

TO

/MA

NU

AL

CO

NT

RO

LS

ET

PO

INT

CO

NT

RO

LE

XC

ITA

TIO

NS

TA

RT

/ST

OP

CO

NT

RO

L

AN

ALO

GA

CC

INP

UT

RE

DU

ND

AN

TD

EC

S200

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

CO

M1

CO

M2

RS

485

DE

CS

-200

ALARMRESET

(52L/M)

COM

VAR/PFENABLE

COM

MANUAL(FCR)

COM

(52J/K)

AUTO(AVR)

COM

RAISE

COM

LOWER

COM

STOP

COM

START

COM

COM

V+

V-

GND

I+

I-

SECONDARYUNIT

A B C

COM

PREPOSITION

COM

PARALLEL

A27

A24

A21

A22

A36

A35

A41

A42

A39

A40

A43

A28

A44

A45

A9

A10

A8

A6

A7

A33

A34

A25

A37

A38

A26

A29

A30

A31

A32

A23

BA

CK

-UP

RE

2

52-1

9

21

XB

D26

22

XB

D27

23

XB

D28

24

XB

D29

5433

54

-29

5432

54

-29

5430

54

-29

5431

54

-29

1.5

DB

-5435

54

-33

1.5

DB

-5423

54

-33

1.5

DB

-5424

54

-33

D18

25

XB

D19

26

XB

QF

1

13

(R)

14

(R)

50

-19

QF

1

21

(R)

22

(R)

50

-19

27

XB

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABCG

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

31/0

8/20

05

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:56

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


AUXI

LIAR

YTE

RMIN

ALS

57

55

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

LE

GE

ND

:-

EX

:O

RA

NG

ET

ER

MIN

ALS

-M

:T

ES

TA

BLE

TE

RM

INA

LS

GND

XA

50-25 12.5WH-50352.5WH-5035

RE1/B2

50-27 22.5WH-50342.5WH-5034

RE2/B3

50-1 32.5BK-50242.5BK-5024

50-3 42.5BK-50212.5BK-5021

50-5 52.5BK-50202.5BK-5020

50-31 61.5GR-50411.5GR-5041

50-31 71.5GR-50421.5GR-5042

50-31 81.5GR-50431.5GR-5043

50-35 91.5GR-50401.5GR-5040

50-37 101.5GR-50221.5GR-5022

K3/12

50-39 112.5WH-50392.5WH-5039

RE1/B6

50-39 122.5WH-50382.5WH-5038

RE2/B5

XB

51-11 11.5DB-1

51-11 21.5DB-51021.5DB-5102

K7/32

51-19 31.5DB-1

51-19 41.5DB-5108

51-27 51.5DB-1

51-27 61.5DB-5107

51-35 71.5DB-1

51-35 81.5DB-5119

K3/A1

51-37 91.5DB-1

51-37 101.5DB-5120

K4/A1

54-1 111.5DB-54111.5DB-5411

54-3 121.5DB-54121.5DB-5412

54-3 131.5DB-54131.5DB-5413

54-11 141.5DB-54141.5DB-5414

54-13 151.5DB-54151.5DB-5415

54-21 161.5DB-54171.5DB-5417

54-21 171.5DB-54161.5DB-5416

55-3 181.5DB-55031.5DB-5503

55-5 191.5DB-55061.5DB-5506

55-5 201.5DB-55071.5DB-5507

55-13 211.5DB-55011.5DB-5501

55-15 221.5DB-55021.5DB-5502

55-21 231.5DB-55101.5DB-5510

55-23 241.5DB-55111.5DB-5511

55-29 251.5DB-54231.5DB-5423

55-31 261.5DB-55151.5DB-5515

55-33 271.5DB-54351.5DB-5435

XC

EX53-1 11.5OR-5301

RP3/24

EX53-3 21.5OR-5302

RP3/21

EX53-5 31.5OR-5323

EX53-7 41.5OR-5324

EX53-9 51.5OR-5303

EX53-13 61.5OR-5304

EX53-15 71.5OR-5305

RE2/A13

EX53-15 81.5OR-5306

RE2/A14

EX53-19 91.5OR-5309

QF1/21(L)

EX53-21 101.5OR-5310

QF1/22(L)

EX53-21 111.5OR-5314

K1/43

EX53-23 121.5OR-5311

K1/44

EX53-25 131.5OR-5312

QF1/13(L)

EX53-25 141.5OR-5313

QF1/14(L)

EX53-27 151.5OR-5315

QF2/114

EX53-29 161.5OR-5316

QF2/111

EX53-31 171.5OR-5318

KB/43

EX53-31 181.5OR-5317

KB/44

EX53-33 191.5OR-5320

K8/44

EX53-33 201.5OR-5319

K8/41

EX53-35 211.5OR-5321

K9/24

EX53-37 221.5OR-5322

K9/21

EX53-17 231.5OR-5307

KM/57

EX53-17 241.5OR-5308

KM/58

BA

SL

ER

EL

EC

TR

IC

CO

MP

AN

YW

AS

SE

LO

NN

ED

UA

LD

EC

S-2

00

MO

UN

TIN

GP

LA

TE

A.TH

IEBA

UT

M.R

EMY

ABCG

04/1

1/20

04

16/1

1/20

04

23/1

2/20

04

31/0

8/20

05

DRA

WIN

GS

SUB

MIT

TED

FOR

APP

RO

VAL

ASBU

ILT

STAN

DAR

DPL

ATE

UPD

ATE

DRAW

ING

SBY

:

REVI

EWED

BY

:

APPR

OVE

DB

Y:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:

REV

:57

6-1

10

3-9

1-2

97

C.D

ELPO

POLO

CD

E:

PR

EV

IOU

SP

AG

E:

TH

ISP

AG

E:

NE

XT

PA

GE

:


AUXI

LIAR

YTE

RMIN

ALS

57

56

R

13

57

911

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

LE

GE

ND

:-

EX

:O

RA

NG

ET

ER

MIN

ALS

-M

:T

ES

TA

BLE

TE

RM

INA

LS

XD

50-15 12.5BK-50152.5BK-5015

RS1

50-15 22.5BK-50142.5BK-5014

50-19 32.5BK-50072.5BK-5007

QF1/1

50-19 42.5BK-50082.5BK-5008

QF1/3

50-21 52.5BK-50092.5BK-5009

QF1/5

51-3 61.5DB-51111.5DB-5111

QF2/1

51-3 71.5DB-51141.5DB-5114

QF2/3

51-5 81.5DB-51011.5DB-5101

D7-D8/E3

51-5 91.5DB-21.5DB-2

XF

53-25 153595359

53-25 253585358

53-25 353575357

53-25 454-21 5

54305430RE2/A7

54-21 654315431

54-21 754345434

RE1/A6

54-21 854-25 9

54335433

54-25 1054325432

54-25 11

Technical Data

Technische Daten / technical data DIG 161 n/6L

Nenndaten / nominal data

Leistung SN: 7125 kVA cos ϕ: 0,80rating power p.f.

Spannung UN: 11000 V Strom IN: 374 Avoltage currentFrequenz f: 50 /s 6 polig Drehzahl n: 1000 /minfrequency poles speed

Reaktanzen und Zeitkonstanten / reactances and time constants

sat. unsat. sat. unsat.

xd: 1,28 1,43 p.u. xq: 0,71 0,71 p.u. Td0': 4,20 s

xd': 0,196 0,196 p.u. xq': 0,71 0,71 p.u. Td': 0,58 s

xd''sat: 0,111 0,122 p.u. xq'': 0,134 0,134 p.u. Td'': 0,035 s

x2: 0,122 0,128 p.u. x0: 0,033 0,037 p.u. Ta: 0,089 sra:(20°C) 0,0043 p.u. SCR: 0,78 ZN: 16,982 Ohm

Wirkungsgrad / efficiency

1/4*PN 2/4*PN 3/4*PN 4/4*PN

η [%] p.f.=0.8 93,70 96,25 97,10 97,40

η [%] p.f.=0.85 93,73 96,30 97,16 97,48

η [%] p.f.=0.9 93,75 96,35 97,23 97,55

η [%] p.f.=1.0 93,80 96,45 97,35 97,70

Kurzschlußdaten / short circuit datap.u.

Ik'': 3382 A Anfangskurzschlußwechselstrom (3~) / initial short circuit current ( 3~) 9,04

iS: 8607 A Stoßkurzschlußstrom (3~) / max. peak current (3~) 23,02

Ik: 1122 A Dauerkurzschlußstrom (3~) / sustained short circuit current (3~) 3,00

Mk2: 799,9 kNm Stoßkurzschlußmoment (2~) / initial short circuit torque (2~) 11,75

Mf: 1719,7 kNm Max.Fehlsynchronisationsmoment / max. faulty synchron.torque 25,27

MSN: 68,04 kNm Nennscheinmoment / rated kVA torque= 1,00

MN: 54,44 kNm Nennmoment / rated torque 0,80

dU': -16,4 % Transienter Spannungseinbruch bei Nennlaststoß / TVD at rated load application

dSmax.<= 5451 kVA Max. Laststoß bei p.f.0.2 mit dU'<=15% / Max. load application at p.f.0.2 for TVD<=15%

Sonstige Daten / other data

Trägheitmoment J: 1745 kgm2 * Gewicht m: 31000 kg*moment of inertia weight

Kühlluftmenge QL: 5,5 m3/s Kühlmitteltemp.: 64 °Ccooling air volume cooling medium temp

Schutzart: IP55 Isolationsklasse: Fenclosure with CACA; ambient temp.<=49°C insulation class

Bemerkungen / remarks8428196A003,B001 *exact values see valid drawing

Temperature rise according to B for S<=6250kVATemperature rise according to B+10K for S<=6700kVATemperature rise according to F for S<=7125kVAVoltage/Frequency range according to EN60034-1,zone B, voltage range extended to +-10%dU<=15% at application of totally 7806kVA,p.f.0,2 on 3 alternators running in parallel17.07.06 Rev.1/Di 03.08.06 Rev.2/Di

Alle Angaben sind gemäß VDE 0530, IEC 34 All data are in accordance to VDE 0530, IEC 34







xd: 1,21 1,34 p.u. xq: 0,67 0,67 p.u. Td0': 4,20 s

xd': 0,184 0,184 p.u. xq': 0,67 0,67 p.u. Td': 0,58 s

xd''sat: 0,104 0,114 p.u. xq'': 0,126 0,126 p.u. Td'': 0,035 s



1/4*PN 2/4*PN 3/4*PN 4/4*PN

η [%] p.f.=0.8 93,10 96,10 97,00 97,35

η [%] p.f.=0.85 93,20 96,16 97,08 97,43

η [%] p.f.=0.9 93,30 96,23 97,15 97,50

η [%] p.f.=1.0 93,50 96,35 97,30 97,65
























xd: 1,13 1,25 p.u. xq: 0,63 0,63 p.u. Td0': 4,20 s

xd': 0,172 0,172 p.u. xq': 0,63 0,63 p.u. Td': 0,58 s

xd''sat: 0,097 0,107 p.u. xq'': 0,117 0,117 p.u. Td'': 0,035 s



1/4*PN 2/4*PN 3/4*PN 4/4*PN

η [%] p.f.=0.8 92,90 95,90 96,90 97,20

η [%] p.f.=0.85 92,95 95,96 96,96 97,29

η [%] p.f.=0.9 93,00 96,03 97,03 97,38

η [%] p.f.=1.0 93,10 96,15 97,15 97,55


















DIG

161n

/6L

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

6250

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or:

0,8

Rat

ed v

olta

ge [k

V]:

11R

ated

freq

uenc

y [H

z]50

Rat

ed s

peed

[rpm

]10

00

Alt

ern

ato

r : W

irku

ng

sgra

d-K

enn

linie

- E

ffic

ien

cy C

urv

e

90,0

91,0

92,0

93,0

94,0

95,0

96,0

97,0

98,0

2030

4050

6070

8090

100

110

Lo

ad [

% r

ated

load

]

Eta [%]

PF

=0,8

PF

=0,9

PF

=1

PF

rat

ed

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.2

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-6

250k

VA

.xls

/Effi

cien

cy 5

.2S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1

Alt

ern

ato

r :

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

6250

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or:

0,8

Rat

ed v

olta

ge [k

V]:

11R

ated

freq

uenc

y [H

z]50

Rat

ed s

peed

[rpm

]10

00

DIG

161n

/6L

Tra

nsi

ent

Vo

ltag

e ri

se o

r d

rop

fo

r su

dd

en lo

ad r

emo

val o

r ap

plic

atio

n

-25

-20

-15

-10-505101520

-100

-75

-50

-25

025

5075

100

125

Sud

den

load

rem

oval

/

sud

den

load

app

licat

ion

in [%

] of r

ated

load

dep

endi

ng fr

om p

ower

fact

or

Transient voltage drop / Transient voltage rise[%]

1 p.

f.0,

8 p.

f.0,

4 p.

f.0,

1 p.

f.

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.3

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-6

250k

VA

.xls

/Vol

tage

dro

p-ris

e 5.

3S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1

Alt

ern

ato

r :

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

6250

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or:

0,8

Rat

ed v

olta

ge [k

V]:

11R

ated

freq

uenc

y [H

z]50

Rat

ed s

peed

[rpm

]10

00M

SN

rel

ated

to k

VA

: 59,

68 K

Nm

DIG

161n

/6L

Ku

rzsc

hlu

ßm

om

ente

n-V

erla

uf

2-p

olig

er K

SS

ho

rt c

ircu

it t

orq

ue

at 2

-ph

ase

SC

-15

-10-505101520

19

1725

3341

4957

6573

8189

9710

511

312

112

913

714

515

316

116

917

718

519

320

120

921

722

523

324

124

925

726

527

328

128

929

7

t / m

s

Mk/MSN in p.u.

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.5

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-6

250k

VA

.xls

/MK

2 5.

5S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1


Leistung SN: 6250 kVA cos ϕ: 0,80Rating p.f.

Spannung UN: 11,00 kV Strom IN: 328 AVoltage Current

Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1.000 min-1

Frequency SpeedSchutzart IP55Protection

Notizen / remarks:

Maximum asymmetric peak value Ispeak= 8134 A or 24,80 p.u.

Alle Angaben gemäß VDE 0530, IEC600 34 All data according VDE 0530, IEC600 34

DIG161n/6L

Stosskurzschluss-Strom, 3-phasig, asymmetrisch /Sudden short circuit current, 3-phase, asymmetrical

-10,0

-5,0

0,0

5,0

10,0

15,0

20,0

25,0

30,0

0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5

Zeit [sec.]Time

Ku

rzsc

hlu

ssst

rom

Ik3p

has

ig /

IN [

p.u

.]S

hort

-circ

uit c

urre

nt Ik

3pha

se /

IN [

p.u

. ]

Technisches Datenblatt - DiagrammeTechnical data sheet - Diagrams FM 7.3-5.7

Dokumentenname:28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/IKasym3- 5.7Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG

Revisionsstand: A vom 30.05.05

Seite 1 von 1




Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1000 min-1

Frequency Speed

Schutzart IP55Protection

Notizen / remarks:Strom / Zeit Kriterien: ( I / IN )2*t =45sCurrent/time characteristics: 1,5*IN for 30 s

1,1*IN for 1 h in 6h


DIG161n/6L

0,0

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0

4,5

5,0

1 10 100 1000 10000Zeit [s]Time

Str

om

I 1/I N

[p

.u.]

Cur

rent


Überlast KennlinieOverload capability

Dokumentenname:28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/Overload 5.8Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG


Seite 1 von 2

2,5

3

u] Nenndaten / nominal data

Rating SN: 6250 kVA p.f. 0,80Bemessungsleistung Leistungsfaktor cos ϕ:Nominal voltage UN: 11,00 kV Nominal current IN: 328 ABemessungsspannung Bemessungsstrom

Frequency fN: 50 Hz Speed n: 1000 min-1

Frequenz Drehzahl

Protection: IP55Schutzart

Remarks / Notizen:

All data according IEC 60034-1, NEMA MG1

DIG161n/6L

0

0,5

1

1,5

2

2,5

3

1 10 100 1.000 10.000

Time [s]Zeit

Inve

rse

curr

ent

I2/IN

[p

u]

Inve

rs-S

tro

m

Failure operation / im Fehlerfall

(I2/IN)2 x t = 20 IEC60034-1

(I2/IN)2 x t = 40 NEMA MG1Continuous operation / im DauerbetriebI2/IN = 0,08 IEC60034-1I2/IN = 0,10 NEMA MG1

Technical data sheet - Diagrams FM 7.3-5.9

Inverse current or unbalanced negative sequence current

Dokumentenname:28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/Inverse current 5.9Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG


Seite 1 von 2

Alt

ern

ato

r :

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

6250

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or0,

8R

ated

vol

tage

[kV

]: 11

Rat

ed fr

eque

ncy

[Hz]

50R

ated

spe

ed [r

pm]

1000

MS

N r

elat

ed to

kV

A: 5

9,68

KN

m

DIG

161n

/6L

P/Q

Lei

stu

ng

sdia

gra

mm

/ P

/Q C

apab

ility

dia

gra

m

0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,91

1,1

1,2

-0,8

-0,7

-0,6

-0,5

-0,4

-0,3

-0,2

-0,1

0,0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1,0

1,1

1,2

un

tere

rreg

t

Blin

dle

istu

ng

(p

.u.)

ü

ber

erre

gt

un

der

exci

ted

R

eact

ive

load

(p

.u.)

o

vere

xcit

ed

Wirkleistung (p.u.)Active load (p.u)

Wirk

leis

tung

Cos

phi

0,9

5C

os p

hi 0

,9co

s ph

i 0,8

cos

phi 0

,6co

s ph

i 0,4

cos

phi 0

,2

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.1

0

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-6

250k

VA

.xls

/PQ

-Dia

gram

-Sta

ndar

d 5.

10S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1

DIG

161n

/6L

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

7125

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or:

0,8

Rat

ed v

olta

ge [k

V]:

11R

ated

freq

uenc

y [H

z]50

Rat

ed s

peed

[rpm

]10

00

Alt

ern

ato

r : W

irku

ng

sgra

d-K

enn

linie

- E

ffic

ien

cy C

urv

e

90,0

91,0

92,0

93,0

94,0

95,0

96,0

97,0

98,0

2030

4050

6070

8090

100

110

Lo

ad [

% r

ated

load

]

Eta [%]

PF

=0,8

PF

=0,9

PF

=1

PF

rat

ed

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.2

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-7

125k

VA

.xls

/Effi

cien

cy 5

.2S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1

Alt

ern

ato

r :

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

7125

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or:

0,8

Rat

ed v

olta

ge [k

V]:

11R

ated

freq

uenc

y [H

z]50

Rat

ed s

peed

[rpm

]10

00

DIG

161n

/6L

Tra

nsi

ent

Vo

ltag

e ri

se o

r d

rop

fo

r su

dd

en lo

ad r

emo

val o

r ap

plic

atio

n

-30

-25

-20

-15

-10-50510152025

-100

-75

-50

-25

025

5075

100

125

Sud

den

load

rem

oval

/

sud

den

load

app

licat

ion

in [%

] of r

ated

load

dep

endi

ng fr

om p

ower

fact

or

Transient voltage drop / Transient voltage rise[%]

1 p.

f.0,

8 p.

f.0,

4 p.

f.0,

1 p.

f.

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.3

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-7

125k

VA

.xls

/Vol

tage

dro

p-ris

e 5.

3S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1

Alt

ern

ato

r :

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

7125

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or:

0,8

Rat

ed v

olta

ge [k

V]:

11R

ated

freq

uenc

y [H

z]50

Rat

ed s

peed

[rpm

]10

00M

SN

rel

ated

to k

VA

: 68,

04 K

Nm

DIG

161n

/6L

Ku

rzsc

hlu

ßm

om

ente

n-V

erla

uf

2-p

olig

er K

SS

ho

rt c

ircu

it t

orq

ue

at 2

-ph

ase

SC

-15

-10-5051015

19

1725

3341

4957

6573

8189

9710

511

312

112

913

714

515

316

116

917

718

519

320

120

921

722

523

324

124

925

726

527

328

128

929

7

t / m

s

Mk/MSN in p.u.

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.5

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-7

125k

VA

.xls

/MK

2 5.

5S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1




Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1.000 min-1

Frequency SpeedSchutzart IP55Protection

Notizen / remarks:

Maximum asymmetric peak value Ispeak= 8099 A or 21,66 p.u.


DIG161n/6L

Stosskurzschluss-Strom, 3-phasig, asymmetrisch /Sudden short circuit current, 3-phase, asymmetrical

-10,0

-5,0

0,0

5,0

10,0

15,0

20,0

25,0

0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5

Zeit [sec.]Time

Ku

rzsc

hlu

ssst

rom

Ik3p

has

ig /

IN [

p.u

.]S

hort

-circ

uit c

urre

nt Ik

3pha

se /

IN [

p.u

. ]


Dokumentenname:28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/IKasym3- 5.7Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG


Seite 1 von 1

34,04,55,0

Str

om

I1/

I N [

p.u

.]C

urre

nt




Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1000 min-1

Frequency Speed

Schutzart IP55Protection

Notizen / remarks:Strom / Zeit Kriterien: ( I / IN )2*t =45sCurrent/time characteristics: 1,5*IN for 30 s

1,1*IN for 1 h in 6h


DIG161n/6L

0,0

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

4,0

4,5

5,0

1 10 100 1000 10000Zeit [s]Time

Str

om

I 1/I N

[p

.u.]

Cur

rent


Überlast KennlinieOverload capability

Dokumentenname:28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/Overload 5.8Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG


Seite 1 von 2

2,5

3

u] Nenndaten / nominal data

Rating SN: 7125 kVA p.f. 0,80Bemessungsleistung Leistungsfaktor cos ϕ:Nominal voltage UN: 11,00 kV Nominal current IN: 374 ABemessungsspannung Bemessungsstrom

Frequency fN: 50 Hz Speed n: 1000 min-1

Frequenz Drehzahl

Protection: IP55Schutzart

Remarks / Notizen:

All data according IEC 60034-1, NEMA MG1

DIG161n/6L

0

0,5

1

1,5

2

2,5

3

1 10 100 1.000 10.000

Time [s]Zeit

Inve

rse

curr

ent

I2/IN

[p

u]

Inve

rs-S

tro

m

Failure operation / im Fehlerfall

(I2/IN)2 x t = 20 IEC60034-1

(I2/IN)2 x t = 40 NEMA MG1Continuous operation / im DauerbetriebI2/IN = 0,08 IEC60034-1I2/IN = 0,10 NEMA MG1

Technical data sheet - Diagrams FM 7.3-5.9

Inverse current or unbalanced negative sequence current

Dokumentenname:28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/Inverse current 5.9Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG


Seite 1 von 2

Alt

ern

ato

r :

Rat

ed o

utpu

t [kV

A]

7125

Rat

ed p

ower

fact

or0,

8R

ated

vol

tage

[kV

]: 11

Rat

ed fr

eque

ncy

[Hz]

50R

ated

spe

ed [r

pm]

1000

MS

N r

elat

ed to

kV

A: 6

8,04

KN

m

DIG

161n

/6L

P/Q

Lei

stu

ng

sdia

gra

mm

/ P

/Q C

apab

ility

dia

gra

m

0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,91

1,1

1,2

-0,8

-0,7

-0,6

-0,5

-0,4

-0,3

-0,2

-0,1

0,0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1,0

1,1

1,2

un

tere

rreg

t

Blin

dle

istu

ng

(p

.u.)

ü

ber

erre

gt

un

der

exci

ted

R

eact

ive

load

(p

.u.)

o

vere

xcit

ed

Wirkleistung (p.u.)Active load (p.u)

Wirk

leis

tung

Cos

phi

0,9

5C

os p

hi 0

,9co

s ph

i 0,8

cos

phi 0

,6co

s ph

i 0,4

cos

phi 0

,2

Tec

hn

isch

es D

aten

bla

tt -

Dia

gra

mm

eT

ech

nic

al d

ata

shee

t -

Dia

gra

ms

FM

7.3

-5.1

0

Do

kum

ente

nn

ame:

2819

6-di

as-7

125k

VA

.xls

/PQ

-Dia

gram

-Sta

ndar

d 5.

10S

tand

: A v

om 2

1.08

.06

AvK

Deu

tsch

lan

d G

mb

H C

o. K

G

Rev

isio

nss

tan

d:

A v

om 3

0.05

.05

Sei

te 1

von

1

Generator Manual 1

Documents

Transcript of Generator Manual 1